Zoom out
Zoom in
Vorherige Seite
1/292
Nächste Seite
Owner’s Manual
1

Brauchen Sie Hilfe? Stellen Sie Ihre Frage.

Forenregeln

Forum

Suche zurücksetzen

  • Das Verdeck schließt nicht.Es wird angezeigt:Verdeck prüfen. Es bewegt sich nicht. Kommen keine Geräusche. Eingereicht am 3-7-2022 11:48

    Antworten Frage melden

Inhalt der Seiten


  • Page 1

    Owner’s Manual



  • Page 2

    In-car safety
    There is an In-car safety & Quick Reference Guide found in
    your car which contains some quick reference concerning
    safety issues.
    Make sure you keep this Reference Guide readily available
    for all occupants to review.
    Replacement and/or additional Reference Guides may be
    ordered from your Saab dealer.



  • Page 3

    1

    Owner’s Manual
    Saab 9-3 M2005
    Safety
    Security
    9-3 Convertible
    Instruments and controls
    Interior equipment
    Starting and driving
    Car care
    Customer Assistance and Information
    Technical data
    Index
    © Saab Automobile AB 2004
    Service Readiness, Saab Automobile AB, Trollhättan, Sweden
    Printed in Sweden

    11
    41
    55
    77
    121
    145
    197
    261
    267
    283



  • Page 4

    2
    WARNING
    Failure to heed warnings may cause
    personal injury.

    NOTICE
    NOTICE texts warns of potential damage
    to the car if the recommendations are not
    followed.

    Introduction
    This manual provides practical guidance on
    driving and caring for your Saab.
    The Saab 9-3 will be available with the following engine variants:
    • 2.0t 175 hp
    • 2.0 Turbo 210 hp
    Although this manual describes the most
    important differences between model variants, it does not specify the equipment or
    features included on individual models.
    Importation and distribution of Saab automobiles, spare parts and accessories are
    handled exclusively by Saab Cars USA, Inc.
    in the United States and by General Motors
    of Canada Limited in Canada.

    We recommend that you read through the
    manual before taking the car out for the first
    time and keep it in the car for future reference.
    To find a specific item, use the overviews
    given on page 3–6. A list of content is given
    at the beginning of each section of the manual, and there is also a comprehensive
    index at the back of the book.
    Supplied with the car is a Warranty and Service Record booklet which contains important warranty information and specifies the
    regular maintenance to be carried out. Also
    included is a Quick Reference Guide, an
    Infotainment System manual, tire warranties and (U.S. customers), a dealer directory
    with Roadside Assistance Program information.

    Since the policy at Saab is one of continual
    improvement, we retain the right to incorporate modifications and to alter specifications
    during production without prior notice.
    If you have any questions concerning your
    car, its equipment, the warranty conditions,
    etc., your Saab dealer will be pleased to
    help, or you may call the Saab Customer
    Assistance Center in the U.S. at 1-800-9559007 or email them at saabcrm@saabusa.com. In Canada, please
    contact the Saab Customer Assistance
    Center at 1-800-263-1999.
    Enjoy the road ahead!
    Saab Automobile AB
    Saab Automobile AB does not accept liability for
    any damage caused by the fitting of spare parts,
    exchange parts or accessories that are not
    approved by Saab Automobile AB.



  • Page 5

    3

    Instrument panel

    Fuel gauge __________________
    Odometer and trip meter ________
    Speedometer ________________
    Tachometer __________________
    Temperature gauge____________
    Turbo gauge _________________
    Warning and indicator lights _____

    85
    83
    83
    82
    84
    84
    78

    Clock _______________________
    Profiler ______________________
    Saab Information Display (SID) ___

    92
    87
    87

    Replacing wiper blades ___
    Washers and wipers______
    Washer fluid ____________

    211
    100
    211

    Automatic climate control __
    Car care and maintenance _
    Hazard warning lights_____
    Manual climate control ____
    Seat heating ____________
    Seat heating, ACC _______

    108
    257
    99
    103
    107
    116

    Cruise Control ___________ 165
    Direction indicators _______ 98
    High/low beam control stalk
    97

    Changing bulbs __________ 213
    Front fog lights___________ 98
    Headlight levelling ________ 96
    High/low beam __________ 97
    Parking lights____________ 96
    Rear fog light____________ 98

    Ashtray _____________________
    Cigarette lighter _______________

    132
    132



  • Page 6

    4

    Exterior
    Anti-corrosion treatment ___
    Body __________________
    Service program _________
    Sunroof ________________
    Touching up paintwork ____
    Washing _______________
    Waxing and polishing _____

    Maximum loads _______________
    Mounting holes for roof carriers ___
    Roof load ____________________

    268
    188
    188

    254
    253
    262
    126
    253
    252
    253

    Brake lights _____________ 220
    Changing bulbs __________ 213
    Light switches ___________ 96
    Taillights _______________ 220

    Folding down the rear seat _
    Lighting ________________
    Load-through hatch_______
    Spare wheel ____________
    Tools __________________
    Trunk __________________

    140
    220
    142
    144
    144
    140

    Towing_________________ 190
    Towing hook eyes ________ 190
    Towing a trailer __________ 184

    Braking _____________________
    Changing wheels______________
    Spare wheel _________________
    Tire pressure ________________
    Tires _______________________
    Wheels _____________________
    Winter driving ________________

    166
    248
    246
    277
    234
    275
    181

    Hood _______________________
    Washing the engine bay_________

    198
    252

    Changing bulbs _________
    Dipswitch ______________
    Direction indicators_______
    Front lights _____________
    Headlight levelling (xenon) _
    Headlight switches _______
    Headlight washers _______

    213
    96
    98
    215
    96
    96
    211

    Central locking __________
    Child safety locks ________
    Lock buttons ____________
    Trunk lock ______________

    42
    46
    42
    45

    Economical motoring _____
    Fuel filler door __________
    Fuel gauge _____________
    Fuel grade _____________
    Refueling ______________

    179
    153
    85
    271
    153



  • Page 7

    5

    Interior

    Interior rearview mirror _________
    Vanity mirror _________________
    Door mirrors__________________

    135
    130
    134

    Airbag _________________ 29
    Steering wheel adjustment _ 122
    Steering _______________ 273

    Interior lighting: changing bulbs ___
    Interior light switches ___________
    Sunroof _____________________

    225
    129
    126

    Airbag_________________
    Child safety locks ________
    Child seats _____________
    Safety belt care _________
    Safety belts ____________

    29
    46
    22
    251
    12

    Glove box ______________
    Storage compartments____

    132
    132

    Automatic transmission ___
    Changing gears _________
    Manual transmission _____

    159
    158
    158

    Fuses _________________ 227

    Electric windows _________ 123

    Child seats ________________
    Folding down the rear seat ____
    Rear seat__________________
    Safety belts ________________
    Seat adjustment ____________
    Seat heating _______________
    Upholstery care_____________

    22
    140
    140
    12
    17
    107,
    116
    251

    Ashtray and cigarette lighter _____
    Break-In Period _______________
    Driving in hot/cold climates ______
    Ignition switch ________________
    Parking brake_________________
    Parking _____________________
    Starting the engine ____________

    132
    157
    181
    146
    173
    173
    148



  • Page 8

    6

    Engine bay

    Changing engine oil____________
    Engine: description ____________
    Engine: technical data __________
    Important considerations for driving
    Oil grade and viscosity__________

    Color code______________
    Engine number __________
    Gearbox number _________
    Warning labels __________
    Vehicle identification number

    278
    278
    278
    7
    278

    Alternator ______________
    Drive belt_______________
    Exhaust emission control __
    Ignition system __________
    Simple troubleshooting
    (A/C, ACC) _____________
    Spark plugs _____________
    Turbo gauge ____________

    210
    210
    151
    272

    203
    199
    270
    150
    270

    Coolant: checking/topping-up ____ 205
    Driving in hot climates __________ 183
    Radiator_____________________ 270
    Temperature gauge ____________
    84

    ABS brakes_____________
    Brake pads _____________
    Brake system ___________
    Brake fluid______________

    166
    206
    274
    206

    Changing a fuse _________
    Fuse table _____________
    Fuses _________________
    Relays ________________

    227
    232
    227
    232

    Topping-up fluid _________
    Wash/wipe stalk switch____
    Washer fluid ____________
    Washer jets ____________

    211
    100
    211
    212

    Battery ______________________
    Battery charge ________________
    Jump starting _________________

    208
    208
    193

    257
    272
    84

    Engine oil: checking level __ 202

    Automatic transmission _________
    Transmission: technical data _____
    Manual transmission ___________

    159
    272
    158

    Power steering________________
    Fluid: checking/topping up _______

    207
    207



  • Page 9

    7

    Warning labels
    Radiator fan:
    Radiator fan may start at any
    time.

    A/C system:
    Refrigerant at high pressure.
    Do not loosen or remove the A/C system fittings before discharging the A/C
    system. Improper service methods may cause personal injury. System to be
    serviced by qualified personnel only. For instructions consult dealer manual.
    The A/C system complies with SAE J639.
    Charge: 680 g R134a.
    Compressor oil: 150 cc PAG oil SP-10 alt.
    Saab oil 4759106

    LEVEL INDICATOR
    INDICATEUR DE NIVEAU
    DARK / NOIR

    OK
    LOW
    BAS

    MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY-P/N 53 52 000

    12V/700A/125min(SAE) 12V/700A/70Ah (EN)

    Manufactured by Tudor Spain (Exide Technologies)

    12102-EP

    700 CCA (SAE)

    • Éviter les étincelles et les flammes. Ne pas fumer. • Rincer immédiatement les yeux avec de
    l'oau Consulter un médecin rapidement.
    • Protéger les yeux car les gaz explosife peuvent
    causer la cécité ou des blessures.
    • Ne pas pencher ni ouvrir la batterie.

    12103-EP

    • Do not tip battery. Do not open battery
    KEEP OUT OF REACH FROM CHILDREN.

    Saab Automobile AB 53 53 057

    DANGER/POISON

    700 CCA (SAE)
    • Flush eyes immediatly with water
    Get medical help fast.

    • Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or severe
    burns.

    • L'acide sulfurique peut causer la cécité ou des
    brûlures graves.

    GARDER HORS DE LA PORTÉE DES
    ENFANTS

    000

    • Shield eyes, explosive gases can cause
    blindness or injury.

    12102-EP

    DANGER/POISON
    • No sparks, flames or smoking.

    000

    CLEAR
    CLAIR

    BATTERIE SANS ENTRETIEN-P/N 53 52 000

    12V/700A/125min(SAE) 12V/700A/70Ah (EN)

    Saab Automobile AB 53 53 085

    Fabriquée par Tudor Espagne (Exide Technologies)

    12103-EP

    Battery:






    No sparks, flames or smoking
    Shield eyes, explosive gases can cause blindness or injury
    Sulphuric acid can cause blindness or severe burns
    Flush eyes immediately with water. Get medical help fast
    Do not tip battery. Do not open battery








    NO SPARKS, FLAMES OR SMOKING
    SHIELD EYES
    KEEP OUT OF REACH FROM CHILDREN
    ACID
    SEE OWNER’S MANUAL
    EXPLOSIVE GAS

    CANADA
    NETTOYER LE BOUCHON
    DE REMPLISSAGE
    AVANT DE L’ENLEVER.
    UTILISER SEULEMENT
    DU LIQUIDE DOT 4 PROVENANT D’UN CONTENANT SCELLÉ.

    Coolant:
    Never open when engine hot!



  • Page 10

    8
    Jack
    • Jack is designed only for changing a tire or mounting
    tire snow chains.
    • Vehicle must be level and jack must be placed on firm
    and level ground.
    • Never crawl underneath vehicle when it is jacked up.
    JACKING INSTRUCTION
    USA

    1 Set parking brake and shift transmission to park.
    2 Fit top of jack into jacking point next to wheel to be
    changed.
    3 Crank jack so that vehicle begins to lift.
    4 Using socket wrench in tool kit, loosen wheel bolts
    one-half turn.
    5 Raise vehicle so that tire clears ground. Loosen
    wheel bolts completely and remove wheel.
    6 Mount spare wheel and tighten bolts enough so
    wheel is not loose.
    7 Lower vehicle. Tighten wheel bolts in a crisscross
    sequence.

    CANADA

    DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can occur






    Children 12 and under can be killed by the airbag
    The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place for children
    NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in the front
    Sit as far back as possible from the airbag
    ALWAYS use SEAT BELTS and CHILD RESTRAINTS

    Contact a Saab dealer if a
    xenon headlight requires
    replacement.
    This label is only found on
    cars with xenon headlights.

    Changing wheels:
    Use only on specified vehicle. Safe working load
    2425 lbs. (1100 kg). Use on level firm ground only. Do
    not get under a vehicle that is supported only by a jack,
    use vehicle support stands. No persons are to remain in
    the vehicle.



  • Page 11

    9
    Example of symbols that can be found in your car

    No sparks,
    flames or
    smoking

    Buckle up

    Headlights

    Windshield
    wipers

    Coolant temperature

    Radiator fan

    Refer to
    the Owner’s
    Manual

    Airbag

    Direction
    indicators

    Windshield
    washers

    No charge to
    battery

    Fuel

    Shield eyes

    Never place a
    rear-facing
    child seat in
    this seat

    Parking lights

    Defroster

    Foot brake

    Keep out of
    reach of
    children

    Electric
    windows

    Hazard warning lights

    Rear window
    heating

    Coolant level

    Battery acid
    contains sulphuric acid

    Deactivating
    of rear window
    switches

    Front fog
    lights

    Cabin fan

    Engine oil
    pressure

    Risk of
    explosive gas

    Central
    locking, lock

    Rear fog light

    Central
    locking,
    unlock
    Trunk lid,
    opening

    ABS brakes

    Electronic
    Stability
    Program



  • Page 12

    10
    (This page has been left blank.)



  • Page 13

    Safety

    11

    Safety
    Safety belts ___________
    Seats ________________
    Head restraints ________
    Child safety ___________
    Airbag________________

    12
    17
    21
    22
    29



  • Page 14

    12

    Safety

    Safety belts
    WARNING
    • Buckle up and adjust your safety belt
    before driving off so that you can pay
    full attention to the traffic.
    • Safety belts must be worn at all times
    by all occupants.
    • Child safety, see page 22.
    • Check that the locking tongue is properly locked in the belt lock.
    • In the event of a crash, a rear-seat
    passenger not wearing a safety belt
    will be thrown forward against the
    front-seat backrests. The stresses
    imposed on the front seat passengers
    and belts are multiplied and can result
    in needless injury or even death for all
    car occupants.

    Three-point inertia-reel safety belts are
    provided for all seats.
    The results of studies show that it is equally
    important to wear safety belts in the rear
    seat as in the front seats.

    Safety belt reminder
    When the ignition is switched on, the safety
    belt reminder in the main instrument panel
    will come on if the driver has not buckled up.
    In addition an audible signal sounds for 4–
    8 seconds, or until the driver fastens his
    belt.
    The front seat passenger is reminded to
    buckle up by the Saab Information Display
    (SID).
    Use your seatbelt.

    Driver seat safety belt reminder



  • Page 15

    Safety
    Correct position for safety belt
    WARNING

    Correct seating position

    Proper positioning of the safety belt is
    extremely important.
    • An out of position safety belt can result
    in the wearer sliding underneath the
    belt in a crash (submarining) and
    injury can result from the lap portion
    cutting into the abdomen.
    • Never fasten the safety belt with the
    shoulder belt behind the body or pull
    the belt off the shoulder and under the
    arm.
    • Two people must never share one
    safety belt. In the event of a crash
    those sharing a belt risk being crushed
    together and injured.
    Consider this:
    • Position the lap strap snugly and low
    across the hips so that it just touches the
    thighs.
    The shoulder strap must be as far in on
    the shoulder as possible.
    • Check to ensure that the belt is not twisted
    or rubbing against any sharp edges.
    • There should not be any slack in the belt.
    Pull the belt tight – particularly important
    when thick outer clothing is worn. It










    13

    is advisable to remove thick items of
    clothing.
    Refrain from tilting the backrest more than
    necessary, as the safety belt provides
    better protection when the seat is in the
    more upright position.
    Only one person per safety belt!
    For most of the time a safety belt is worn,
    the retractor will allow the wearer freedom
    of movement. The retractor locks up automatically if the belt is jerked or withdrawn
    sharply, the car tilts, the brakes are
    applied hard or a crash occurs.
    Children up to 6 years of age must always
    be seated in a child seat. Saab recommends the use of a child seat for children
    up to the age of 10.
    Children who have grown out of a child
    seat should be restrained by the car’s
    standard three-point belts. Make sure that
    the shoulder belt is not in contact with the
    neck or throat. If it is, a booster seat/cushion may be necessary.



  • Page 16

    14

    Safety

    To fasten the belt

    Front safety belts
    Fasten the belt by pulling the belt and inserting the tongue in the buckle. Check that it is
    securely fastened.
    Position the lap part low across the hips.
    Grasp the shoulder belt close to the buckle
    and pull the belt towards the shoulder to
    tighten the lap belt part.
    The belt must be as far in on the shoulder as
    possible.

    Press the red button to release the belt
    Press the red button on the belt buckle to
    release the belt.
    The front safety belts have their lower
    anchorage points on the seats. The safety
    belts follow the seats when the legroom is
    adjusted.
    Refer to page 251 for how to check the function of the safety belts, cleaning, etc.

    Belt height adjustment,
    Sport Sedan
    The belt guide on the door pillar for the front
    safety belts can be set at different heights.
    The front belt guide in the Convertible is not
    adjustable due to the belt being incorporated into the seat.

    The belt guide on door pillar
    Adjust the belt so that it is as high up as
    possible without rubbing against the neck.
    To avoid chafing in the case of a short
    person, the guide can be lowered until the
    belt comes about an inch (a few centimeters) from the throat but still provides safe
    restraint.
    Raise the belt guide by pushing it upward to
    the desired position. To lower it, depress the
    catch release button while lowering the
    guide. Check that the guide locks in its new
    position.



  • Page 17

    Safety
    Safety belt pretensioners
    WARNING
    If the car is involved in a crash, the safety
    belts, belt pretensioners and other
    components must be inspected by an
    authorized Saab dealer and replaced as
    necessary.
    Never make any alterations or repairs to
    the safety belt yourself. Visit an authorized Saab dealer for any necessary
    repairs.

    Safety belt use during pregnancy
    Pregnant women must always wear a
    safety belt to protect both themselves and
    the unborn child.
    The lap belt should be placed low, across
    the hips and over the upper thighs.

    15

    Sport Sedan: The front safety belts are
    equipped with pretensioners and force limiters. The pretensioners are activated in the
    event of a violent frontal or side-on crash.
    The safety belt pretensioners are only activated if the safety belt in question is in use
    but not activated should the car roll over.
    The safety belt pretensioners serve to
    reduce the forward movement of the body
    by tensioning the belt. The force limiters
    reduce belt loads on the body by "slackening" the safety belt slightly to absorb the
    body’s kinetic energy as gradually as possible.
    Convertible: The front and rear safety belts
    are equipped with pretensioners and force
    limiters. The pretensioners are activated in
    the event of a violent frontal or side-on
    crash. The front safety belt pretensioners
    are only activated if the safety belt in question is in use.
    The safety belt pretensioners serve to
    reduce the movement of the body by tensioning the belt, including in a roll over
    crash. The force limiters reduce belt loads
    on the body by "slackening" the safety belt
    slightly to absorb the body’s kinetic energy
    as gradually as possible.



  • Page 18

    16

    Safety

    Safety belts, rear seat
    Safety belts rear seat, Convertible, see
    page 69

    WARNING
    • Make sure that the belt does not
    become trapped when the backrest is
    folded down or raised (see page 140).
    • If cargo has to be placed on a seat, it
    must be properly secured with the
    safety belt. This reduces the risk of the
    cargo being thrown about during hard
    braking or a crash, which could cause
    personal injury.
    • Check that the belt is not twisted or
    lying against sharp edges.
    • Make sure you use the correct safety
    belt buckle. The buckles for the center
    and left-hand rear seats are close
    together.
    The three rear seats all have three-point
    safety belts with inertia reels.
    Fasten the belts by pulling the belt across
    you and inserting the tongue into the buckle.
    Check that it is securely fastened.
    Grasp the shoulder belt close to the buckle
    and pull the belt towards the shoulder to
    tighten the lap belt part.
    The belt must be as far in on the shoulder as
    possible.

    Rear safety belts
    Press the red button on the buckle to
    release the belt.
    See page 251 for the checking of belt function, cleaning, etc.

    Securing an item on the rear seat



  • Page 19

    Safety

    Seats
    WARNING
    Never adjust the driver’s seat except
    when the car is stationary.

    Manually adjusted front seats
    (if equipped)
    The following front seat adjustments can be
    made to achieve a comfortable driving
    position:
    • Height
    Sport Sedan - driver’s seat
    Convertible - both seats
    • Legroom
    Sport Sedan - both seats
    Convertible - both seats
    • Backrest rake angle
    Sport Sedan - both seats
    Convertible - both seats
    • Lumbar support firmness
    Sport Sedan - driver’s seat
    Convertible - only electrically adjustable
    front seats
    • Head restraint height
    Sport Sedan - both seats
    Convertible - both seats

    17

    We recommend that adjustments to the
    driver’s seat be performed in the following
    order:
    1 Height
    2 Legroom
    3 Backrest rake angle
    4 Head restraint height
    Lastly, adjust the position of the steering
    wheel (see page 122).
    Electrically adjustable front seats
    See page 19.
    Electric heating, front seats (option)
    See pages 107 and 116.

    Height adjustment
    Sport Sedan, driver’s seat
    Convertible, both front seats
    Lift the lever to raise the seat. The lever is
    spring-loaded to return to its neutral position. Repeated lifting of the lever will
    increase the height in steps.
    Press down the lever to lower the seat.
    Repeated downward presses of the lever
    will lower the seat in steps.



  • Page 20

    18

    Safety

    Adjusting the legroom

    Legroom adjustment
    Lift the lever under the front of the seat and
    slide the seat to the desired position.

    WARNING
    Check that the seat is locked in the new
    position. If not, it may move while the car
    is being driven and it could result in injury
    to the occupant in the event of a crash.

    Adjusting the backrest

    Backrest rake angle
    WARNING
    The backrest should be upright during
    driving, so that the safety belt, airbag and
    backrest can provide optimum protection
    in the event of emergency braking or a
    crash, in particular a rear-end crash.
    To find the most comfortable position, turn
    the knob to provide stepless adjustment of
    the backrest.

    Adjusting the lumbar support

    Lumbar support, Sport Sedan
    Adjust the firmness of the lumbar support by
    turning the knob.



  • Page 21

    Safety
    Electrically adjustable front
    seats
    (option)

    WARNING
    • The seats are actuated by powerful
    motors. Bear this in mind when adjusting the seat, and make sure that nothing gets caught and damaged. Ensure
    that nothing can be trapped behind the
    seat when adjusting it.
    • Bear in mind that children can be
    injured if they play with the electricallyoperated seats.
    • Always remove the remote control
    when you leave the car to prevent
    personal injury caused by the electrically adjustable seats, for example,
    due to children playing. Electrically
    adjustable front seats with memory
    function, see page 20.
    With the doors closed the seats can only be
    adjusted when the ignition is ON.
    However, there are two exceptions:
    • To facilitate getting into the car, both seats
    can be adjusted when either of the front
    doors is open.
    • The seats can be adjusted up to
    2 minutes after both doors have been
    closed (applicable only to cars without
    window and sunroof pinch protection).

    Adjusting the height and angle

    Height adjustment and seat
    angle
    Adjust the height of the seat with the rear
    section of the front lever.
    Adjust the angle of the seat with the front
    section of the front lever.

    Adjusting the legroom

    Legroom adjustment
    Adjust the legroom with the front lever.

    19



  • Page 22

    20

    Safety

    Adjusting the rake angle

    Backrest rake angle
    WARNING
    The backrest should be upright during
    driving, so that the safety belt, airbag and
    backrest can provide optimum protection
    in the event of emergency braking or a
    crash, in particular a rear-end crash.
    Adjust the rake angle of the backrest with
    the rear lever.

    Adjusting the lumbar support
    Driver’s seat in Sport Sedan

    Memory function buttons

    Lumbar support, driver’s seat

    Memory function

    Adjust the firmness of the lumbar support by
    turning the knob.

    (option)

    WARNING
    The legroom of the electrically operated
    driver’s seat can always be adjusted,
    whether or not a front door is open and
    irrespective of the position of the ignition
    switch.



  • Page 23

    Safety
    When the ignition is ON, all seat settings
    can be adjusted. When the door is open and
    before the remote control has been inserted
    into the ignition switch, all seat settings can
    be adjusted for up to 20 minutes.
    The memory also includes the door mirror
    settings.
    Storing and restoring settings
    1 Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.
    The lumbar support is not included by
    the memory function.
    2 Press and hold the M-button and then
    press one of the preselect buttons (1, 2
    or 3). A chime will sound to confirm that
    the settings have been saved.
    To recall programmed settings, press and
    hold the desired memory button until the
    seat and door mirrors adopt their programmed positions. The memory function
    also includes the door mirror settings.
    To facilitate reversing, the passenger-side
    door mirror can be angled down, refer to
    page 134.

    21

    Head restraints
    Sport Sedan
    Head restraint, Convertible, see page 68.

    WARNING
    • Adjust the head restraint so that the
    head is optimally supported and the
    center of the head restraint is at ear
    height, thus reducing the likelihood of
    neck injury in a crash.
    • Raise the head restraints in the seats
    that are occupied.
    The front seats are equipped with Saab
    Active Head Restraints (SAHRs). These are
    designed to reduce the risk of neck injury if
    the car is hit from behind.
    The SAHR is a mechanical system, actuated by body weight. The mechanism is built
    into the top of the backrest, where it is connected to the head restraint.
    In the event of a rear-end crash, the body is
    forced back against the backrest. This, in
    turn, causes the mechanism to press the
    head restraint forward and upward, thus limiting the backward movement of the head.

    Therefore, the SAHR does not normally
    need to be replaced or repaired after a rearend crash.
    The front and rear head restraints can be
    raised and lowered to a number of positions.
    • Raising: grasp the head restraint on both
    sides and pull it straight up.
    • Lowering: Press the head restraint
    forward and downward.
    The rear head restraints can be fully lowered to improve rearward vision when the
    rear seats are unoccupied.



  • Page 24

    22

    Safety

    Child safety
    WARNING
    • Children must always be suitably
    restrained in the car.
    • DEATH or SERIOUS
    INJURY can occur
    • Children 12 and under or
    shorter than 55 inches
    (140 cm) can be killed by the
    airbag
    • The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place
    for children
    • NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in
    the front
    • Sit as far back as possible from the
    airbag
    • ALWAYS use SAFETY BELTS and
    CHILD RESTRAINTS

    WARNING
    • Never leave children unattended in a
    car, even for a short time.
    – Children can suffer heat stroke,
    perhaps die, in a matter of minutes.
    – Children can put the car into gear and
    hurt themselves or others.
    • At gas stations, take the remote
    control out of the car while filling the
    tank.
    • Never allow children to climb on top of
    or under motor vehicles.
    • Always look for children before backing your car out of a garage or driveway.
    • To avoid carbon monoxide poisoning,
    never let a car idle in an enclosed
    garage.
    • Supervise young children around
    buckets of water while washing your
    car. Small children can drown in a
    short time in less than an inch of water.

    WARNING
    Protect children from getting
    trapped in the trunk of your car
    • Teach children not to play in or around
    cars.
    • Watch children when loading or
    unloading the car so they don´t get
    locked in by mistake.
    • Always lock the doors and trunk of
    your car, and keep the keys out of children´s sight and reach.
    • Keep the rear fold-down seat closed to
    help prevent children from getting into
    the trunk from inside the car.



  • Page 25

    Safety
    General information on child
    safety
    The same attention must be given to child
    safety in the car as is given to adults.
    Children travel most safely when properly
    restrained. However, the type of restraint
    must be appropriate for the size of the child.
    Always consult your Saab dealer before
    fitting a child seat, child restraint or booster
    cushion.
    Make sure you are acquainted with the
    legal requirements for seating children
    in the car.
    Make sure that it is possible to fit a child
    restraint in accordance with the manufacturer’s child restraint instructions.
    When fitting child restraints in cars you
    must always read the instructions supplied by the child restraint manufacturer.
    Saab recommends the use of a rearfacing child seat for as long as this is
    possible - at a minimum for all children
    under the age of 3 (approx. 15 kg). Use a
    child seat approved for the weight of the
    child.
    Saab recommends the use of a booster seat
    for children up to the age of 10.

    LATCH
    LATCH (Lower Anchorages & Top tethers
    for CHildren) is a US/Canadian safety standard for a uniform method of fitting child
    restraints without using the standard safety
    belts. Only certain child restraints are
    equipped to utilize the LATCH system.
    The LATCH system is installed in the car to
    facilitate proper fitting of child restraints
    designed for and equipped with LATCH
    attachments.

    23

    The LATCH system consists of top tether
    and lower anchorages (also called ISOFIX).
    In this vehicle, LATCH is installed at the two
    outboard seating positions in the rear seat,
    and there is a top tether on the rear center
    position (not Convertible). The top tethers
    are located on top of the parcel shelf
    (Convertible: behind the head restraints),
    see page 26. They are covered by a lid with
    a child seat anchor symbol. The lower
    anchorages are located where the seat
    cushion and seat back come together.
    There is a label above the inner lower
    anchorage, see picture on next page. Label
    consists of a symbol of a child restrained in
    a seat inside a circle.
    When fitting child restraints in cars you must
    always read the instructions supplied by the
    child restraint manufacturer.
    If you have any questions regarding LATCH
    please contact your Saab dealer.



  • Page 26

    24

    Safety

    Lower anchorages (ISOFIX) in the rear seat, Sport Sedan

    Lower anchorages (ISOFIX) in the rear seat, Convertible



  • Page 27

    Safety

    25

    LATCH child seat installation
    Before starting the installation, please read
    through this instruction, and the child seat
    installation instruction.
    1 Place the child restraint on one of the
    designated outboard rear seat cushions.
    2 Slide the attachment on the child
    restraint in between the seat cushion
    and backrest.
    3 Press the child restraint down on the
    seat, 1 in illustration.
    4 Press the child restraint rearward, lining
    up the inner restraint attachment arm
    with the label, 2 in illustration.
    5 Connect the restraint attachment arms
    to the anchorages 3 in illustration.
    6 Follow the child restraint instructions to
    confirm that both restraint attachment
    arms are properly attached to the bars.
    7 Attach the top tether strap to the in-car
    anchorage and tighten according to the
    restraint instructions, see page 26
    and 27.
    8 Pull the child restraint to make a second
    check that the restraint is securely
    attached at both the lower anchorage
    bars and the top tether strap.
    Only use the belt supplied with the child
    restraint.
    For the top tether, only use the strap supplied with the child restraint.
    The availability of LATCH child restraints is
    limited.

    Rigid 2-point lower anchorage with top
    tether

    When fitting child restraints in cars you
    must always read the instructions supplied by the child restraint manufacturer.

    Semi-rigid 2-point lower anchorage with
    top tether



  • Page 28

    26

    Safety

    Child tether anchorages for
    forward facing child seats
    Sport Sedan
    Convertible, see page 27

    WARNING
    Child top tether anchorages are designed
    to withstand only those loads imposed by
    correctly fitted child restraints.
    Under no circumstances are they to be
    used for adult safety belts.
    Child restraints with a tether strap must be
    attached according to Canadian and U.S.
    safety standards.
    If you have any questions regarding child
    anchorages please contact your Saab
    dealer.

    Child tether anchorages in parcel shelf, Sport Sedan

    The car is provided with three top tether
    anchorages. Use the one that is right behind
    the seating position in which the child
    restraint is to be installed and attach the
    restraint as follows:
    1 Open the cover that is right behind the
    child restraint, 1 in illustration.
    2 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.
    3 Secure the lower part of the child
    restraint by means of the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or the safety belts as
    described in the child restraint installation instruction.
    4 Lower the headrest and route the tether
    over it.
    5 Attach the tether to the anchorage, 2 in
    illustration.

    6 Close the cover to the middle position, 3
    in illustration.
    7 Tighten the tether so that the back of the
    child restraint is pressed hard against
    the backrest.
    8 Pull the child restraint to make a second
    check that the restraint is securely
    attached at both the lower anchorages
    bars on the safety belts and the top
    tether strap.



  • Page 29

    Safety

    27

    Child tether anchorages for
    forward facing child seats
    Convertible

    WARNING
    Child top tether anchorages are designed
    to withstand only those loads imposed by
    correctly fitted child restraints.
    Under no circumstances are they to be
    used for adult safety belts.
    Child restraints with a tether strap must be
    attached according to Canadian and U.S.
    safety standards.
    If you have any questions regarding child
    anchorages please contact your Saab
    dealer.
    The car is provided with two top tether
    anchorages. Use the one that is right behind
    the seating position in which the child
    restraint is to be installed and attach the
    restraint as follows:
    1 Remove the head restraint on the seating position where the child restraint
    shall be fitted.
    2 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.
    3 Secure the lower part of the child
    restraint by means of the lower anchor-

    How to take away the head restraint

    Top tether anchorages in the rear seat

    1 Raise the head restraint
    2 Push the catch forward and pull the head
    restraint straight upward

    4
    5
    6

    7

    ages (ISOFIX) or the safety belts as
    described in the child restraint installation instruction.
    Attach the tether to the anchorage.
    Tighten the tether so that the back of the
    child restraint is pressed hard against
    the backrest.
    Pull the child restraint to make a second
    check that the restraint is securely
    attached at both the lower anchorages
    bars on the safety belts and the top
    tether strap.
    Put the head restraint back on and make
    sure it is secure mounted. Adjust it in its
    highest position.

    WARNING
    If the size of the child restraint makes it
    impossible to put the head restraint back
    on, place it in the trunk.



  • Page 30

    28

    Safety

    Installation of child restraint
    using the standard safety belt
    WARNING
    Failure to follow all the manufacturer’s
    instructions on the use of child restraint
    systems can cause your child to strike the
    vehicle´s interior during a sudden stop or
    crash.
    Child restraints that are approved for rearward facing installation in the rear seat can
    be positioned in any of the three rear places.
    Make sure that it is possible to fit it in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
    When fitting child restraints in cars you
    must always read the instructions supplied by the child restraint manufacturer.

    If fitting a child restraint that is intended to be
    secured in position by the standard safety
    belt, make use of the locking function of the
    belt.
    Locking the belt lessens the risk that the
    seat will work loose while the car is in
    motion.
    1 Position the child restraint in the back
    seat.
    2 Route the belt in the restraint according
    to the installation instruction of the
    restraint.
    3 Pull out the belt completely until it stops.
    Then let the belt slowly pull in the slack.
    Clicking sound indicates that the lock
    function is in work.
    4 Pull the shoulder belt tight to secure the
    child restraint in position.
    5 Check for correct locking function by
    pulling on the belt. The belt must not
    unreel.

    The safety belt locking function will be deactivated when the safety belt is retracted.
    1 Disengage the safety belt latch from the
    buckle.
    2 Disengage the safety belt from the child
    restraint, according to the instructions
    from the child restraint manufacturer.
    3 Let the safety belt retract until the clicking sound ceases.



  • Page 31

    Safety

    Airbag

    Airbag system components

    WARNING
    To reduce risk of death or serious injury:
    • Always wear your safety belt.
    • Always adjust your seat so that you
    are as far back as possible but still
    able to operate the pedals and reach
    the steering wheel and controls
    comfortably.
    • Passengers 12 and under or shorter
    than 55 inches (140 cm) must always
    travel in the rear seat as the car is fitted
    with a passenger airbag.
    • Never fit a child seat in front of the
    passenger airbag.

    • Airbag in steering wheel
    • Airbag in instrument panel in front of
    passenger seat
    • Side airbags in front seat backrests
    Convertible: The side airbags help
    protect the head also
    • Inflatable curtains along length of headlining (from front to rear roof pillars)
    (Sport Sedan only)
    • Safety belt pretensioners for front seats
    (all) and outer rear seats (Convertible
    only).
    The airbag system supplements the protection provided by the safety belts to further
    enhance the safety of occupants taller than
    55 in. (140 cm).
    When the system is activated at the moment
    of impact, the airbag inflates and then
    deflates through holes in the back. The
    whole operation takes roughly 0.1 second,
    quicker than the blink of an eye.
    The steering wheel and passenger airbags
    are so-called smart airbags. The driver and
    passenger airbag system compensates for
    safety belt usage and the force of the crash
    at the moment of impact.

    29

    There are two impact sensors on the front
    bumper, under the lacquered shell. Very
    soon after the moment of impact, these
    register that the car is involved in a crash.
    Using this information and data from the
    central sensor in the control module, the
    control module determines whether or not to
    inflate the airbags. The control module also
    controls whether other components of the
    airbag system are to be deployed: safety
    belt pretensioners, inflatable curtains (Sport
    Sedan) and roll over bars (Convertible).
    Which airbag system components are
    deployed depends on a number of factors,
    such as the force of the crash and the angle
    of impact.
    If the airbag system registers forces equivalent to a high-speed crash (airbags inflated
    to Stage II), the inflatable curtains will also
    be activated (Sport Sedan) see page 35.
    If a fault arises in the airbag system during
    a journey, the airbag warning lamp on the
    main instrument panel will come on and the
    Saab Information Display (SID) will display:
    Airbag malfunction.
    Contact Saab dealer.



  • Page 32

    30

    Safety

    Inflated airbag (driver’s side).
    Inflation and deflation of airbag takes
    approx. 0.1 s
    The driver and passenger front airbags are
    triggered by violent front-end crashes. They
    are not activated by minor front-end
    impacts, if the car overturns or by rear- and
    side-impacts.
    The car is equipped as standard with
    a passenger airbag.

    Both front airbags inflated

    Note:
    Impact sensors react differently depending
    on whether or not the front safety belts on
    the driver’s and passenger sides are used.
    Situations can therefore arise where only
    one of the airbags inflates. It is also possible
    for only the safety belt pretensioners to be
    activated and for the airbags to remain uninflated.
    If only Stage I is activated at the moment of
    impact, Stage II will automatically be activated later to neutralize the gas generator in
    the airbag.



  • Page 33

    Safety

    Airbag system
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8

    Steering wheel with integral airbag
    Passenger airbag
    Side airbag
    Inflatable curtain (Sport Sedan only)
    Sensors in front bumper
    Sensor, side-impact protection
    Sensor, side-impact protection (Sport Sedan only)
    Electronic control module and central sensor (SDM)

    31

    Accessories and other equipment must
    not be fitted to the surfaces marked as
    these are where the airbags inflate in the
    event of a crash.



  • Page 34

    32

    Safety
    WARNING

    • Even if the car is equipped with
    AIRBAGS, safety belts must still
    always be worn by all occupants.
    • Note that because an airbag inflates
    and deflates extremely rapidly, it will
    not provide protection against a
    second impact occurring in the same
    incident. Always use your safety belt.
    • Always sit with the whole of your back
    in contact with the backrest of the seat,
    and with your seat as far back as is
    practical.Otherwise you will be thrown
    back against the backrest when the
    airbag inflates which could cause you
    injury or death. The airbag needs
    room in which to inflate.

    • Never attach anything to the steering
    wheel or passenger side of the instrument panel, as this could result in
    injury if the airbag should inflate. The
    same applies to anything you might
    have in your mouth, such as a pipe, for
    instance.
    • Some components of the airbag will
    be warm for a short time. In some
    circumstances the airbag can cause
    minor burns or abrasions to the body
    when the airbag inflates/deflates.
    • Never rest your hands or forearms on
    the steering-wheel center padding.

    • If the airbag warning light
    remains
    on after the car has been started or
    comes on while you are driving, have
    the car checked immediately by an
    authorized Saab dealer. The warning
    light could signify that the airbags may
    not inflate in a crash, or they could
    even inflate without a crash. See
    page 81.
    • Fumes are generated by the chemical
    reaction that inflates the airbag.
    Skin surfaces that show signs of irritation should be washed with clean
    water and a mild soap as soon as
    possible.
    In the event of eye irritation, flush the
    eyes thoroughly with clean water for at
    least 20 minutes.
    In case of persistent irritation, consult
    a doctor.



  • Page 35

    Safety
    Operation of the steering wheel airbag in
    a front-end crash

    Front passenger seat
    WARNING

    Moment of impact.

    WARNING
    Sensors detect a
    deceleration and send
    a signal via the control
    module to a gas generator that inflates the
    airbag.

    The inflating airbag
    cushions the driver.

    Airbag now fully
    inflated.

    The airbag starts to
    deflate.

    33

    Never secure a rear-facing child seat in
    the right front seat of a car equipped with
    a passenger airbag. Inflation of the airbag
    in the event of a crash could seriously
    injure or kill a child.
    The system is the same as that used on the
    driver’s side.
    The airbag systems are interconnected and
    have a common warning light
    . The passenger airbag module is housed in the
    fascia above the glove box and is marked
    "AIRBAG".
    Both airbags will be inflated in the event of a
    moderate to severe frontal, or near-frontal
    crash, even if the passenger seat is unoccupied.
    The car is equipped as standard with
    a passenger airbag.

    • DEATH or SERIOUS
    INJURY can occur
    • Children 12 and under or
    shorter than 55 inches
    (140 cm) can be killed by the
    airbag
    • The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place
    for children
    • NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in
    the front
    • Sit as far back as possible from the
    airbag
    • ALWAYS use SAFETY BELTS and
    CHILD RESTRAINTS
    • Never allow a child to stand in front of
    the seat or to sit on the lap of a front
    seat passenger. Serious injury or
    death could result if the airbag is
    inflated in a crash.
    • The glove box must be closed while
    travelling. An open glove box door
    could cause leg injuries in the event of
    a crash.



  • Page 36

    34

    Safety

    • Never place anything on the dash or in
    front of the seat as, in addition to being
    a hazard to passengers, this could
    interfere with the function of the airbag
    in the event of a crash. The same
    applies to the mounting of accessories
    on the dash.
    • Keep feet on the floor – never put feet
    up on the dash, on the seat or out of
    the window.
    • Do not carry anything in your lap.

    Head protection
    The pillar trim and headlining (not Convertible soft top) are designed to absorb energy,
    softening possible blows to the head. After
    a crash, these items must be changed in the
    seat positions that were occupied. Never fit
    accessories to the pillar trim or headlining
    as these could reduce the effectiveness of
    the head protection and inflatable curtain
    (Sport Sedan).

    Side-impact protection

    WARNING
    • This car is equipped with side airbags
    and no extra seat cover should be
    fitted. Failure to observe this warning
    could result in the side airbags not
    inflating as intended and thus not
    providing the intended protection
    either.
    • Never place any object in the area that
    would be occupied by the inflated airbag.
    • For optimum protection, sit upright in
    the seat, with your safety belt correctly
    fastened.
    • The side-impact protection will only be
    activated in the event of a side-on
    crash and not in the event of a rearend crash or the car rolling over. For
    the Convertible’s Roll-over protection
    see page 70.
    • Damage or wear to the seat cover, or
    the seat seam, in the area of the side
    airbag must be repaired immediately
    by an authorized Saab dealer.

    The side airbags, which help protect the
    upper body (head also in Convertible), are
    integrated in the outside edges of the front
    seat backrests. The side impact protection
    of the Sport Sedan also includes inflatable
    curtains (see page 35).
    The side impact protection will be activated
    if certain predetermined conditions are met
    such as the force and angle of the impact,
    the speed of the car on impact, and at which
    point on the car´s side the impact occurs.
    The side-impact protection is only activated
    on the side of impact, while the safety belt
    pretensioners on both sides are deployed.
    The front seats and outer rear seats have
    safety belt pretensioners.
    There are two sensors on each side of the
    car, one at the rear of each door sill and one
    in the lower part of each C-pillar.
    Convertible: The Convertible has two side
    impact protection sensors, one on each side
    of the car. These are located at the rear of
    the sills.



  • Page 37

    Safety

    35

    Inflatable curtains, Sport Sedan
    WARNING

    Inflated side airbag and inflatable curtain,
    Sport Sedan

    Inflated side airbag with head protection,
    Convertible

    • Do not sit with your head resting
    against the side window. The inflatable curtain is designed to inflate
    between the window and the head.
    Resting the head against the window
    could prevent the inflatable curtain
    from providing the intended
    protection.
    • Hang only light clothes from the hooks
    on the rear seat courtesy handles. The
    items of clothing must not contain
    heavy or sharp objects. Do not use
    wire coat hangers.
    • Do not position a sun visor or similar
    item in the area that would be filled by
    the inflatable curtain.
    • To reduce the risk of head injuries in
    the event of a crash, the roof pillars
    and headlining incorporate cushioning
    material. Do not attach anything to the
    car’s headlining, roof pillars or side
    panels as this could prevent the sideimpact protection from providing the
    intended protection.
    • Do not stack loads so high that they
    could encumber the inflatable curtain
    in the event of a crash.



  • Page 38

    36

    Safety

    The inflatable curtains, which protect the
    head, are concealed along the lengths of
    the headlining (all the way from front to rear
    roof pillars).
    The inflatable curtains inflate at the same
    time as the side airbags in the front seats in
    case of a side-on impact.
    The inflatable curtains reduce the risk of
    head injuries to the occupants of the car’s
    outer seats. The inflatable curtains deploys
    into the window area between the front and
    rear roof pillars.
    If the airbag system registers forces equivalent to a high-speed frontal crash (Stage II
    for the steering wheel and passenger
    airbags), the inflatable curtains will also be
    deployed.

    Inflated inflatable curtain, sport Sedan

    Prohibited seating position

    For optimal protection, do not sit too close to
    the door. Bear this in mind, for example, if
    someone is sleeping in the car. The inflatable curtain comes down from the headlining and covers a large portion of the side
    windows.



  • Page 39

    Safety
    Airbag warning lamp
    WARNING
    • If the airbag readiness light stays on
    after you start your vehicle, it means
    the airbag system may not be working
    properly. See page 81.
    • The airbags in your vehicle may not
    inflate in a crash, or they could even
    inflate without a crash.
    • To help avoid injury to yourself or
    others, have your vehicle serviced
    right away if the airbag readiness light
    stays on after you start your vehicle.

    What Will You See After an
    Airbag Inflates?
    After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates,
    so quickly that some people may not even
    realize the airbag inflated. Some components of the airbag module - the steering
    wheel hub for the driver's frontal airbag, the
    instrument panel for the right front passenger's frontal airbag or the ceiling of your
    vehicle near the side windows - will be hot
    for a short time. The parts of the bag that
    come into contact with you may be warm,
    but not too hot to touch. There will be some
    smoke and dust coming from the vents in
    the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does
    not prevent the driver from seeing or being
    able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop
    people from leaving the vehicle.

    37

    WARNING
    When an airbag inflates, there is dust in
    the air. This dust could cause breathing
    problems for people with a history of
    asthma or other breathing trouble. To
    avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should
    get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you
    have breathing problems but can not get
    out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates,
    then get fresh air by opening a window or
    a door. If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment, you
    should seek medical attention.
    In many crashes severe enough to inflate an
    airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle
    deformation. Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger airbag.
    • Airbags are designed to inflate only once.
    After an airbag inflates, you will need
    some new parts for your airbag system. If
    you do not get them, the airbag system
    will not be there to help protect you in
    another crash. A new system will include
    airbag modules and possibly other parts.
    The service manual for your vehicle
    covers the need to replace other parts.
    • Your vehicle is equipped with a crash
    sensing and diagnostic module which
    records information after a crash. See
    Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
    Recorders on page 266.



  • Page 40

    38

    Safety

    • Let only qualified technicians work on
    your airbag system. Improper service can
    mean that your airbag system will not
    work properly. See your dealer for
    service.
    Notice: If you damage the covering for
    the driver's or the right front passenger's
    airbag, or the side impact airbag covering on the ceiling near the side windows,
    the bag may not work properly. You may
    have to replace the airbag module in the
    steering wheel, both the airbag module
    and the instrument panel for the right
    front passenger's airbag, or side impact
    airbag module and ceiling covering for
    the roof-mounted side impact airbag. Do
    not open or break the airbag coverings.

    Servicing the airbag system
    The airbag system must be inspected as
    part of the normal service program but otherwise may be regarded as maintenancefree.

    Scrapping or working on airbag
    and belt pretensioners
    WARNING
    • Under no circumstances should any
    modifications be made that affect the
    steering wheel or the airbag’s electrical circuitry.
    • During any welding, both battery
    cables must be disconnected and
    covered.
    • Before quick drying paint in the vicinity
    of the electronic control module, the
    module’s grounding points and wiring
    must be covered.
    • Airbags and safety belt pretensioners
    must be deployed under controlled
    conditions before the car is scrapped
    or any of the system’s components are
    removed. Airbags or belt pretensioners that have been deployed as a
    result of a crash must be replaced by
    new ones.
    • Airbag-system components must
    never be transferred for use in another
    vehicle.
    • All work involving the scrapping or
    replacement of airbags or belt pretensioners must be carried out by authorized personnel only.



  • Page 41

    Safety
    Frequently asked questions on
    function of the airbag
    Do you still need to wear a safety belt if airbags are fitted?
    Yes, always! The airbag system components merely supplement the car’s normal
    safety system. Moreover, the front airbags
    will only be actuated in a moderate to severe
    frontal, or near-frontal crash, which means,
    of course, that they provide no protection in
    minor frontal crashes, major rear- or sidecrashes or if the car rolls over.
    The safety belts help to reduce the sideway
    movement of the body in a crash.
    But they also ensure that, if a crash occurs
    in which the airbags are inflated, the airbag
    will make the optimum contact with the
    occupant, i.e. square on from the front. If the
    occupant meets the airbag in an offset position, the protection afforded will be reduced.

    In addition, airbags provide no protection
    against a secondary impact occurring in the
    same incident. So there is no doubt about
    the benefit of wearing safety belts at all
    times.
    Do not sit too close to the airbag: it needs
    room to inflate.
    The airbag inflates very quickly and powerfully in order to protect an adult, before they
    are thrown forward, in a serious frontal
    crash.
    How do I position the seat to leave room for
    the airbag to inflate?
    Don’t have your seat too far forward.
    Recline the seat back to increase the distance between you and the airbag. For short
    drivers, special accessory pedal extensions
    are available through your Saab dealer.
    Airbags inflate extremely rapidly and with
    great force – to be fast enough to protect an
    adult in the seat.

    39

    When do the airbags in the steering wheel
    and passenger side of the dash board
    inflate?
    The airbag will only be inflated under certain
    predetermined conditions in a moderate to
    severe frontal, or near-frontal crash,
    depending on such factors as the force and
    angle of the impact, the speed of the car on
    impact, and the resistance to deformation of
    the impacting object.
    The airbag can only be activated once in the
    same incident.
    Do not attempt to drive the car after an
    airbag has been inflated, even if it is possible.
    What won’t trigger the airbag?
    The airbag will not be activated in all frontal
    crashes. For instance, if the car has hit
    something relatively soft and yielding (e.g. a
    snow drift or a hedge) or a solid object at a
    low impact speed, the airbag will not necessarily be triggered.



  • Page 42

    40

    Safety

    How loud is the inflation?
    The noise of the inflation is certainly loud,
    but it is of an very short duration and will not
    damage your hearing. For a short time afterwards you could experience a buzzing
    noise in your ears.
    Most people who have experienced it
    cannot remember the noise of the inflation
    at all – all they remember is the noise of the
    crash.
    Can you still use a child seat in the front if a
    passenger airbag is installed?
    Definitely not!
    Children 12 and under or shorter than
    55 inches (140 cm) can be killed by the airbag.
    The back seat is the safest place for children.
    Never put a rear-facing child seat in the
    front.
    Sit as far back as possible from the airbag.
    Always use seat belts and child restraints.

    What should I do if the AIR-BAG warning
    light comes on?
    If the warning light is on, it means that a fault
    has been detected in the system. The
    airbag cannot be relied on to operate as
    intended and it might even be activated
    erroneously. You should therefore take the
    car to an authorized Saab dealer as soon as
    possible.

    Are the dust and fumes given off when the
    airbag operates at all harmful?
    Most people who have remained in a car
    with little or no ventilation for several minutes complained only of minor irritation of
    the throat and eyes. Avoid as much as possible getting dust on your skin as there is a
    risk of skin irritation.
    If you suffer from asthma, the incident may
    bring on an attack, in which case you should
    follow the normal procedure advised by
    your doctor. It is advisable to consult a
    doctor afterwards.



  • Page 43

    Security

    41

    Security
    Doors ________________
    Central locking ________
    Car alarm _____________

    42
    42
    50



  • Page 44

    42

    Security

    Doors

    Central locking

    Open the door by lifting the door handle.
    The following message appears on the
    Saab Information Display (SID) if a door is
    not closed (text displayed first when vehicle
    speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) and the
    door has still not been closed):
    Close doors.

    WARNING
    Leaving children or pets unattended in a
    locked car is dangerous. It is also dangerous to leave children in a vehicle with the
    ignition key. A child or others could be
    badly injured or even killed.

    Remote control
    The remote control and ignition key are integrated in one unit, and referred to in this
    manual as the remote control.
    The remote control contains a mechanical
    key, referred to in this manual as the traditional key. This traditional key can be used
    in an emergency to lock or unlock the
    driver’s door from outside (see page 44).
    This key does not fit the ignition switch.

    A key code number is supplied with your
    car. This number needs to be quoted for
    ordering a new traditional key (contained in
    the remote control). Therefore, keep this
    number in a safe place.
    The remote control contains an electronic
    code that is unique to your car. When the
    remote control is inserted into the ignition
    switch, this code is checked. If the code is
    incorrect, the car will not start.
    The car is supplied with two remote controls. It is possible to have up to five remote
    controls programmed for the car at any one
    time. If one is lost, a replacement should be
    obtained as soon as possible. Contact your
    Saab dealer. When a new key is programmed into the car, the lost key will be
    deprogrammed automatically.
    Note:
    If a new remote control has to be ordered
    and programmed, at least one old one is
    required for the locking system’s electronic
    unit to recognize the new (ordered) remote
    control.
    Once the new remote control has been programmed, the old unit that is lost will not
    work. Therefore you should carry two
    remote controls separately, especially on
    long journeys.



  • Page 45

    Security

    43

    Remote control functions

    NOTICE
    The remote control contains delicate
    electronics.
    • Do not expose it to water.
    • Avoid rough handling.

    Remote control
    1
    2
    3
    4

    Locks car
    Unlocks car and turns on cabin lighting
    Unlocks and opens trunk lid.
    Turns on exterior and cabin lighting.
    Activates panic function

    • Do not place the remote control where
    it may be subjected to high temperatures, e.g. on the instrument panel.
    • Warm the remote control in your
    hands for a couple of minutes if it has
    become very cold to prevent malfunction.
    • For details on changing the battery,
    refer to page 48.

    Button Pressed once

    Locks all doors
    and trunk lid.
    Convertible: also
    fuel filler door.
    Unlocks driver´s
    door.
    Convertible: also
    fuel filler door.
    Unlocks and
    slightly opens
    trunk lid.
    Checks number
    of remote controls, see
    page 47.
    Turns on exterior
    and cabin lighting
    *) (for 30 s) or
    turns off lighting
    and deactivates
    panic alarm.

    Pressed
    twice

    Hold and
    press the
    button more
    than 2 s

    Comfort
    The other
    opening, see
    doors are
    page 123.
    unlocked
    and the trunk
    lid switch is
    enabled.

    Panic alarm
    (activates
    alarm manually), see
    page 52.

    *) parking lights, side direction indicators,
    taillights and license plate lighting.



  • Page 46

    44

    Security

    Locking/unlocking the car
    WARNING
    Leaving children or pets unattended in a
    locked car is dangerous. It is also dangerous to leave children in a vehicle with the
    ignition key. A child or others could be
    badly injured or even killed.
    Never lock anyone in the car.
    Remote locking and unlocking also control
    the car alarm.
    Remote locking
    Press the
    button once: all doors and
    the trunk lid locked (Convertible: also fuel
    filler door).
    The hazard warning lights will flash once to
    confirm.

    Remote unlocking
    Pressing the
    button once: the driver´s
    door is unlocked (Convertible: also fuel filler
    door). Press a second time to unlock the
    rest of the doors and enable the trunk lid
    switch.
    The hazard warning lights will flash twice to
    confirm.
    If a fault arises in the locking system, the
    Saab Information Display (SID) will display:
    Lock system failure.
    Contact Saab dealer.
    Saab Information Display (SID), see
    page 87.
    Intermittent malfunctioning
    Equipment in the vicinity of the car that uses
    the same frequency as the remote control
    may cause interference to the remote control signal. In this case, retry from another
    angle and aim at the receiver located by the
    steering wheel.

    Locking/unlocking the front left-hand door
    with the traditional key
    1 Lock
    2 Unlock

    If remote unlocking should fail to work
    1 Remove the traditional key from the
    remote control by pressing the emblem
    on the reverse of the remote control.
    (This key only fits the front left-hand
    door.)
    2 Carefully remove the cover plate from
    the keyhole in the door.
    3 Unlock the door with the key.
    The car alarm will be tripped. To silence the
    alarm, insert the remote control into the ignition switch.



  • Page 47

    Security

    45

    Locking a car with dead battery

    Trunk lid

    The steering wheel lock requires sufficient
    battery voltage to lock and unlock. If the battery voltage drops below a certain level
    while the remote control is in the ignition
    switch, you will not be able to remove the
    remote control.
    If you must leave the car, proceed as
    follows:

    Opening
    The trunk lid is unlocked and slightly opened
    when the
    button on the remote control
    or on the inside of the driver’s door is
    pressed once.
    The hazard warning lights will flash three
    times to confirm.

    1 Lock the car by pressing down the lock
    buttons on the doors.
    2 Lock the front left door from outside with
    the traditional key (see page 44). The
    car is now locked but the car alarm will
    remain inactive.

    Closing
    The trunk lid is locked when closed.
    If the doors are locked when the trunk lid is
    closed it is armed and the movement sensor
    in the cabin will be armed.

    Opening button on driver’s door



  • Page 48

    46

    Security
    the battery from running flat. Also, if the car
    has electrically adjustable seats, these will
    cease to operate.

    Child safety locks

    Central locking switch

    Switches on front doors
    The central locking can also be operated
    from inside the car using the button by each
    front door handle.
    • Locking the car with the remote control
    renders these buttons inoperative.
    • If you are sitting in the car and press the
    button on the driver’s door, this will unlock
    the driver’s door. Press the button a
    second time to unlock the remaining
    doors and the trunk lid. The button on the
    passenger door works in the same way
    except that this first unlocks the passenger door. During this operation the rear
    doors remain locked.
    If the car is left with one or more doors open,
    the interior lighting will be switched off automatically after 20 minutes. This is to prevent

    The rear doors are equipped with child
    safety locks that are activated by means of
    a catch next to the door latch.
    Insert a screwdriver or the traditional key
    (enclosed in the remote control) and turn it
    45° in the direction shown on the label on
    the door.
    When the child safety lock is in the locked
    position, the door can only be opened from
    outside the car.

    WARNING
    If small children are carried in the rear
    seat, the safety locks on the rear doors
    should be activated to prevent unintentional opening from the inside.

    Child safety locks



  • Page 49

    Security
    Trunk Release Handle

    Reprogramming lock system
    functions

    There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release
    handle located inside the trunk on the latch.
    This handle will glow following exposure to
    light. Pull the release handle down to open
    the trunk from inside.

    Certain lock system functions can be
    reprogrammed at a Saab dealer (see
    page 280).

    Checking the number of remote
    controls

    NOTICE
    The trunk release handle was not
    designed to be used to tie down the trunk
    lid or as an anchor point when securing
    items in the trunk. Improper use of the
    trunk release could damage it

    47

    To check the number of remote controls that
    are programmed for the car:
    1 Insert the remote control into the ignition
    switch and turn it to ON.

    Trunk Release Handle

    2 Press and hold the
    button for more
    than 2 seconds within 30 seconds after
    the ignition switch has been turned to
    the ON position.
    3 The Saab Information Display (SID) will
    now display the number of remote
    controls that are programmed for your
    car, and which of these (1–5) is in the
    ignition switch.
    Example of SID message:
    2: standard key
    Key No: 1



  • Page 50

    48

    Security

    Changing the key battery
    WARNING
    Keep the battery and other small components of the remote control out of reach of
    children.

    NOTICE
    The electronics of the remote control are
    sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Incorrect handling when changing the battery
    can damage the remote control. Avoid
    touching electronic components of the
    remote control with your hands.
    When the voltage of the remote control battery drops below a certain level, the Saab
    Information Display (SID) will display:
    Remote control battery
    low. Replace battery.
    Change the battery as soon as possible to
    avoid malfunctioning.

    Battery type: For optimum performance in
    all temperatures and good service life, Saab
    recommends the use of a Sony or Panasonic CR2032, 3V lithium battery.
    The battery should last for about 4 years of
    normal use.
    The battery type is marked on the inside of
    the remote control. Avoid leaving fingerprints on the faces of the battery.
    1 Press the emblem on the reverse of the
    remote control to remove the traditional
    key.

    Press the emblem to remove
    the traditional key
    2 Insert the tip of the key into the small slot
    and turn the key to split the remote
    control.



  • Page 51

    Security

    Change the battery and fit together
    the two halves of the remote control
    3 Change the battery. Fit the new battery
    so that it is positioned in the same way
    as the old battery, with the positive (+)
    side facing down.
    4 Fit the two halves of the remote control
    together and press them together until
    you hear several clicks. Avoid pressing
    the buttons. Reinsert the traditional key
    into the remote control.

    5 After changing the battery in the remote
    control, it is only possible to use the
    remote control a limited number of times
    before synchronization with the car is
    lost. Therefore, do not press the buttons
    on the remote control repeatedly directly
    after changing the battery.
    Unlock the car and insert the remote
    control into the ignition switch to
    synchronize the remote control and car.
    If the central locking system does not work
    after changing the battery and the car is
    locked, proceed as follows:
    1 Unlock the front left door with the traditional key. If the car has a car alarm, this
    will be tripped.
    2 Open the door and insert the remote
    control into the ignition switch. If the car
    has a car alarm, this will be silenced.
    The remote control and receiver unit are
    now synchronized.

    49

    Immobilizer
    The remote control contains an electronic
    code that is unique to your car. When the
    remote control is inserted into the ignition
    switch, this code is checked and the LED on
    the dashboard double-flashes for
    3 seconds. If the code is correct, the car can
    be started.
    Each time you remove the remote control
    from the ignition, the electronic starting
    interlock is activated, the LED doubleflashes for 3 seconds and the car becomes
    immobilized. If an incorrect remote control is
    now inserted into the ignition switch (e.g.
    the remote control of another car), the
    immobilizer will remain operative (the LED
    will not flash for 3 s) and it will not be possible to start the car.
    If the immobilizer system malfunctions, the
    Saab Information Display (SID) displays:
    Immobilizer failure.
    Try starting again.
    Contact Saab dealer.



  • Page 52

    50

    Security

    If, when inserted into the ignition switch,
    there is a problem checking the electronic
    code of the remote control, the following
    message will appear on the SID:
    Key not accepted.
    Contact Saab dealer.
    Visit a Saab dealer to have the problem
    checked and rectified.

    Car alarm
    WARNING
    Leaving children or pets unattended in a
    locked car is dangerous. It is also dangerous to leave children in a vehicle with the
    ignition key. A child or others could be
    badly injured or even killed.
    The car alarm is armed when the car is
    locked with the remote control.
    The car alarm will not be armed if you
    lock the car with the traditional key (see
    page 44).
    All the doors, the hood and the trunk lid are
    monitored by the alarm.

    The alarm is armed 11 seconds after the car
    has been locked by remote control.
    During the delay period, the LED shines
    constantly. It will then start to flash once
    every 3 seconds. The LED is located on the
    dashboard.
    If a door or the trunk lid is open when the car
    is locked with the remote control, the LED
    will flash 3 times per second for
    11 seconds. Check that the doors, hood
    and trunk lid are closed.
    If the signal persists, contact a Saab dealer
    to have the problem checked and rectified.
    Locking the trunk lid: If you unlock the
    trunk lid from outside the car with the
    button on the remote control, you must lock
    the car with the
    alarm.

    button to arm the car



  • Page 53

    Security
    To avoid any inconvenience, make sure that
    anyone using the car is familiar with how the
    car alarm and the locking system work.
    If the alarm has been tripped since the car
    was last locked, the Saab Information Display (SID) will display:
    Alarm has been triggered
    since being armed.
    If a fault arises in the car alarm system, the
    Saab Information Display (SID) will display:
    Theft protection failure.
    Contact Saab dealer.

    Arming the car alarm

    What trips the alarm?

    The alarm is armed when all doors, the hood
    and the trunk lid are closed and you lock the
    car with the remote control.

    The alarm will be tripped if:

    51

    • a door, the hood or the trunk lid is opened
    • somebody tries to hotwire the car

    Signals when the alarm is tripped
    If the alarm is triggered, the following alarm
    signals will be set off:
    • all direction indicators flash for 5 minutes.
    • the horn sounds for 30-second intervals
    with 10-second breaks (max. 10 cycles).
    The signals can vary between markets
    and due to legal and insurance requirements.



  • Page 54

    52

    Security

    Switching off the alarm if tripped
    If the alarm has been triggered (direction
    indicators flashing and horn sounding) it can
    be turned off by pressing one of the buttons
    on the remote control or, if you are sitting in
    the car, by turning the ignition to ON (see
    below).
    Turns off lights and horn.
    Unlocks car.
    Turns off lights and horn.
    Car remains locked.
    Turns off lights and horn.
    Unlocks trunk.
    Turns off lights and horn.
    Turns on exterior and cabin lighting. Car remains locked.
    If sitting in the car: Turn the remote
    control to ON in the ignition switch

    NOTICE
    • It is possible to inadvertently deactivate the car alarm and at the same
    time unlock the car, if the button on the
    key is pressed by mistake when the
    car is still within its range.
    • When locking the car by remote
    control in extremely cold weather, it is
    advisable to check that the lock
    system has operated properly. To do
    so, check that the interior locking
    buttons are all down.
    If not, unlock and relock the car again.

    Panic function
    The car alarm includes a panic function.
    This function allows the alarm to be started
    manually, for example, to attract attention.
    The panic alarm can only be activated while
    the car is stationary. The alarm is silenced if
    the car is driven off.
    When the alarm is tripped, the lights and
    horn come on for 3 minutes or until you
    press one of the remote control buttons.
    To start the alarm manually proceed as
    follows:
    • Press and hold the
    button on the
    remote control for more than 2 seconds,
    or if you are sitting in the car...
    • Press and hold the
    or
    button on
    one of the front doors for more than
    2 seconds.
    To switch off the alarm:
    • Press one of the remote control buttons
    or, if you are sitting in the car, the
    buttons on one of the front doors.

    or



  • Page 55

    Security
    Overview of functions
    Locking/arming

    Direction indicators flash once.

    Unlocking/
    disarming

    Direction indicators flash twice.

    Unlocking/
    disarming trunk
    lid

    Direction indicators flash three times.

    Alarm triggered

    Direction indicators flash for 5 min.
    The horn sounds for 30-second intervals with
    10-second breaks (max. 10 cycles) or until you
    press one of the remote control buttons or turn
    the remote control ON in the ignition switch.

    Remote control

    Normal range: 5–16 yds. (5–15 metres).
    In favorable conditions the range can be significantly greater.

    Remote control
    battery

    Normal life: approx. 4 years.
    Change the battery when the SID displays:
    Remote control battery
    low. Replace battery.
    See Changing the key battery, page 48.

    Some car alarm functions and indications can be reprogrammed.
    Contact a Saab dealer for details of the possibilities and refer to
    page 280.

    53



  • Page 56

    54

    Security

    Quick guide, LED and Saab Information Display
    (SID) messages
    Activity

    LED signal

    SID message

    Reason/action

    Arming (delay period)

    Illuminates for 11 s.

    Alarm armed

    Flashes once every 3 s.

    Key not accepted.
    Contact Saab dealer.

    Error when remote control
    inserted into ignition switch.

    Disarming

    Extinguishes.

    Remote control battery
    low. Replace battery.

    Battery needs replacing.
    See page 48.

    Alarm not armed

    Off.

    2: standard key
    Key No: 1

    Check of the number of remote
    controls programmed for your
    car. See page 47.

    Alarm has been triggered
    since being armed.

    The alarm has been tripped
    since the car was last locked.

    Immobilizer failure.
    Try starting again.
    Contact Saab dealer.

    Error when immobilizer code
    checked.

    A door, the hood or the tailgate is Flashes for 11 s then flashes
    open or opened during the delay once every 3 s.
    period.
    Car immobilized but not locked.

    Off.

    Change of status of immobilizer Double-flashes for 3 s.
    system, valid remote control
    inserted or removed from ignition
    switch.



  • Page 57

    9-3 Convertible

    55

    9-3 Convertible
    Advice on soft top
    operation ___________
    Operating the soft top __
    Raising the soft top
    manually ___________
    SID warnings and
    messages __________
    "Easy entry"__________
    Head restraints _______
    Safety belts, rear seat,
    Convertible _________

    56
    57
    62
    65
    67
    68
    69

    Rollover Pop-up Bars ___
    Electric windows _______
    Interior lighting ________
    Unlocking the trunk lid
    manually ____________
    Manually opening the
    fuel filler door ________
    Placing two golf bags
    in the trunk __________

    70
    71
    72
    73
    74
    74



  • Page 58

    56

    9-3 Convertible

    Advice on soft top
    operation
    • Once you have raised the soft top and
    before driving off, always check that the
    soft top is properly engaged with the windshield rail.
    • Once you have folded the soft top and
    before driving off, check that the soft top
    cover is locked.
    • Do not operate the soft top in temperatures below 23°F (–5°C).
    • Note that certain automatic car washes
    can damage the soft top. This applies to
    car washes that use mechanical feelers
    bearing against the body. Saab advises
    against washing the Convertible in an
    automatic car wash.
    • After rain or washing the car, allow the soft
    top to dry completely before folding it.
    Folding a wet or damp soft top can cause
    water damage in the car and mildew to
    form on the soft top.

    • Roof racks and ski holders must not be
    mounted on the soft top.
    • On no account should anything be put into
    the stowage space of the soft top (under
    the soft top cover) since this could cause
    an obstruction when the soft top is being
    folded away.
    • Do not place any objects on the covers
    over the roll bars as this can hamper their
    function.
    • When operating the soft top, raise or fold
    it fully until notified that operation is complete by the SID. Do not leave the soft top
    partially open/closed. If the soft top is left
    in an intermediate position it will collapse
    progressively after 20 seconds to prevent
    overloading the drive system.
    • Washing the soft top, see page 252.

    WARNING
    • Never touch the hinges and struts of
    the soft top nor the upper rail of the
    windshield while operating the soft
    top.
    • Do not operate the soft top while there
    are bystanders close to the car.



  • Page 59

    9-3 Convertible

    Operating the soft top
    WARNING
    • Do not touch the hinges or struts of the
    soft top during opening due to the
    pinch hazard.
    • Keep children out of reach.
    • Do not operate the soft top while there
    are bystanders close to the car.
    • Make sure that the soft top cover has
    locked properly after folding the soft
    top.
    • Check that the soft top engages properly with the upper edge of the windshield after raising.

    NOTICE
    If you drive off while raising or folding the
    soft top, operation is halted when
    the speed of the car exceeds 20 mph
    (30 km/h). This speed can be
    programmed (0–20 mph/0–30 km/h) at a
    Saab dealer. The movement of the car
    and force of the wind can seriously
    damage the components of the soft top
    system.

    Read the "Advice on soft top operation"
    section on page 56 before operating the soft
    top.
    The soft top is operated with the switch on
    the instrument panel. Hold the switch in the
    desired position until the soft top is fully
    folded or raised.
    The completion of folding or raising the soft
    top is indicated by a chime.
    Error messages that can appear on the SID
    are shown on page 65.

    Switch for operating the soft top
    a Raising
    b Folding

    57



  • Page 60

    58

    9-3 Convertible

    Opening

    Remote opening (option)
    You can fold the soft top when outside the

    The following conditions must be fulfilled for
    the soft top to be folded:

    car by pressing and holding the
    (unlock) button on the remote control. See
    also page 123.

    • Vehicle speed must not exceed 20 mph
    (30 km/h).
    • Battery voltage must exceed 10 V.
    • Outside temperature must exceed 23°F
    (–5°C).
    • The trunk lid must be locked.
    • There must be sufficient space in the
    trunk for the soft top.

    Folding

    1 Start the engine and let it idle. Clearance
    for soft top operation: height, min. 7.2 ft
    (2.2 m); behind car, min. 2" (5 cm).
    2 Press and hold the soft top button until
    the soft top is fully folded and the soft top
    cover raised. Completed folding is indicated by a chime. If there is a malfunction a text message will be shown on the
    SID. Refer to page 65.
    Do not press any of the buttons on the
    same section of the instrument panel as
    the soft top switch while folding the soft
    top. This will cause the soft top to stop
    and then sink after about 20 seconds.
    If you continue to hold the button after the
    chime, all the windows will open after a brief
    delay.



  • Page 61

    9-3 Convertible

    1 Rear window raised. Soft top storage in
    luggage compartment lowered.
    2 The soft top cover is opened.

    a 7.2 ft (2.2 m)
    b 2" (5 cm)

    3 Soft top folded.

    4 The soft top cover is closed.

    59



  • Page 62

    60

    9-3 Convertible

    Raising

    securely to the upper edge of the windshield.
    If you hold the button pressed up after the
    chime, all the windows will be closed after a
    short delay.

    The following conditions must be fulfilled for
    raising the soft top:
    • Vehicle speed must not exceed
    20 mph (30 km/h).
    • Battery voltage must exceed 10 V.
    • The trunk lid must be locked.

    Raising

    1 Start the engine and let it idle. Clearance
    for soft top operation: height, min. 7.2 ft
    (2.2 m); behind car, min. 2" (5 cm).
    2 Press and hold the soft top button until
    the soft top is fully raised and the soft top
    cover closed. Completed raising is indicated by a chime. If there is a malfunction a text message will be shown on the
    SID. Refer to page 65.
    Do not press any of the buttons on the
    same section of the instrument panel as
    the soft top switch while raising the soft
    top. This will cause the soft top to stop
    and then sink after about 20 seconds.
    All side windows are opened slightly to protect the seals when the soft top is raised.
    Check that the hooks in the soft top hold it



  • Page 63

    9-3 Convertible

    1 The soft top cover is opened.

    a 7.2 ft (2.2 m)
    b 2" (5 cm

    2 The soft top is raised.

    3 The soft top cover is closed.
    4 The rear window is lowered.

    61



  • Page 64

    62

    9-3 Convertible

    Raising the soft top
    manually
    WARNING
    Only raise the soft top manually in an
    emergency (e.g. due to an electrical
    fault).
    Do not touch the soft top button on the
    instrument panel while closing the soft top
    manually. This could cause personal
    injury and damage the soft top mechanism.
    Do not fold the soft top having closed it
    manually. This can damage the soft top
    mechanism.
    If the soft top has been folded mechanically
    there will be a delay of 20 seconds before it
    is possible to raise it manually (the pressure
    must be released from the hydraulic system).
    If the car is without electrical power, the
    trunk must be unlocked manually. Refer to
    page 73.

    Wire catch for unlocking soft top cover

    1 Find the lug wrench, Allen key and
    screwdriver located under the luggage
    compartment floor.
    2 Remove the two covers from the side
    trim in the trunk, one from either side.
    If there are two of you, it is easiest if you
    stand on either side of the car and perform
    steps 3-6 and 9-10 together.
    3 Unlock the soft top cover by pressing
    forward the two wire catches, one on the
    left and one on right-hand side.

    Tools under luggage compartment floor



  • Page 65

    9-3 Convertible

    Soft top cover opened

    4 Close the trunk lid fully as otherwise it
    will obstruct the soft top cover.
    5 Open the soft top cover, upward and
    backward.
    6 Tip forward the front seat backrests.

    Manual closing started

    WARNING
    • Do not touch the hinges and struts of
    the soft top during raising.
    • Keep your hands clear of the front
    windshield rail.
    • Pinch hazard may cause personal
    injury.

    63

    Soft top pulled towards windshield

    7 Before raising the soft top, the two
    catches in the leading edge of the soft
    top must be opened. Stand in the rear
    seat and pry off the cover with the screwdriver. Using the tool, turn clockwise to
    open the catches.
    Stand in the rear seat and raise the soft
    top. Pull it towards the windshield. This
    operation requires 7.2 ft (2.2 m) of vertical clearance.



  • Page 66

    64

    9-3 Convertible

    Soft top locked to windshield rail

    Closing the soft top cover

    8 Sit in one of the front seats and lock the
    soft top to the windshield rail. Use the lug
    wrench and the Allen key. Turn roughly
    1/4 turn counterclockwise. Check that
    the soft top is properly locked in place by
    pressing up the front edge. The soft top
    must not move upward.

    9 Lift up the rear window fully and hold it
    there. Close the soft top cover. It is not
    possible to lock the soft top cover after
    manual raising.

    NOTICE
    To avoid damaging the paintwork on the
    soft top cover and the trunk lid, take care
    when closing the soft top cover.
    10 Press down the rear edge of the soft top
    as far as possible towards the soft top
    cover.

    Rear window locked to soft top cover

    11 Now lock the rear window to the soft top
    cover. Sit in the rear seat and insert the
    tool (the same tool as used to lock the
    soft top to the windshield rail) into the
    hexagonal hole in the soft top mechanism. Turn roughly 1/4 turn, counterclockwise on the right had side of the
    soft top and clockwise on the left-hand
    side. Look at the soft top cover when
    locking the rear window. The rear
    window must make a tight seal against
    the soft top cover.
    The soft top system must be checked and
    rectified without delay at a Saab dealer.



  • Page 67

    9-3 Convertible

    65

    SID warnings and messages
    The following messages associated with the soft top system and can be displayed on the SID together with a chime:

    Cause

    Suitable action

    Soft top front not locked.
    Try again.

    Failure of the soft top to lock automatically to
    the windshield.

    • Move the car so that it is standing level if on
    a steep slope.
    • Press the soft top button to fold the soft top
    slightly. Fold the soft top again.

    Soft top power pack
    overheated.
    Allow to cool.

    This message appears if the soft top is operated Wait 6 minutes to allow the hydraulic pump to
    continuously for more than 3 minutes.
    cool down.
    Move the object hindering soft top operation.

    Open trunk.
    Move goods away from
    top storage area.
    Soft top may be
    damaged if operated
    at low temperature.
    Only manual
    operation possible.
    Contact Saab dealer.
    Soft top cover not locked.
    Try again.

    Displayed if the soft top is folded at temperatures
    below 23°F (–5°C).



  • Page 68

    66

    9-3 Convertible
    Battery low.

    The voltage of the car battery is too low to allow
    soft top operation.

    Soft top obstructed.
    Clear obstacles and
    try again.
    Open/close soft top
    completely to open trunk.

    Complete soft top operation.

    Open/close soft top
    completely before driving

    Complete soft top operation.

    Close trunk.

    Close the trunk lid.

    Driver seat unlocked.

    The backrest is not locked.

    Raise the backrest fully to locked position, see
    page 67.

    Passenger front seat
    unlocked.

    The backrest is not locked.

    Raise the backrest fully to locked position, see
    page 67.



  • Page 69

    9-3 Convertible

    67

    "Easy entry"
    WARNING
    • Always check that the backrest locks
    properly when returned to normal
    position.
    • Check that the fore-and-aft position of
    the seat is properly locked. The backrest and the entire belt-in seat must be
    locked in position; otherwise the occupant of the seat is at risk of injury
    during braking or in the event of a
    crash, especially if a rear-facing child
    seat is fitted behind the backrest.
    To facilitate getting in and out of the rear
    seat, the front seats can be slid forward.

    "Easy entry" function. Illustration shows an electrically adjustable seat (option)
    Manually adjusted passenger seats
    1 Raise the handle by the head restraint
    on the seat.
    2 Tip the backrest and slide the seat
    forward.
    Repositioning:
    1 Tip back the backrest.
    2 Slide the seat back to the desired
    position.
    Make sure the backrest and seat are properly locked in position.

    Electrically adjustable front seats
    1 Raise the handle by the head restraint
    on the seat.
    2 Tip the backrest forward.
    3 The seat now moves to its foremost
    position.
    Repositioning:
    1 Tip the backrest back to its normal
    position.
    2 Raise and hold the handle until the seat
    has returned to its previous position.



  • Page 70

    68

    9-3 Convertible

    Head restraints
    WARNING
    • Adjust the head restraint so that the
    head is optimally supported and the
    center of the head restraint is at ear
    height, thus reducing the likelihood of
    neck injury in a crash.
    • Raise the head restraints in the seats
    that are occupied.
    The front seats are equipped with Saab
    Active Head Restraints (SAHRs). These are
    designed to reduce the risk of neck injury if
    the car is hit from behind.
    The SAHR is a mechanical system, actuated by body weight. The mechanism is built
    into the top of the backrest, where it is connected to the head restraint.
    In the event of a rear-end crash, the body is
    forced back against the backrest. This, in
    turn, causes the mechanism to press the
    head restraint forward and upward, thus limiting the backward movement of the head.

    Front head restraint

    The front and rear head restraints can be
    raised and lowered to a number of positions.
    • Raising: grasp the head restraint on both
    sides and pull it straight up.
    • Lowering: Press the head restraint forward and downward.
    The rear head restraints can be fully lowered to improve rearward vision when the
    rear seats are unoccupied.

    Rear head restraint



  • Page 71

    9-3 Convertible

    Safety belts, rear seat,
    Convertible
    The two rear seats have three-point safety
    belts with inertia reels.
    Fasten the belt by pulling the belt and inserting the tongue in the buckle. Check that it is
    securely fastened.
    Position the lap part low across the hips.
    Grasp the shoulder belt close to the buckle
    and pull the belt towards the shoulder to
    tighten the lap belt part.
    The belt must be as far in on the shoulder as
    possible.
    Press the red button on the belt buckle to
    release the belt.
    Refer to page 251 for how to check the function of the safety belts, cleaning, etc.

    Safety belts, rear seat, Convertible

    WARNING
    • If cargo has to be placed on a seat, it
    must be properly secured with the
    safety belt. This reduces the risk of the
    cargo being thrown about during hard
    braking or a crash, which could cause
    personal injury.
    • Check that the belt is not twisted or
    lying against sharp edges.
    • Make sure you use the correct seatbelt buckle.
    For how to secure loads on the rear seat,
    refer to page 16.

    69



  • Page 72

    70

    9-3 Convertible

    Rollover Pop-up Bars
    The Rollover Pop Up Bars, which are
    located behind each rear seat head
    restraint, along with the windshield frame
    and the seatbelt pretensions, are designed
    to deploy in the event of a crash or rollover.

    WARNING
    You can be severely injured or killed in a
    crash if you are not wearing your safety
    belt - even if you have airbags and Rollover Pop Up Bars. Wearing your safety
    belt during a crash helps reduce your
    chance of hitting things inside the vehicle
    or being ejected from it.
    • The Rollover Pop Up Bars have powerful springs that rapidly extend the
    bars in rollover crashes, as well as in
    moderate to severe crashes in which
    the airbags deploy. Rollover Pop Up
    Bars are supplemental to the safety
    belts. They are designed to work with
    safety belts but do not replace them.

    • Rollover Pop Up Bars deploy with
    great force, and you could be injured if
    your arm or other body part, or if an
    object is covering the bars when they
    deploy. Don't put anything on the
    cover of the Rollover Pop Up Bars.
    The path of the Rollover Pop Up Bars
    must be kept clear.
    • The Rollover Pop Up Bars are
    designed to deploy only once. If they
    deploy, take your vehicle to your Saab
    dealer immediately to have the Rollover Pop Up Bars repaired so that they
    operate properly in the event of a
    crash or rollover.

    NOTICE
    To avoid the risk of damage to the soft top
    do not operated the soft top while the
    bars are extended.

    Rollover Pop-up Bars



  • Page 73

    9-3 Convertible

    Electric windows

    To close
    Soft top raised – The windows are operated
    individually.
    Soft top folded – The button for the front
    window closes both side windows.
    Automatic closing of a front side
    window: Raise the button all the way and
    release it. The rear side window must be
    fully closed. Pinch protection (option) is
    available for the front side windows.
    For further information on the electric windows, refer to page 123.

    WARNING
    Bear in mind the pinch hazard when closing the side windows. May cause serious
    or fatal injuries!
    • Always remove the remote control
    from the ignition switch when you
    leave the car to prevent personal
    injury caused by the activation of the
    electric windows, for example, due to
    children playing.
    • The person operating the electric
    window is responsible for ensuring
    that no one, especially a child, has
    their head, hands or fingers in the
    window openings, before raising the
    window.
    • Do not stick any part of the body or the
    head out through an open window
    while the car is moving.

    71

    Window switches

    To open
    Soft top raised – The windows open individually.
    Soft top folded – The button for the front
    window opens both side windows.
    Automatic opening: Press the button all
    the way down and release it. If the soft top
    is folded, the rear side window is also lowered.

    Deactivating the passenger door
    window button
    With the
    button on the driver’s door,
    you can deactivate the window button on
    the passenger door.
    The illuminated switch will change color
    from green to amber (deactivated).



  • Page 74

    72

    9-3 Convertible

    Calibrating front electric
    windows with pinch protection

    Interior lighting

    (option)
    The window lifts should be calibrated if automatic closing does not work or if the battery
    has been disconnected. The pinch protection will not work if the windows are not
    calibrated.
    Perform calibration as follows:
    1 Make sure the soft top is raised.
    2 Make sure the doors are closed.
    3 Let the engine idle.
    4 Press and hold the soft top button up
    until a chime sounds.
    During calibration, the four windows will
    be raised and lowered several times.
    If calibration fails twice in a row, have the car
    checked and rectified at a Saab dealer.

    • When a door is opened and the ignition is
    OFF.
    • When the remote control is removed from
    the ignition switch.
    The lighting goes out:

    The interior lighting consists of a front roof
    light, two front reading lights, footwell lighting and courtesy lighting in the doors. The
    light switches are located in the roof console.
    The cabin lighting comes on:

    • When the car is locked.
    • When the ignition is turned on.
    • Approx. 20 s after closing all doors.
    The lights are dimmed out gradually.
    If a door is left open with the ignition OFF,
    the interior lighting goes out automatically
    after 5 min so as not to drain the battery.
    The interior lighting can be switched off
    completely.
    1 Open the driver’s door.
    2 Turn off the cabin lighting with the center
    button, see illustration.
    This is canceled when the ignition switch is
    turned to position ON or when the car is
    locked with the remote control.

    Front interior lighting - Convertible
    1 Left-hand reading light
    2 Cabin light
    3 Right-hand reading light



  • Page 75

    9-3 Convertible
    Glove box
    The glove box lighting comes on when the
    compartment is opened and goes out when
    it is closed.
    For changing bulbs, refer to page 223.

    Sun visor
    An illuminated vanity mirror is provided on
    the inside of the sun visors. The lighting
    comes on when the cover is raised and goes
    out when it is closed.

    Trunk lighting
    The trunk lighting comes on and goes out
    when the trunk lid is opened and closed.
    If the trunk lid is left open, the lighting will be
    switched off automatically after 20 min to
    prevent the battery from running flat.
    For changing bulbs, refer to page 225.

    Unlocking the trunk lid
    manually
    If the trunk lid is not unlocked by the central
    locking system, it can be unlocked
    manually.
    1 Take the traditional key out of the remote
    control by pressing the emblem on the
    reverse (see page 48).
    2 Carefully prise off the round cover using
    your nails, a credit card or similar so as
    not to damage the paintwork.
    3 Unlock the trunk lid using the traditional
    key.
    Contact a Saab dealer to have the central
    locking system checked.

    Unlocking the trunk lid manually

    73



  • Page 76

    74

    9-3 Convertible

    Manually opening the
    fuel filler door

    Placing two golf bags
    in the trunk

    Convertible
    If the fuel filler door, which is controlled by
    the central locking system, does not unlock,
    proceed as described below.
    Check fuse 7 in the fuse panel at the end of
    the fascia (see page 229). If this fuse has
    blown or the new fuse blows, the fuel filler
    door can be opened as follows:

    There is sufficient space in the trunk of the
    Convertible for two golf bags. Proceed as
    follows.
    1 Start by inserting the narrow end of the
    first bag to the right.
    2 Lie down the bag. Turn the bag so that it
    lies on its widest side and slide it forward, in under the soft top storage (see
    illustration).
    3 Put in the second bag in the same way
    as the first, but lie it on its narrow side
    (see illustration).

    1 Open the two cut-out openings in the
    side trim on the right-hand side of the
    luggage compartment.
    2 Loosen the two screws (do not unscrew
    them fully). Lift up the screws and press
    them out of their key hole slots.
    Contact a Saab dealer to have the central
    locking system checked.

    Manually opening the fuel filler door, Convertible



  • Page 77

    9-3 Convertible

    75

    Spoiler on trunklid
    WARNING
    Some models have a spoiler on the trunklid. Avoid getting fingers and hands
    trapped between the spoiler and rear
    fender when closing the trunklid.

    Wind deflector
    Position of first golf bag

    Position of second golf bag

    A wind deflector is available as an accessory. Follow the fitting instructions supplied
    with the wind deflector carefully.

    CargoWing
    (accessory)

    NOTICE
    If play arises in any part of the
    CargoWing, contact a Saab workshop
    immediately to have this corrected. If
    such play is not eliminated, the
    CargoWing may come loose while driving.



  • Page 78

    76

    9-3 Convertible

    (This page has been left blank)



  • Page 79

    Instruments and controls

    77

    Instruments and controls
    Warning and indicator
    lights _______________
    Instruments ___________
    Information display,
    main instrument panel _
    Saab Information Display
    (SID)________________
    Switches _____________
    Wipers and washers ____
    Manual climate-control
    system______________
    Automatic climatecontrol system (ACC)__

    78
    82
    85
    87
    96
    100
    103
    108



  • Page 80

    78

    Instruments and controls

    Main instrument panel (Arc panel shown)

    Warning and indicator
    lights
    The following warning and indicator lights
    are found on the main instrument panel.

    Antilock braking warning
    This warning light illuminates when a fault
    arises in the antilock brake system.
    The following message is shown on the
    Saab Information Display (SID):

    U.S. shown, Canada similar
    Main instrument panel
    1
    2
    3
    4

    Tachometer
    Speedometer
    Turbo gauge
    Fuel gauge

    5 Engine temperature gauge
    6 Information display
    7 Trip meter reset button

    Antilock brake malfunction.
    Contact Saab dealer.
    The brake system will continue to function
    but without ABS modulation.

    Charge warning light
    This light comes on when the battery is not
    being charged by the alternator. If the light
    comes on during driving, stop as soon as
    possible and switch off the engine.
    Check the drive belt, see page 210.



  • Page 81

    Instruments and controls
    Warning, oil pressure
    (engine oil)
    This light will come on if the engine oil pressure is too low. If the warning light flashes or
    comes on while you are driving, stop immediately in a safe place, switch off the engine
    and check the oil level (see page 202).

    NOTICE
    Never drive the car when the oil pressure
    warning lamp is on. Low oil pressure can
    cause serious engine damage.
    The following message is shown on the
    Saab Information Display (SID):
    Oil pressure low.
    Make a safe stop.
    Turn off engine.

    Engine malfunction
    (CHECK ENGINE)
    WARNING
    An illuminated “Engine malfunction
    (CHECK ENGINE)” indicator light indicates an engine-related problem. While
    your car may be able to be driven with the
    “Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)”
    indicator light illuminated (limp-home
    mode), you are advised to have your car
    serviced at an authorized Saab dealer as
    soon as possible.
    Continued driving without this problem
    being corrected might cause serious
    further damage to your car and create
    unsafe driving conditions. The operator
    should be prepared to take action if such
    unsafe conditions arise (e.g. brake
    smoothly, engage neutral, stop in a suitable place, switch off the engine, etc.)

    79

    This light indicates a malfunction in the fuel
    or ignition system. The car may still be
    driven with care but the performance of the
    engine will be somewhat diminished (see
    page 150).
    The following message is shown on the
    Saab Information Display (SID):
    Engine malfunction.
    Contact Saab dealer.

    NOTICE
    The car should be checked immediately
    at a Saab dealer to prevent more serious
    faults from arising.



  • Page 82

    80

    Instruments and controls

    High beam Indicator
    This light shows when the high beam is on
    (see page 97).

    Front fog lights (option)
    This light indicates when the front fog lights
    are on (see page 98).
    The front fog lights are switched off automatically when the engine is switched off.
    When the fog lights are next needed, they
    will have to be switched on manually.

    Brake warning light
    This light should come on briefly when you
    turn the ignition key to ON. If it doesn´t come
    on, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn
    you if there is a problem. This light indicates
    when the brake fluid level is too low (see
    page 206).
    The following message is shown on the
    Saab Information Display (SID):
    Brake fluid level low.
    Make a safe stop.
    Contact Saab dealer.

    WARNING
    • Never drive the car if these two lights
    are on at the same time. Danger of
    brake failure!
    • If the level of brake fluid in the reservoir is below the MIN mark, the vehicle
    should be transported on a recovery
    vehicle.
    • Have the brake system checked
    immediately at a Saab dealer.

    For safety reasons, stop the car and check
    the level of the brake fluid (see page 206).
    If the level is normal, depress the brake
    pedal firmly two or three times. Now check
    the level again. If the level is still normal, you
    may drive the car, with considerable caution, to the nearest Saab dealer to have the
    brake system checked.
    The brake system provides Electronic
    Brakeforce Distribution (EBD). This distributes the brake pressure between the front
    and rear wheels, in such a way as to achieve
    optimum braking performance irrespective
    of the car’s load.
    If a fault arises in the EBD function, the
    ,
    and
    lights will come on. Also, the following message will appear on the Saab
    Information Display (SID):
    Brake malfunction.
    Make a safe stop.
    Contact Saab dealer.
    If this is the case, drive carefully and contact
    a Saab dealer as soon as possible. Refer to
    Brake warning light on page 80, Antilock
    braking warning on page 78 and TCS OFF
    or ESP OFF indicator on page 86.



  • Page 83

    Instruments and controls

    Safetybelt reminder
    This light reminds the driver to buckle up.

    Parking brake warning
    light
    This light comes on when the parking brake
    is applied (see page 173).
    The parking brake is mechanical and operates on the rear wheels.

    Airbag warning light
    This light comes on if a potentially serious
    fault has occurred in the airbag system.
    The following message is shown on the
    Saab Information Display (SID):
    Airbag malfunction.
    Contact Saab dealer.

    WARNING
    WARNING
    • Always apply the parking brake when
    parking, see page 173.
    • Always apply the parking brake
    before removing the remote control.
    • Do not apply the parking brake while
    the car is moving.

    • If the airbag readiness light stays on
    after you start your vehicle, it means
    the airbag system may not be working
    properly. One or more of the following
    conditions may occur:
    - Non-deployment of the airbags in the
    event of a crash.
    - Deployment of the airbags without a
    crash.
    - Deployment of the airbags in crashes
    less severe than intended.
    • To help avoid injury to yourself or
    others, have your vehicle serviced
    right away if the airbag readiness light
    stays on after you start your vehicle.
    This light will come on for about four seconds when the ignition switch is turned to
    the Start or Drive position.

    81

    Indicator, fuel
    This light comes on when there is less than
    about 2.5 gallons (10 litre) of fuel left in the
    tank.

    NOTICE
    If the car runs out of fuel, air can be drawn
    in with the fuel, which, in turn, can cause
    the catalytic converter to be damaged by
    overheating.



  • Page 84

    82

    Instruments and controls
    Headlight and parking
    light indicator

    This light indicates that the headlights or
    parking lights are on.

    Cruise control indicator
    light
    This light comes on when the system is
    engaged.

    Autochecking of lights, main
    instrument panel

    Instruments

    The warning and indicator lights shown
    above should come on when the ignition
    switch is turned to ON. They should go out
    after about 4 seconds once the engine has
    started or after the fault-free self-diagnosis
    of each system or function.

    Tachometer
    The tachometer displays the engine speed
    in thousands of revolutions per minute.
    A protective function (interruption of the fuel
    supply) limits the engine speed within the
    red zone.



  • Page 85

    Instruments and controls

    83

    Reset button
    The reset button is positioned immediately
    to the left of the speedometer.

    Cars with manual transmission

    • Ignition ON:
    Press once – resets the trip meter.
    • Ignition OFF:
    Press once – enables you to read the
    odometer and trip meter.
    Press twice – resets the trip meter.

    Cars with automatic transmission

    Speedometer
    Odometer and trip meter
    The odometer records the distance travelled in miles on U.S. vehicles and on Canadian vehicles the distance indicated is in
    kilometres, and the trip meter in miles and
    tenths (kilometres and tenths of kilometres
    on Canadian vehicles).

    (U.S. speedometer shown)
    The speedometer displays the speed of the
    car in miles per hour (mph). It receives information about vehicle speed from the ABS’s
    wheel sensors.



  • Page 86

    84

    Instruments and controls
    NOTICE
    If the needle, despite the above action,
    enters the red zone, stop the car in a suitable place and allow the engine to idle. If
    the needle continues to rise, switch off the
    engine.
    If the needle repeatedly enters the red zone,
    stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so and
    check the coolant level (see page 205).

    WARNING

    Temperature gauge
    The temperature gauge shows the temperature of the coolant. The needle should be
    in the middle of the scale when the engine
    is at normal operating temperature.
    If the needle goes into the red zone (which
    can occur at high outside air temperatures
    or under heavy engine loads), choose the
    highest possible gear ratio and the lowest
    possible engine speed, and avoid shifting
    down.

    Never open the cap of the expansion tank
    completely when the engine is hot, open
    with care. The pressure in the coolingsystem can cause hot coolant and steam
    to be released. Failure to heed this warning may result in personal injury.

    Turbo gauge
    The turbo gauge indicates the air volume
    used for combustion, which is equivalent to
    the engine load.
    At low loads and when the engine is used for
    braking, the needle will move within the
    white zone.
    Under certain barometric conditions the
    needle may enter the first part of the red
    zone without necessarily indicating that a
    fault has arisen.



  • Page 87

    Instruments and controls

    85

    Information display,
    main instrument panel

    If the needle repeatedly enters the red zone
    and the engine at the same time loses
    power, because the monitoring system is
    limiting the boost pressure, you should
    contact a Saab dealer as soon as possible.
    When the speed of the car exceeds
    143 mph (230 km/h), acceleration is limited
    by reducing the boost pressure. The pressure gauge then moves towards the middle
    of the white field, indicating a drop in engine
    power and consequently the car’s speed.

    Under the speedometer is a display. The
    information shown here varies depending
    on whether the car has a manual transmission or automatic transmission.

    Cars with manual transmission:

    Fuel gauge
    When less than about 2.5 gallons (10 litre)
    of fuel is left in the tank, a warning light on
    the main instrument panel comes on.
    Refueling, see page 153.

    • The odometer reading is shown on the
    left-hand side of the display.
    • Various information and faults are
    displayed in the center of the display.
    • The trip meter reading is shown on the
    right-hand side of the display.



  • Page 88

    86

    Instruments and controls

    Cars with automatic
    transmission:

    • The odometer and trip meter readings are
    shown on the left-hand side of the display.
    • Various information and faults are
    displayed in the center of the display.
    • The selected gear position is shown on
    the right-hand side of the display.

    Information symbol.
    Read information on SID
    This symbol comes on when a message or
    warning is displayed on the Saab Information Display (SID).

    Gear selector indicator
    (cars with automatic transmission)
    The current gear position is displayed on the
    right-hand side of the information display.
    When gears are selected manually, the
    letter M (manual) and the selected gear are
    displayed (see page 164).

    TCS or
    ESP indicator
    This symbol lights up when the system is
    operative.
    Operation of the TCS or ESP indicates
    reduced cohesion between the tires and the
    road, and that extra care should be taken by
    the driver.
    TCS - standard equipment.
    ESP - certain variants only.

    TCS OFF or
    ESP OFF indicator
    WARNING
    The system improves ride comfort and
    safety during normal driving. It must
    however not be regarded as a system
    to enable the driver to maintain higher
    speeds. The same precautions as
    normal for safe cornering and driving
    on slippery roads must be adopted (see
    pages 169/ 171).
    This symbol lights up when the system is
    disengaged using the ESP button.
    If there is a malfunction, the symbol cannot
    be turned off by pressing the ESP button.



  • Page 89

    Instruments and controls
    The following message is shown on the
    Saab Information Display (SID):
    Traction control failure.
    Contact Saab dealer.
    or
    Stability control failure.
    Contact Saab dealer.
    If so, have the system checked at a Saab
    dealer.
    See also Traction Control System (TCS) on
    page 169 and Electronic Stability Program
    (ESP) on page 171.

    87

    Saab Information
    Display (SID)
    Various types of information are shown on
    the SID: warnings, indications, trip computer information and information from the
    car’s Infotainment System.
    The warnings and indications that can be
    shown on the SID are listed on page 281.
    When the engine is switched off, the current
    warnings and indications are displayed.
    If there is more than one message on the
    SID, a plus sign will be displayed to the left
    of the first message. Each message will be
    displayed for 10 seconds.
    Press the CLEAR button to acknowledge
    a SID message. If you acknowledge a message but do nothing about it, the message
    will be displayed again the next time you
    start the car.
    You can adjust the settings of several of the
    car’s systems, such as the clock, alarm and
    climate control system. These are known as
    Profiler.

    SID, control unit and display

    Profiler
    Adjustments can be made with the control
    unit situated between the main instrument
    panel and the audio system. This is called
    Profiler.
    1 Activate Profiler by pressing the
    CUSTOMIZE button.
    2 Turn the INFO dial until the appropriate
    system is selected.
    3 Confirm selection by pressing the
    INFO dial.
    Select Exit once you have made the desired
    settings.



  • Page 90

    88

    Instruments and controls

    The number of systems that are displayed
    on the SID depends on the car’s equipment
    level. The list shown below includes the
    systems that can be found in your car.
    Park Assistance, page 178.

    Climate System, page 117.
    Rear Defroster
    Fan Settings
    Air Distribution

    SPA off

    A/C Mode

    Set Clock
    Set Alarm 08:30
    Rain Sensor, page 101.

    WARNING

    Heated Seats

    SPA on
    Clock / Alarm, page 92.

    Trip computer function of the SID

    It is strongly recommended that the SID
    settings be changed only when the car is
    stationary. The driver’s attention can
    otherwise easily be distracted from the
    road.

    Dual/Single Zone
    Default Settings
    System Settings, page 94.
    Language

    High

    Unit

    Medium

    Speed Scale Illum.

    Low

    Service Info

    SID contains the following functions:
    Temp

    Outdoor temperature

    D.T.E.

    Estimated range (distance to
    empty fuel tank)

    Fuel Ø

    Average fuel consumption
    since function last reset

    Date

    Date

    Dist

    Distance to destinations.
    Function can also be used as
    a trip meter

    Arriv

    Estimated time of arrival

    Speed Ø

    Average speed since function last reset

    Speed W

    Speed warning (chime)



  • Page 91

    Instruments and controls
    When the engine is started, the function that
    was selected when the engine was
    switched off is displayed, with the following
    exceptions:
    • Temp is displayed if the outside temperature is between 26 and 38°F (–3 and
    +3°C).
    • D.T.E is displayed if less than or equal to
    30 miles (50 km).
    Outdoor temperature

    WARNING
    Remember that roads can be icy even at
    temperatures of above 38°F (+3°C),
    especially on bridges and stretches of
    road that are sheltered from the sun.
    The Temp function is always activated
    (even in NIGHTPANEL mode) if the outdoor
    temperature rises or falls to between 26 and
    38°F (–3 and +3°C).
    If the temperature sensor, located under the
    front bumper, is covered by snow or ice,
    temperature readings will be unreliable.
    For how to set the year, month and day,
    refer to Clock on page 92.

    89

    Setting values

    Resetting a single function

    1 Select one of the functions using the
    INFO dial.
    • Speed W (preset to 55 mph (90 km/h)
    • Dist (preset to 100 miles (100 km) if not
    previously set)
    • Speed Ø
    • Arriv
    2 Press and hold the INFO dial until given
    audible confirmation.
    3 Turn the INFO dial to change the value.
    (Press CLEAR to reset the value.)
    4 Press the INFO dial to finish setup.
    Using DIST as a trip meter

    1 Select the function you wish to reset with
    the INFO dial.
    • Fuel Ø
    • Speed Ø
    • Trip (Dist used as trip meter)
    2 Press and hold the CLEAR button for
    approx. 1 second.
    The selected function will now be reset.
    Resetting the trip computer

    1 Select Dist using the INFO dial.
    2 Press and hold the CLEAR button for
    approx. 1 second.
    An arrow will now appear on the right-hand
    side of the display, indicating that the trip
    meter is running.

    1 Select one of the functions using the
    INFO dial.
    • Fuel Ø
    • Speed Ø
    • D.T.E.
    • Arriv
    • Trip (Dist used as trip meter)
    2 Press and hold the CLEAR button
    (approx. 3 seconds) until audible confirmation is given.



  • Page 92

    90

    Instruments and controls

    Speed warning
    This value is preset to 55 mph (90 km/h).
    The value can be set to between 0 and
    150 mph (0 and 250 km/h).
    1 Select Speed W using the INFO dial.
    2 Press and hold the INFO dial until given
    audible confirmation.
    3 Adjust the speed using the INFO dial.
    4 Confirm the setting by pressing the
    INFO dial.
    A star on the right-hand side of the display
    indicates when the speed warning function
    is active.
    An audible alarm will sound if the set speed
    is exceeded.
    Disengage the function with the CLEAR
    button. Re-engage the function using
    the INFO dial.

    Calculating the arrival time
    (When will I arrive if I know how far I have to
    drive?)
    This function should be used before starting
    out a journey.
    To calculate the arrival time, the distance
    must first be given.
    1 Select the Dist function using the
    INFO dial.
    2 Press and hold the INFO dial until given
    audible confirmation.
    3 Set the distance to the destination using
    the INFO dial.
    4 Press the INFO dial to finish setup.
    Select Arriv during the journey to display
    the arrival time based on the average speed
    since Dist was set. If you take a break, this
    time will be added to the previously calculated arrival time.
    Similarly, you can check the distance left by
    selecting Dist.
    After the distance to destination has
    decreased to zero, Dist will function as a trip
    meter (see Using DIST as a trip meter). The
    starting value for the trip meter will be the
    last distance set for the Dist function.
    Example: The Dist function is set to
    100 miles. After the count-down has
    reached 0 miles, Dist will act as a trip meter
    beginning at 100 miles.

    Calculating the arrival time if a specified
    average speed is maintained
    (When will I arrive if I know how far I have to
    drive and know what my average speed will
    be?)
    This function should be used before starting
    out a journey.
    First, set the distance under Dist.
    1 Then use the INFO dial to select the
    Speed Ø function.
    2 Press and hold the INFO dial until given
    audible confirmation.
    3 Turn the INFO dial to set the estimated
    average speed.
    4 Press the INFO dial to finish setup.
    The time of arrival is updated during the
    journey based on the average speed since
    Dist was set. The speed of the car must
    exceed 12 mph (20 km/h).
    By selecting Dist during the journey, you
    can see how much distance is left to travel.
    When Dist reaches zero it acts as a trip
    meter. The tip meter starts from the distance
    that was set previously.



  • Page 93

    Instruments and controls
    Calculating the requisite average speed
    (What average speed do I need to maintain
    to get to my destination in time?)
    This function should be used before starting
    out a journey.
    To calculate the requisite average speed,
    the distance must first be given.
    First, set the distance under Dist.
    1 Then use the INFO dial to select the
    Arriv function.
    2 Press and hold the INFO dial until given
    audible confirmation.
    3 Turn the INFO dial to set the estimated
    time of arrival.
    4 Press the INFO dial to finish setup.
    The average speed (Speed Ø) will be
    shown for 10 seconds.
    This average speed will be updated during
    the journey.

    Setting the date
    1 Select the Date function using the
    INFO dial.
    2 Press and hold the INFO dial until given
    audible confirmation.
    3 Turn the INFO dial to set the year.
    4 Press the INFO dial.
    5 Turn the INFO dial to set the month.
    6 Press the INFO dial.
    7 Turn the INFO dial to set the day.
    8 Confirm the setting by pressing the
    INFO dial.

    91

    NIGHTPANEL
    To improve night-driving conditions inside
    the car, the Night Panel mode can be
    selected. In this mode, the amount of information displayed is reduced, and only the
    most important instruments and displays
    will be illuminated.
    When the NIGHTPANEL button is pressed,
    only the speedometer will be illuminated.
    All other instrument lighting will be switched
    off and the needles drop to zero.
    Note: All indicator and warning lights and
    messages will operate normally if required.
    Temp (when the outside temperature falls
    or rises to between 26 and 38°F (–3 and
    +3°C)) and D.T.E. (when the remaining fuel
    is only sufficient for approx. 80 miles
    (50 km) of driving) are even shown in Night
    Panel model.



  • Page 94

    92

    Instruments and controls

    Under Profiler you can choose whether the
    entire speedometer scale (0–160 mph) or
    only part of the scale (0–90 mph) should be
    illuminated in NIGHTPANEL mode.
    1 Press the CUSTOMIZE button to go to
    Profiler.
    2 Select System Settings using the INFO
    dial.
    3 Press in the INFO dial.
    4 Select Speed Scale Illum.
    Select 0–160 mph or 0–90 mph.

    Clock

    System Settings

    1 Turn the INFO dial to change the value.
    2 Press the INFO dial once after each
    setting (time, year, month and day) to
    confirm the value.
    Once you have selected the day, press the
    INFO dial to finish setting and update the
    clock.
    Press the CLEAR button once to go back a
    step when setting the time, year, month and
    day manually.
    Press the CUSTOMIZE button to cancel
    setting.
    RDS setting: The time, year, month and
    day can also be set from the RDS signal
    (from RDS Adjust) provided that the RDS
    signal from the current station contains this
    information. This may vary between different radio stations and different countries.

    Speed Scale Illum.
    0–160 mph
    0–90 mph

    Settings can be made from Profiler.
    1 Press the CUSTOMIZE button to go to
    Profiler.
    2 Select Clock / Alarm using the INFO dial.
    3 Press in the INFO dial.
    4 Select Set Clock.
    5 Select Manual.
    Select Manual to set the time, year, month
    and day.
    Manual setting:

    Clock / Alarm
    Set Clock
    RDS Adjust
    Manual
    Clock
    11:30
    Year
    2003
    Month
    Dec
    Day
    1 Mon
    When the remote control is not in the ignition
    switch, you can illuminate the clock for
    5 seconds by pressing the INFO dial.



  • Page 95

    Instruments and controls
    Explanation of setting the clock.

    Alarm

    Explanation of setting the alarm time.

    Set Clock

    Settings can be made from Profiler.
    1 Press the CUSTOMIZE button to go to
    Profiler.
    2 Select Clock / Alarm using the INFO dial.
    3 Press in the INFO dial.
    4 Select Set Alarm 08:30.
    If the alarm is not activated: set using the
    INFO dial.
    If the alarm is activated (Set Alarm 08:30
    on): select Alarm on or Alarm off.

    Set Alarm 08:30

    RDS Adjust:

    In order to use this function,
    the car's radio must be
    tuned to a FM station known
    to transmit a time signal.
    Saab has no control over
    the level of RBDS information, or the content, being
    transmitted by radio stations.
    Set the year, month and day
    under Manual if the current
    radio station does not transmit this information.
    Manual:

    Use the INFO dial to set
    time, year, month and day
    manually.

    Clock / Alarm
    Set Alarm 08:30
    Alarm
    09:40
    Set Alarm 08:30 on
    Alarm on
    Alarm off

    Set Alarm 08:30:

    A new alarm time can be set.
    Use the INFO dial.
    Set Alarm 08:30 on:

    A preset alarm time exists.
    Select Alarm on or Alarm off.

    93



  • Page 96

    94

    Instruments and controls

    System Settings
    Under this heading you can make system
    settings, such as change the display language, units and service information.
    1 Press the CUSTOMIZE button to go to
    Profiler.
    2 Select System Settings using the
    INFO dial.
    3 Press in the INFO dial.
    4 Select the desired heading using the
    INFO dial.
    5 Press in the INFO dial.

    System Settings
    Language
    (The number of languages can vary
    between markets.)
    English

    Service Info
    Service Data
    Oil quality: xxx %.
    xxxx days to service.
    Service Type

    French

    Time for service.

    German

    Time for intermediate
    service.

    Italian
    Spanish
    Swedish
    Unit
    Metric
    Imperial
    US
    Speed Scale Illum.
    0–160 mph
    0–90 mph

    Time for main and
    intermediate service.
    Time for main service
    Reset Service Ind.
    Are you sure?
    Yes No



  • Page 97

    Instruments and controls
    Explanation of the various selections under
    System Settings.
    Language

    Select the desired language. The number of languages can vary between
    markets.
    Unit

    Select the desired group of units.
    Speed Scale Illum.

    Select the proportion of the speedometer to be illuminated in NIGHTPANEL mode.
    Service Info
    Service Data:

    The approximate condition of the oil
    is shown here. 100% is equivalent
    to new engine oil.
    Service Type:

    The type of service that is required
    is shown here.
    Reset Service Ind.:

    The service indicator can be reset
    here. This is normally done at the
    dealer in connection with a service.

    95



  • Page 98

    96

    Instruments and controls

    Switches

    Headlight levelling

    Daytime Running Lights
    The parking lights and daytime running
    lights come on automatically when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
    High beam can not be activated in this position but headlight flasher can.

    Parking lights
    The parking lights can be turned on irrespective of the position of the ignition
    switch. If the parking lights are on and the
    driver’s door is opened, a reminder to turn
    them off will sound.
    Do not use the parking lights alone while
    driving.
    The parking lights may be used in combination with the front fog lights (see page 98).

    Headlights
    Low beam headlights are turned on when
    the ignition switch is turned to ON and
    turned off when the switch is turned back to
    LOCK.

    Light switches

    (cars with xenon headlights)
    Cars with xenon headlights are equipped
    with an automatic headlight levelling system, which self-calibrates each time the
    vehicle is started.
    If a fault arises in the automatic headlight
    levelling system, the headlights will be
    angled down to avoid dazzling drivers in
    oncoming traffic. Adjust your speed accordingly as the range of the headlights will be
    reduced. Check fuse 20 in the engine bay
    fuse box (see page 232).
    A fault in the system will produce the following message on the Saab Information Display (SID):
    Headlight levelling
    malfunction.
    Contact Saab dealer.
    Special equipment is required for adjusting
    the basic headlight alignment.



  • Page 99

    Instruments and controls

    97

    Courtesy Headlamp Feature

    Dipswitch
    1 Headlight flasher
    2 High/low beam

    A delay function allows the low beam headlights and back-up lights to remain on for
    about 30 seconds after the driver’s door has
    been closed.
    To activate this function:
    1 After turning off the engine, remove the
    remote control.
    2 Open the driver’s door.
    3 Pull the control stalk all the way towards
    the steering wheel.
    The low beam headlights and reversing
    lights will come on and remain on for
    30 seconds when the door is closed.

    Adjusting instrument illumination

    Instrument lighting
    High/low beam
    To switch between high and low beam, pull
    the control stalk all the way towards the
    steering wheel. (Headlight switch must be
    ON.)
    The
    symbol on the main instrument
    panel shows when the high beam is on.

    Headlight flasher
    To flash your headlights, pull the control
    stalk half-way towards the steering wheel.
    The high beam will remain on until you
    release the stalk.

    The brightness of the instrument lighting
    can be adjusted by pressing the button (+ or
    - signs on the button above the NIGHTPANEL button).



  • Page 100

    98

    Instruments and controls

    Front fog light switch

    Rear fog light switch

    Turn signal & lane change indicators
    1 Right
    2 Left

    Front fog lights

    Rear fog light

    (certain variants only)
    The front fog lights should be used in poor
    visibility.
    These are automatically turned off when the
    engine is switched off. When the car is next
    started, the fog lights will have to be
    switched back on manually by pressing the
    fog light switch. If the engine is restarted
    within 30 seconds, the front fog lights will
    remain on.
    Acquaint yourself with the legal provisions governing the use of front fog
    lights.

    To turn on the rear fog light, press the rear
    fog light button on the instrument panel. The
    headlights or front fog lights must be on.
    The rear fog light is automatically turned off
    when the engine is switched off. When the
    car is next started, the rear fog light will have
    to be switched back on manually by pressing the rear fog light switch. If the engine is
    restarted within 30 seconds, the rear fog
    light will remain on.
    Acquaint yourself with the legal provisions governing the use of rear fog light.

    Turn signal & lane change
    indicators
    The stalk switch has an intermediate,
    spring-loaded position that is useful for signalling when changing lanes or passing.
    The stalk switch also has fixed positions for
    indicating a right or left turn, that are cancelled automatically when the steering
    wheel is centered.
    If an indicator bulb breaks, the frequency
    with which the indicators flash will be
    doubled.
    This frequency is also doubled if a trailer is
    being towed and one of its indicator bulbs
    breaks.



  • Page 101

    Instruments and controls

    99

    WARNING
    Switch on the hazard flashers if the car
    has to be left at the roadside on account
    of a crash, engine trouble or a flat tire.
    If you carry a warning triangle or flares,
    they should be set up along the side of the
    road 50–110 yds. (50–100 metres)
    behind your vehicle. If the car is not
    clearly visible (e.g. over the brow of a hill
    or bridge), place the triangle/flare even
    further back.

    Hazard warning light switch

    Back-Up
    Hazard warning lights
    The button for the hazard warning lights is
    located on the climate control panel.
    When the button is pressed, all the direction
    indicators and the symbol in the button flash
    simultaneously.
    If an indicator bulb breaks, the frequency
    with which the indicators flash will be
    doubled.
    Hazard warning lights should only be used
    if, because of an accident or breakdown, the
    car constitutes a hazard to other road users.

    The back-up lights come on automatically
    when reverse gear is engaged or selected
    with the ignition switched on.

    Button for accessory, Sport
    Sedan
    This button can be used for accessories,
    such as extra lights.



  • Page 102

    100

    Instruments and controls

    Priority of audible information
    Sound from various functions in the car,
    such as the direction indicators, parking
    assistance and seatbelt reminders, come
    from the same sound source: the car’s
    sound system. If two or more of these functions are active simultaneously, the most
    important function at that time will be prioritized.
    If, for example, the direction indicators are
    active when you engage reverse, the parking assistance (if fitted) will be heard instead
    of the direction indicators. When reverse is
    disengaged, the direction indicators will be
    heard, if they are still active.

    Wipers and washers
    Windshield wipers
    Position 1 is a spring-loaded position that
    will produce a single sweep of the wipers.
    In position 2 you can set the delay period for
    intermittent wiping using the thumbwheel on
    the stalk switch. There are 5 delay periods
    from which to choose, ranging from 2 to
    15 seconds.
    The wipers always return to their home position when the ignition is turned off.
    To leave the wipers positioned vertically on
    the windshield, proceed as follows:
    1 Switch off the engine and remove the
    remote control.
    2 Activate the wipers within the next
    16 seconds by pressing the stalk switch
    down.
    When the ignition is next switched on the
    wipers will return to their home position.

    Windshield wipers
    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    OFF
    Single sweep
    Intermittent wiping
    Low speed
    High speed
    Windshield and headlight washing (certain
    variants only)

    Washers
    Activate the washers by pulling the stalk
    switch towards the steering wheel.
    When the washers are operated, the wipers
    will make 3, 4 or 5 sweeps, depending on
    how long the washers were kept on. If
    the speed of the car is less than 12 mph
    (20 km/h), the wipers will make an additional sweep after roughly 8 seconds.
    When the washer fluid level drops below
    1 quart (1 litre), the headlight washers (if
    equipped) are deactivated. This is in order



  • Page 103

    Instruments and controls

    101

    Rain sensor
    (option)

    WARNING
    Turn the rain sensor off if the ignition is
    ON to avoid personal injury when clearing
    snow and ice from the windshield.

    NOTICE
    Control for setting wiper delay
    to prioritize the windshield. The following
    message is displayed on the SID:
    Washer fluid level low.
    Refill.
    To prevent the smell of washer fluid from
    entering the car, recirculation can be activated automatically while the windshield is
    washed. The recirculation symbol will however not light up. This function is optional;
    contact a Saab dealer. This automatic recirculation is the factory default setting as long
    as the system is working in full "AUTO"
    mode with no customized settings.

    Windshield wipers with rain sensor
    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    OFF
    Single sweep
    AUTO - rain sensor engaged
    Low speed
    High speed
    Windshield and headlight washing (certain
    variants only)

    Headlight washers
    (certain variants only)
    The headlights are washed at the same time
    as the windshield if the headlights are on.
    The headlights are washed every fifth time
    the windshield washers are used or if two
    (2) minutes have elapsed since the windshield was last washed.
    The headlight washers are not activated at
    speeds in excess of 125 mph (200 km/h).

    Turn the rain sensor off before washing
    the car in an automatic carwash, to avoid
    damaging the windshield wipers.
    The rain sensor automatically controls the
    windshield wipers. The sensor is located on
    the windshield beside the rearview mirror.
    The system varies the frequency of wiping
    between single sweeps and continuous
    wiping, depending on the amount of precipitation.
    Activate the rain sensor by lifting the stalk
    switch to the AUTO position. The wipers
    make one sweep for reference to see how
    much water is on the windshield. In the
    future, the sensor compares the amount of
    water on the windshield with this reference
    value.



  • Page 104

    102

    Instruments and controls

    If the stalk switch is left in the AUTO position
    when the engine is switched off, when the
    engine is next started it must first be moved
    to the 0 or 3 position and then back to AUTO
    to reactivate the sensor.
    If the system malfunctions, the wipers will
    operate at low speed when the stalk switch
    is set to the AUTO position.

    Adjusting sensitivity
    The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be
    adjusted under Profiler. If you increase the
    sensitivity, the wipers will make one sweep
    for reference.
    1 Press the CUSTOMIZE button to go to
    Profiler.
    2 Select Rain Sensor using the INFO dial.
    3 Press in the INFO dial.
    4 Select the sensitivity by turning the dial.
    5 Confirm this selection by pressing the
    INFO dial.
    Rain Sensor
    High
    Medium
    Low
    The sensitivity of the sensor is also affected
    by the amount of daylight. The sensor is
    somewhat more sensitive at night. This
    adjustment is automatic.

    Explanation of sensor sensitivity.
    High

    The sensor is set to high sensitivity.
    The wipers start when there is only
    a small amount of water on
    the windshield.
    Medium

    The sensor is set to normal sensitivity.
    This is one of the Default Settings.
    Low

    The sensor is set to low sensitivity (wipers operate only with a large amount of
    water on the windshield, i.e., downpour).



  • Page 105

    Instruments and controls

    103

    Manual climate-control
    system
    Fresh air for the cabin is drawn in through an
    inlet grille at the bottom edge of the windshield. It passes through a filter before
    reaching the climate control system and
    delivery into the cabin. The air is evacuated
    via openings in the parcel shelf. It is then led
    through outlets on either side of the car
    behind the rear bumper.
    The incoming air is treated in three stages:
    first it passes through a filter; it is then dehumidified and cooled; and finally, if required,
    it is heated.
    To optimize the performance of the A/C system, all windows and the sunroof should be
    shut.
    To reduce potential misting on the insides of
    the windows, the glass should be cleaned
    with a quality glass cleaner. How often this
    will need to be done depends on how clean
    the air is - if there are smokers in the car, the
    windows will need to be cleaned more frequently.

    Control panel: manual climate control
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    Temperature
    Fan speed
    Air distribution
    Seat heating, front right seat
    Recirculation

    6
    7
    8
    9

    Rear window/door mirror heating
    Hazard warning lights
    Air conditioning (A/C)
    Seat heating, front left seat

    Temperature control
    Fan
    The output of air is controlled by the fan
    speed.

    The temperature of the incoming air can
    be infinitely varied using the temperature
    control.



  • Page 106

    104

    Instruments and controls

    Air distribution

    Recommended settings in severe cold

    The air distribution control is used to direct the flow of air to the
    defroster, panel and floor vents.
    The control also permits settings in between the three main settings
    defroster, panel and floor:

    On starting with a cold engine, set the fan speed to 2 or 3 and select
    maximum heat and defroster to heat the cabin and demist the windshield as quickly as possible.
    When the engine is warmer and the temperature gauge starts to
    rise, fan setting 4 may be chosen. Once the windshield is clear, the
    air distribution control should be turned to
    .
    If the rear seat passengers desire more warmth to the feet, turn the
    distribution knob one step clockwise.
    How quickly the engine warms up will depend on how the car is
    driven. It will take longer for the engine to warm up if the car is driven
    in a high gear at low engine speeds, such as in town, than if it is
    driven at high engine speeds on a highway, for example.
    Do not use fan speed 5. This is primarily intended for rapid cooling
    during the summer. Using it in cold weather will delay the engine
    warm-up time and providing heat to the passenger compartment.

    • defroster and floor
    • panel and floor
    • defroster, panel and floor (11 o’clock position)
    To counter cold drafts from the front side windows when the control
    has been set to defroster or floor, a small flow of air issues from
    the outer vents on the fascia.
    As the winter comfort setting, we recommend that the distribution
    knob be turned to
    .



  • Page 107

    Instruments and controls
    Settings
    for various
    weather
    conditions
    Defroster

    Winter – defroster

    Panel

    Winter – comfort setting

    Floor

    Summer – overcast

    Summer – sunny
    Defroster, panel and floor

    105



  • Page 108

    106

    Instruments and controls
    Condensation water
    Air conditioning (A/C)

    Panel vent

    Air vents
    The air vents swivel universally, so that air
    can be directed as desired. In winter, for
    instance, the outer vents can be directed
    onto the door windows for enhanced
    demisting.
    The amount of air can be individually controlled by the regulator on each vent. If you
    wish to reduce the airflow, start by halfshutting the vent in question.

    The air conditioning is combined with the
    conventional climate control system and
    is switched on by pressing the
    button, provided that the fan control is in
    position 1-5.
    The incoming air is treated in three stages:
    first it passes through a filter; it is then dehumidified and cooled; and finally, if required,
    it is heated.
    If the engine coolant gets too hot, the A/C
    compressor will be turned off.
    Convertible: When the soft top or all the
    windows are open in a hot, humid climate, it
    is recommended to switch off the air conditioning to save fuel. Also, if the air conditioning is on, condensation may form on cold
    surfaces such as the floor air ducts.

    When the A/C compressor is on, the incoming air is dehumidified. The resulting condensation water is drained away through an
    outlet under the car.
    It is therefore perfectly normal for water to
    be seen dripping from this outlet when the
    car is parked. The warmer the ambient air
    and the higher the humidity, the more condensation will form.

    Recirculation
    When the
    button is pressed, the regular air intake will be closed. In this mode,
    the air inside the cabin is recirculated.
    Use recirculation when you wish for rapid
    cooling at very high outside temperatures.
    Switch the air conditioning (A/C) on first.
    If necessary, recirculation can be switched
    on manually to avoid unpleasant air from
    entering the car.
    Only use recirculation for a short period
    of time at temperatures lower than 50°F
    (+10°C), such as to avoid unpleasant air.
    Mist or ice may otherwise form on the
    windows.



  • Page 109

    Instruments and controls
    Electrically heated rear
    window/external mirrors
    This button is located under the fan speed
    control.
    Always switch off the heating as soon as the
    rear window is free from ice and mist. It will
    be turned off automatically after 12 minutes.
    Refrain from placing sharp objects on the
    parcel shelf, to avoid damaging the heating
    element.
    Convertible: The rear window heating is
    not turned on if the soft top is folded down.

    Electric heating, front
    seats (option)
    The seat cushions and backrests of the front
    seats are heated.
    The heating is thermostatically controlled
    and set at approx. 104°F (40°C).
    Switch off the seat heating once the seat is
    warm.

    107



  • Page 110

    108

    Instruments and controls

    Automatic climatecontrol system (ACC)
    Fresh air for the cabin is drawn in through an
    inlet at the bottom edge of the windshield. It
    passes through an effective filter before
    reaching the climate control system and
    delivery into the cabin. The air is evacuated
    via openings in the parcel shelf. It is then led
    through outlets on either side of the car
    behind the rear bumper.
    The Automatic Climate-Control system
    (ACC) automatically maintains the desired
    cabin temperature, regardless of the
    weather outside.
    The system will achieve the desired temperature in the quickest possible way.
    Note that heating or cooling is not
    speeded up by setting the temperature
    higher or lower than the final temperature you desire.
    To optimize the performance of the air conditioning system, all windows and the sunroof should be shut. The air vents in the
    fascia must be open.

    ACC panel
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9

    Temperature setting: left-hand side
    Manual setting of air distribution
    Recirculation
    AUTO (automatic regulation)
    A/C
    Defroster
    Rear window heating
    Temperature setting: right-hand side
    Seat heating, front right seat

    The incoming air is treated in three stages:
    first it passes through a filter; it is then dehumidified and cooled; and finally, if required,
    it is heated.

    10
    11
    12
    13

    Manual increase of fan speed
    Hazard warning lights
    Manual decrease of fan speed
    Seat heating, front left seat

    To reduce potential misting on the insides of
    the windows, the glass should be cleaned
    with a quality glass cleaner. How often this
    will need to be done depends on how clean
    the air is - if there are smokers in the car, the
    windows will need to be cleaned more
    frequently.



  • Page 111

    Instruments and controls
    Temperature control
    The cabin is divided into two temperature
    zones:
    1 Driver’s zone.
    2 Passenger zone.
    The temperature in the rear seat will be a
    mixture of the two zones.
    If you choose the single zone setting, the
    entire cabin is treated as one zone. If you
    choose the dual zone setting, settings can
    be made separately for the driver’s zone
    and passenger zone.
    Select between single and dual zone settings under Profiler (see page 117).
    The cabin temperature can be set to
    between 58–82°F (15–27°C). In addition, HI
    (maximum heating and high fan speed) and
    LO (maximum cooling and maximum fan
    speed) can be selected. HI and LO can only
    be selected for the passenger zone if the
    driver has selected the same setting.

    109

    The displayed temperature is not the actual
    air temperature but corresponds to the
    comfort level normally experienced at that
    temperature after allowance has been
    made for the airflow, relative humidity, solar
    radiation, and so on, currently prevailing
    inside the car.
    • The most usual temperature setting is
    between 66–74°F (19–23°C), depending
    on personal preference and what clothing
    is worn.
    • Change the temperature setting in 2°F
    (1°C) steps.
    • Make sure the air vents are open when
    cooling the cabin in warm weather.
    Settings when HI is selected:
    • Maximum heat
    • Air distribution to windshield and floor
    • High fan speed (6 bars on the fan display).
    Settings when LO is selected:
    • Maximum cooling
    • Air distribution to air vents in fascia
    • Maximum fan speed (8 bars on the fan
    display).
    • Recirculation ON (depending on outside
    temperature).

    Panel vent

    Air vents
    The air vents swivel universally, so that air
    can be directed as desired. In winter, for
    instance, the outer vents can be directed
    onto the door windows for enhanced
    demisting.
    The amount of air can be individually controlled by the regulator on each vent. If you
    wish to reduce the airflow, start by halfshutting the vent in question.
    Certain variants have an air vent on the rear
    of the floor console.



  • Page 112

    110

    Instruments and controls

    The system uses four sensors:





    Outside air temperature sensor
    Cabin air temperature sensor
    Sun sensor
    Blended air temperature sensors (located
    in the heater unit and the outer panel vent
    duct).
    The sun sensor is located centrally on the
    top of the fascia.
    Note:
    If the sun sensor is covered, the ACC
    system will not be able to regulate the cabin
    climate as intended, especially in strong
    sunshine.

    Condensation water
    When the A/C compressor is on, the incoming air is dehumidified. The resulting condensation water is drained away through an
    outlet under the car.
    It is therefore perfectly normal for water to
    be seen dripping from this outlet when the
    car is parked. The warmer the ambient air
    and the higher the humidity, the more condensation will form.

    Sun- and cabin sensor, Sport Sedan

    Sun- and cabin sensor, Convertible

    1 Sun sensor
    2 Cabin temperature sensor

    1 Sun sensor
    2 Cabin temperature sensor



  • Page 113

    Instruments and controls

    111

    Functions
    Pressing AUTO will cancel all manual settings.
    If a manual function is selected, it will be locked in but other functions
    will be controlled automatically.
    The selected temperature is always maintained automatically.

    Temperature, air distribution, fan speed and recirculation will be controlled automatically.
    In falling temperatures the A/C compressor is
    switched off at approx. 32°F (0 °C).
    In rising temperatures the A/C compressor is
    switched on at approx. 40°F (+5 °C).
    If, when starting the car, the outside air temperature
    is between 32°F and 40°F (0 and +5 °C), the A/C
    compressor is switched on.
    Pressing AUTO once will cancel all previous manual
    air distribution selections.
    When the engine is started, the ACC system will be
    in AUTO mode, provided that no air distribution settings are programmed under Profiler (see
    page 117).

    The A/C compressor must be turned on and off
    manually with the AC button.
    The compressor can only be turned on or off while
    the engine is running.
    This function has two modes:
    • AC – The system cools and dehumidifies the
    incoming air. This symbol is not shown in the
    display.
    • AC-OFF – The A/C compressor is switched off.
    The incoming air is not cooled or dehumidified.
    See also Profiler on page 117.



  • Page 114

    112

    Instruments and controls
    When the system is switched OFF:
    To turn the system OFF, press and hold (or press
    repeatedly) the button to reduce the fan speed until
    the fan is switched off. Then release the button and
    press it once more.
    The A/C compressor will now be disengaged. To reengage the A/C, press one of the following buttons:
    • The A/C compressor will be
    switched on if it was previously
    engaged, and the air distribution
    and fan speed will switch to AUTO.
    • Higher fan speed
    The A/C compressor will be
    switched on if it was previously
    engaged, the air distribution will return to its previous setting and fan speed will increase.
    • Defroster
    The A/C compressor will be
    switched on if it was previously
    disengaged, the air distribution will switch to
    Defroster and the fan speed will increase (6 bars
    on the display out of a maximum of 8).






    The fan and A/C compressor are switched off.
    The temperature control is set to 0 % heat.
    The current air distribution setting is retained.
    Recirculation can be selected.

    The rear window and door mirror heating can be
    controlled manually or automatically (refer to
    Profiler).
    Switch off the rear window and door mirror heating
    as soon as the glass is clear. The heating will be
    turned off automatically after 12 minutes.
    Refrain from placing sharp objects on the parcel
    shelf, to avoid damaging the heating element.



  • Page 115

    Instruments and controls

    113

    Air distribution
    Recirculation is controlled manually.
    Recirculation is not selected when the engine is
    started (fresh air mode).

    Press
    or
    to increase or decrease the fan
    speed. This sets the fan speed (fan speed shown on
    display).
    Refer also to Profiler regarding the possibility to
    increase/decrease the automatic fan speed.

    When defroster is chosen, all the front windows are
    demisted:
    • High fan speed
    • The air is directed to the defroster vents
    • Normal temperature control
    • Recirculation OFF
    • Rear window and door mirror heating ON.
    The system will remain in defroster mode until the
    or

    button is pressed.

    The following three buttons for air distribution can be selected individually or in combination. Press the button or selection of buttons
    to produce the airflow you desire. Pressing the same button twice
    will return the system to AUTO. You can also select automatic air
    distribution by pressing the AUTO button.
    Initial air distribution to take effect on starting the engine can be set
    under Profiler (see page 117).
    Airflow to windshield vents.
    Airflow to facia air vents.
    Airflow to floor vents.



  • Page 116

    114

    Instruments and controls

    Shown below are several examples of air distribution.

    Windshield

    Floor, front and rear

    Panel
    Windshield – floor (front and rear)



  • Page 117

    Instruments and controls

    115

    Formation of ice and mist in extreme weather
    conditions
    It is only in the most extreme conditions that icing and misting of
    window glass are likely to be a problem, such as in torrential rain or
    severe cold coupled with high relative humidity, or when passengers
    are perspiring heavily or wearing wet clothes. The following measures are recommended if such problems should occur:
    1 Select
    and set the temperature to 70°F (21°C)

    Panel – floor (front and rear)

    Windshield – panel – floor (front and rear)

    2 Select
    . If this is not enough...
    3 Increase the fan speed. If this is not enough...
    4 Select a higher temperature.



  • Page 118

    116

    Instruments and controls
    Electric heating, front
    seats (option)

    The seat cushions and backrests of the front
    seats are heated.
    Heating is thermostatically controlled.
    Heating is controlled manually but can also
    be automatic. Refer to Profiler on page 117.
    Three heating levels are available. Pressing
    the button once will turn the heating on at full
    power. Pressing the button a total of 4 times
    will turn the heating off.

    Calibration
    Calibration is performed automatically
    every fifth time the car is started after having
    been switched off for more than 2 hours or
    if the battery has been disconnected.

    Programming
    A number of functions can be customized
    under Profiler (see page 117). Further customizations can be made at a Saab dealer.

    Tips
    (before contacting a Saab workshop)



    = full.



    = medium.



    = low.

    • If you feel that the ACC system is not functioning satisfactorily, select "Default
    Settings" under Profiler (see page 117.
    • To prevent the smell of washer fluid from
    entering the car, recirculation can be activated automatically while the windshield
    is washed. The recirculation symbol will
    however not light up. This function is
    optional; contact a Saab dealer. This
    automatic recirculation is the factory
    default setting as long as the system is
    working in full "AUTO" model with no
    customized settings.



  • Page 119

    Instruments and controls

    117

    ACC- Convertible

    Profiler

    When the soft top is folded, the ACC system
    switches to manual temperature control.
    There are eleven temperature settings: 0–
    10.
    The system adjusts itself as follows:

    Some of the functions of the ACC system
    can be customized.
    1 Press the CUSTOMIZE button to go to
    Profiler.
    2 Select Climate System using the
    INFO dial.
    3 Press in the INFO dial.
    4 Select Rear Defroster, Heated Seats,
    Fan Settings, Air Distribution, A/C
    Mode, Dual/Single Zone or Default
    Settings by turning the dial.
    5 Confirm this selection by pressing the
    INFO dial.
    Once you have adjusted the ACC system
    settings under Profiler, CUSTOMIZE will
    appear on the ACC display.

    • AUTO goes out.
    • Heating, air distribution and fan speed are
    not affected.
    • Recirculation and rear window heating
    are cut out.
    • The A/C compressor is switched off (manual activation is possible by pressing the
    AC button).
    All manual selections are possible with the
    exception of rear window heating.
    When the soft top is raised, the system
    reverts to the AUTO mode and the previous
    set temperature.
    Note: When the soft top or all the windows
    are open in a hot, humid climate, turning the
    air conditioning on manually can cause condensation to form on cold surfaces, such as
    the air ducts.

    ACC display when soft top folded



  • Page 120

    118

    Instruments and controls

    Climate System
    Rear Defroster
    Auto

    A/C Mode
    Auto
    A/C off

    Manual

    Dual/Single Zone

    Heated Seats

    Dual zone

    Auto
    Manual
    Fan Settings
    High speed
    Medium speed
    Low speed
    Air Distribution
    Auto
    Manual
    Windshield
    Panel
    Floor

    Single zone
    Default Settings
    Are you sure?
    Yes

    No

    Explanation of how the ACC system can be
    customized under Profiler.
    Rear Defroster
    Auto:
    The rear window and door mirror
    heating is controlled automatically.
    This is one of the Default Settings.
    Manual:
    The rear window and door mirror
    heating is switched on with
    the button on ACC panel.
    Convertible: The rear window heating
    cannot be turned on when the soft top is
    folded.

    Heated Seats
    Auto:
    The front seat heating is controlled
    automatically.
    Select the level by repeatedly
    pressing the appropriate button on
    the ACC panel: 2 arrows on symbol
    = standard; 3 arrows = high; 1 arrow
    = low. The selected heating setting
    is saved when the engine is
    switched off. Note: The symbol on
    the ACC panel goes out if the heating is turned off automatically by the
    system.
    Manual:
    See Electric heating, front seats
    (option) on page 116.
    This is one of the Default Settings.



  • Page 121

    Instruments and controls
    Fan Settings
    High speed:
    This selection give a slightly higher
    fan speed than Medium speed
    though with continued automatic
    regulation.
    Medium speed:
    Normal automatic fan speed. This is
    one of the Default Settings.
    Low speed:
    This selection give a slightly lower
    fan speed than Medium speed
    though with continued automatic
    regulation.
    Convertible: Fan speed is not regulated
    automatically when the soft top is open.
    Air Distribution
    Auto:
    The ACC system adapts air temperature and distribution to the prevailing conditions. This is one of the
    Default Settings.
    Manual:
    Windshield:
    The ACC system directs almost
    all air to the windshield.
    Panel:
    The ACC system directs almost
    all air to air vents in the fascia.
    Floor:
    The ACC system directs almost
    all air to the floor.

    A/C Mode
    Auto:
    Automatic engagement and disengagement of the A/C. This is one of
    the Default Settings.
    A/C off:
    A/C compressor OFF (see also
    page 111). The A/C compressor
    can be activated temporarily by
    pressing the AC or AUTO button
    while on the road and if the outside
    temperature is above 41°F (+5°C).
    The A/C will be off the next time the
    engine is started, if the engine has
    been switched off for more than
    2 hours.
    Convertible: The A/C compressor is
    switched off when the soft top is folded
    down.
    Further customizations to this function can
    be made at a Saab dealer.
    • The A/C compressor can be on even
    when the soft top is folded down.
    • The A/C compressor can be set to
    operate as when the soft top was last
    folded down.

    119

    Dual/Single Zone
    Dual zone:
    Individual temperature setting for
    each zone (see page 109). The system saves the settings when the
    engine is switched off. This is one of
    the Default Settings.
    Single zone:
    Common temperature setting when
    the engine is started. If the temperature setting for the passenger zone
    is changed, the system will switch to
    Dual zone control. Single zone control will return the next time the
    engine is started having been
    switched off for more than 2 hours.



  • Page 122

    120

    Instruments and controls

    (This page has been left blank.)



  • Page 123

    Interior equipment

    121

    Interior equipment
    Steering wheel
    adjustment __________
    Electric windows _______
    Sunroof ______________
    Interior lighting ________
    Cup holder ____________
    Power Outlet __________
    Storage compartments __
    Rearview mirrors_______
    Trunk ________________

    122
    123
    126
    129
    130
    132
    132
    134
    140



  • Page 124

    122

    Interior equipment

    Steering wheel
    adjustment
    WARNING
    Only adjust the steering wheel while the
    car is stationary so that you are not
    distracted from the traffic.
    The height and reach of the steering wheel
    can be adjusted.
    There is a release lever under the steering
    column.
    1 Pull down the lever to release the steering wheel.
    2 Adjust the position of the steering wheel.
    3 Raise the lever to the locked position to
    lock the steering wheel in position.
    When returning the release lever to its
    locked position, you may need to adjust the
    position of the steering wheel slightly to
    allow the lock mechanism to engage correctly.
    Steering wheel lock, see page 148.

    Lever for steering wheel adjustment

    Horn signal
    Activate the horn by pressing one of the
    three areas shown above on the steering
    wheel pad.



  • Page 125

    Interior equipment

    123

    Electric windows
    WARNING
    Bear in mind the pinch hazard when closing the side windows. May cause serious
    or fatal injuries!
    • Always remove the remote control
    from the ignition switch when you
    leave the car. This will prevent
    personal injury caused by the activation of the electric windows, for example, due to children playing.
    • The person operating the electric
    window is responsible for ensuring
    that no one, especially a child, has
    their head, hands or fingers in the
    window openings, before raising the
    window.
    • Do not stick any part of the body or the
    head out through an open window
    while the car is moving.
    The electric windows are operated by
    means of switches in the door armrests.
    For the electric windows to work, the remote
    control must be in the ON position in the
    ignition switch.
    At the end of a journey and having removed
    the remote control, you can still operate the
    windows, so long as neither of the front
    doors has been opened.

    Window switches
    Windows having the automatic closing function (option) can be operated as long as the
    car is unlocked and until 20 minutes has
    passed since the remote control was
    removed from the ignition switch.

    To open
    Press down the front edge of the button one
    step.
    The window will stop when it is fully open or
    when the button is released.
    Automatic opening: Press the button all
    the way down and release it.

    Window switch in rear door

    Comfort opening
    (option, certain variants only)
    Comfort opening is the remote opening of
    windows and the sunroof.
    Press and hold the unlocking button on the
    remote control until the windows and
    optional sunroof start to open (approx. 2 s).
    During comfort opening of the windows,
    sunroof (option) and soft top, the range is
    reduced by approximately half.
    Convertible: For the remote opening of the
    soft top, refer to page 58.



  • Page 126

    124

    Interior equipment

    To close

    Pinch protection
    WARNING

    Take care when closing a window to
    ensure that no one gets caught.
    Raise the front edge of the button one step.
    The window will stop when it is fully closed
    or when the button is released.
    Automatic closing (option, certain variants only): Raise the button all the way and
    release it. If the window does not close automatically, refer to Calibration on page 125.

    (if equipped)
    On certain model variants, the electric windows are equipped with pinch protection.
    This is activated if something gets trapped
    between the window pane and door frame
    when the window is closed. The window will
    stop and lower slightly.
    Temporary overriding the pinch protection

    WARNING
    Make sure nothing obstructs the window
    when it is closed without pinch protection.
    If dirt, ice or similar create so much resistance that the pinch protection cuts in, the
    pinch protection can be temporarily disengaged and the window closed.
    1 Make sure the ignition is ON.
    2 Press and hold the
    button on the
    driver’s door while operating the window
    in question.
    3 Close the window in question.
    The pinch protection will be active the next
    time a window is operated.

    Button for temporary deactivation of rear
    door window switches and temporary
    override of window pinch protection



  • Page 127

    Interior equipment
    Calibration

    Deactivating the rear window
    switches
    WARNING

    The pinch protection will not be engaged
    after a power break until the electric
    windows have been calibrated.
    After a loss of battery power, or if the automatic closing feature does not work, the
    electric windows must be calibrated for the
    pinch protection to work.
    Fully open and close the windows at least
    twice. You will hear a chime after successful
    calibration.

    The
    in the driver’s door deactivates the
    window switches in the rear doors.
    The illuminated switch will change color
    from green to orange (deactivated).

    125



  • Page 128

    126

    Interior equipment

    Sunroof
    (optional)

    WARNING
    Bear in mind the pinch hazard when closing the electric sunroof. Risk of serious or
    fatal injuries!
    • Always remove the remote control
    from the ignition switch when you
    leave the car. This will prevent
    personal injury caused by the activation of the electric sunroof, for example, due to children playing.
    • The person operating the electric
    sunroof is responsible for ensuring
    that no one, especially a child, has
    their head, hands or fingers in the
    opening, before closing the sunroof.
    • Do not stick any part of the body or the
    head out through an open window
    while the car is moving.
    The sunroof is operated by the control in the
    roof console. For the sunroof to work, the
    remote control must be in the ON position in
    the ignition switch.
    If the car is equipped with windows having
    the automatic closing function, the sunroof
    can be opened and closed so long as the car
    is unlocked until 20 minutes has passed
    since the remote control was removed from
    the ignition switch.

    Sunroof control
    1 Manually controlled opening
    2 Automatic opening

    To open
    Manually controlled opening
    Slide the control rearward to its first position.
    The sunroof will halt when you release the
    control. If you do not release the control, the
    sunroof will open to the comfort position. To
    open the sunroof further, release the control
    and then once again press it rearward.
    Automatic opening
    Slide the control rearward to the second
    position and release it. The sunroof will
    open to the comfort position. To open the
    sunroof further, slide the control rearward a
    second time.

    3 Manually controlled closing
    4 Automatic closing
    5 Ventilation position

    Sunroof without automatic opening
    Slide the control rearward to position 1 (see
    illustration). The sunroof will stop when you
    release the control or once it is fully open.



  • Page 129

    Interior equipment
    To close
    WARNING
    Exercise great care when closing the
    sunroof to ensure that nothing gets
    trapped.
    Manually controlled closing
    Slide the control forward to its first position.
    The sunroof will halt when you release the
    control.
    Automatic closing (certain variants only)
    Slide the control forward to its second position and release it. The sunroof will close
    fully.
    The sunroof pinch protection halts closing
    and opens the sunroof slightly if something
    obstructs closing.
    Sunroof without automatic closing
    Slide the control forward to position 3 (see
    illustration). The sunroof will stop when you
    release the control or once it is fully closed.

    Ventilation position (rear edge of
    sunroof open)
    • To open – press in the control.
    • To close – slide the control forward to the
    second position.
    It is also possible to select the ventilation
    position when the sunroof is open by pressing in the control. The sunroof will then close
    automatically. Press the control once
    more to open the sunroof to its ventilation
    position.
    If you wish to open the sunroof fully from
    the ventilation position, you must first close
    it (slide the control forward). You can then
    slide the control rearward to open the sunroof.
    The sunroof incorporates an interior, manual, sliding sun blind.
    Sunroof without automatic closing
    • To open – press the control up.
    • To close – slide the control forward to
    position 3.

    127

    Comfort opening
    (option, certain variants only)
    Comfort opening is the remote opening of
    windows and the sunroof.
    Press and hold the unlocking button on the
    remote control until the windows and
    optional sunroof start to open (approx. 2 s).
    During comfort opening of the windows,
    sunroof (option) and soft top, the range is
    reduced by approximately half.
    If the sunroof is in the ventilation position, it
    will not open.
    Convertible: For the remote opening of the
    soft top, refer to page 58.



  • Page 130

    128

    Interior equipment

    Pinch protection
    (if equipped)

    WARNING
    Make sure nothing obstructs the sunroof
    when it is closed without pinch protection.
    The sunroof is equipped with pinch protection. This is activated if something gets
    trapped when the sunroof is being closed.
    The sunroof will stop and open slightly.
    Temporary overriding the pinch protection
    If dirt, ice or similar create so much resistance that the pinch protection cuts in (sunroof cannot be closed), the pinch protection
    can be temporarily disengaged.
    1 Make sure the ignition is ON.
    2 Press and hold the
    button on the
    driver’s door while operating the window
    in question.
    3 Close the sunroof with the button on the
    roof console.
    The pinch protection will be operative the
    next time the sunroof is operated.

    Button for overriding the sunroof pinch
    protection

    Emergency operation of the
    sunroof
    In an emergency, such as if there is an electrical failure, the sunroof can be operated
    with a screwdriver.
    Remove the lens from the roof console. Use
    a screwdriver to press in the pin in the slot
    in the center of the motor shaft and turn the
    screwdriver.
    Turn clockwise to close the sunroof when in
    ventilation position.
    Turn counter-clockwise to close when in
    open position.



  • Page 131

    Interior equipment

    129

    Rear lighting
    1 Interior lighting always off
    2 Interior lighting controlled by the doors
    3 Interior lighting on continuously

    Interior lighting
    The interior lighting consists of one front and
    one rear roof light, floor lighting, and courtesy lights in the doors (certain variants
    only). The light switch for the interior lighting
    is located on the roof console by the rearview mirror.

    1 Reading lights
    2 Roof light

    When the switch is in the mid-position (dooractivated), the interior lighting will come on:
    • When the car is unlocked.
    • When a door is opened and the ignition is
    OFF.
    • When the remote control is removed from
    the ignition switch.
    The lighting goes out:
    • When the car is locked.
    • When the ignition is turned on.
    • Approx. 20 s after closing all doors.
    The lights are dimmed out gradually.
    If a door is left open and the light switch is in
    position 2 or 3 and the ignition is OFF, the
    interior lighting will be switched off automatically after 20 minutes to save the battery.

    The glove box lighting is switched on and off
    automatically when the glove box is opened
    and closed.



  • Page 132

    130

    Interior equipment
    Trunk lighting
    The trunk lighting is switched on and off
    when the trunk lid is opened and closed.
    If the trunk lid is left open, the lighting will be
    switched off automatically after 20 minutes
    to prevent the battery from running flat.

    Cup holder
    (option)

    WARNING
    • The cup holder should not be used to
    hold cups made of china or glass as
    these can cause personal injury in the
    event of a crash.

    Sun visor with vanity mirror

    Sun visor
    Illuminated vanity mirrors are provided on
    the sun visors. The lighting comes on when
    the cover is raised.

    • Use only paper mugs, plastic bottles
    or aluminium cans.
    • Avoid spillage, particularly of hot
    drinks.

    NOTICE
    Take care not to spill any liquid on the
    audio system , the ignition switch or the
    like when using the cup holders. Soft
    drinks in particular can cause malfunctions.
    Cup holders are provided in the fascia, in
    the center console compartment between
    the front seats and rear seat cushion (Sport
    Sedan). The cup holder between the seats
    can be raised if you wish to use the compartment for storage.



  • Page 133

    Interior equipment

    Cup holder in fascia

    Cup holder in center console compartment between front seats (certain variants
    only)

    131

    Cup holder in rear seat cushion (Sport
    Sedan)



  • Page 134

    132

    Interior equipment

    Power Outlet
    (if equipped)
    You can use the electrical socket in the storage compartment under the armrest
    between the front seats to charge a mobile
    phone, for example. There is a recess on
    each side of the compartment which will
    accept a lead so that you can close the lid
    without damaging the charger lead.

    WARNING
    The maximum output of the cigarette
    lighter socket is 240 W (20 A). The rating
    of the socket in the compartment between
    the seats is the same. Overloading can
    result in melting or even fire.

    Storage compartments
    WARNING
    The glove box must be closed while travelling. An open glove box door could
    cause personal injury in the event of a
    crash.
    There are additional storage compartments
    in the rear seat armrest, below the front ashtray and in the doors.

    Open the glove box with the button on the
    left of the moulding.
    Convertible has lockable glove box. Use
    the traditionally key, see page 48.



  • Page 135

    Interior equipment

    Sliding cover in glove box to admit cold air
    (cars with ACC only).
    This allows the storage of chocolate and
    chilled drinks, for example.

    133

    Card holder

    Storage compartment between front seats

    Storage pocket on front edge of seats

    Storage pocket on back of seats



  • Page 136

    134

    Interior equipment

    Rearview mirrors
    Door mirrors
    To adjust
    The door mirrors are electrically adjustable
    and heated. The controls for adjusting the
    mirrors are on the driver’s door:
    1 Select a door mirror with the upper
    button.
    2 Adjust the mirror using the touch pad.
    The mirror glass can also be adjusted manually by gently pressing the glass in the
    desired direction.
    The mirror heating is turned on together with
    the rear window heating.
    If the car has an electrically adjustable
    driver’s seat with memory, the mirror
    settings are stored in the memory (see
    page 19).

    1 Selection of mirror
    2 Touch pad for adjustment
    3 Reversing position (electric/optional)

    Manual retraction
    The door mirrors are designed to fold back
    if knocked. The mirrors can also be
    retracted manually. This can be useful when
    parking in tight spaces, such as on the car
    deck of a ferry. Remember to return the door
    mirrors to their normal positions before
    driving off.

    Retracting a door mirror

    Reversing position
    On certain model variants, the passengerside mirror glass can be angled down to
    facilitate reversing. Press the
    button
    shown in the illustration. This is located
    under the touch pad. Return the mirror to its
    normal position by pressing the button
    again. The mirror will also return to its
    normal position if you drive forward approximately 22 yds. (20 meters).



  • Page 137

    Interior equipment
    Interior rearview mirror with
    autodimming

    Mirror position lever
    1 Normal position
    2 Antidazzle position

    Interior rearview mirror
    The interior rearview mirror is of the autodimming type and can be deflected with the
    lever on its underside. Certain variants have
    an autodimming rearview mirror.
    The lever should be in the normal position
    when you adjust the mirror.

    (if equipped)
    The system is activated when the forwardfacing sensor detects that it is dark outside
    and the rear-facing sensor detects, for
    example, if the car following has not
    dimmed its headlights. The rearview mirror
    is then darkened to prevent the strong light
    source from dazzling the driver. This darkening is stepless.
    The mirror returns to its normal state when
    the strong light source diminishes.
    The autodimming function can be turned
    OFF with the switch on the lower edge of the
    rear-view mirror.
    NOTE!
    Towing a trailer can cause the system to
    malfunction, as the rear-facing sensor may
    shaded by the trailer.

    Mirror with autodimming
    1 Forward-facing sensor
    2 Autodimming ON/OFF
    3 Rear-facing sensor

    135



  • Page 138

    136

    Interior equipment

    Interior rearview mirror with
    garage opener, autodimming
    function and compass

    Preparations for first-time programming
    Before programming the garage opener for
    the first time, you must delete any factory
    codes.
    Press and hold the two outer buttons until
    the indicator light begins to flash-after
    20 seconds. Release both buttons. Do not
    hold for longer that 30 seconds. The garage
    opener is now in the train (or learning) mode
    and can be programmed at any time beginning with "Programming" - step 2.

    (if equipped

    WARNING
    Make sure that people and objects are out
    of the way of moving door or gate to
    prevent potential harm or damage.
    When programming the garage opener,
    you may be operating a garage door or
    gate operator. Therefore it is advised to
    park outside of the garage.
    Do not use the garage opener with any
    garage door opener that lacks the safety
    stop and reverse feature as required by
    federal safety standards. (This includes
    any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.). A garage
    door opener which cannot detect an
    object, signaling the door to stop and
    reverse, does not meet current federal
    safety standards. Using a garage door
    opener without these features increases
    risk of serious injury or death.

    Buttons for garage opener, autodimming
    and compass
    1–3
    4
    5
    6

    Garage opener
    LED
    Autodimming/compass ON/OFF
    Compass bearing

    Retain your original garage door opener
    (transmitter) for future programming procedures (i.e., new vehicle purchase). It is also
    suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle,
    the programmed garage opener buttons be
    erased for security purposes, see
    page 138.

    Programming
    The garage opener can record and store the
    frequencies of three different remote controls.
    The battery in the remote control should be
    fairly new for programming to work well.
    Do not repeat "Programming" - step two
    to train additional devices to a second or
    third button. Begin with "Programming" step three.
    1 Turn the ignition ON.
    2 Press and hold the two outer buttons
    (buttons one and three) - releasing only
    when the indicator light begins to flash
    (after 20 seconds). Do not hold the
    buttons for longer than 30 seconds and
    do not repeat step two to program a
    second and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two buttons.
    3 Position the end of your hand-held
    transmitter 1-3 inches (5-14 cm) away
    from the button you wish to program
    while keeping the indicator light in view.



  • Page 139

    Interior equipment
    The transmitter should face the mirror
    from below or left side of the mirror.
    4 Simultaneously press and hold both the
    chosen and hand-held transmitter
    buttons. Do not release the buttons
    until step 5 has been completed.
    Note: Some gate operators and garage
    door openers may require you to replace
    this Programming Step 4 with procedures
    noted in the "Gate Operator / Canadian Programming" section.
    5 After the indicator light changes from a
    slow to a rapidly blinking light, release
    both the mirror and hand-held transmitter buttons.
    6 Press and hold the just-trained button
    and observe the indicator light.
    If the indicator light stays on
    constantly, programming is
    complete and your device should activate when the button is pressed and
    released.
    Note: To program the remaining two buttons, begin with "Programming" - step
    three. Do not repeat step two.
    If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two
    seconds and then turns to a constant
    light continue with "Programming"
    steps 7-9 to complete the programming of
    a rolling code equipped device (most commonly a garage door opener).
    7 At the garage door opener receiver
    (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate
    the "learn" or "smart" button. This can
    usually be found where the hanging

    antenna wire is attached to the motorhead unit.
    8 Firmly press and release the "learn" or
    "smart" button. (The name and color of
    the button may vary by manufacturer.)
    Note: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step nine.
    9 Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
    hold for two seconds and release the
    programmed button. Repeat the
    "press/hold/release" sequence a
    second time, and, depending on the
    brand of the garage door opener (or
    other rolling code equipped device),
    repeat this sequence a third time to
    complete the programming process.
    The garage opener should now activate
    your rolling code equipped device.
    Note: To program the remaining two buttons, begin with "Programming" - step
    three. Do not repeat step two.

    137

    Gate Operator / Canadian Programming
    Canadian radio-frequency laws require
    transmitter signals to "time-out" (or quit)
    after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for the
    garage opener to pick up the signal during
    programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
    some U.S. gate operators are designed to
    "time-out" in the same manner.
    If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator by
    using the "Programming" procedures
    (regardless of where you live), replace
    "Programming " step 4 with the following:
    Note: If programming a garage door opener
    or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
    device during the "cycling" process to prevent possible overheating.
    4 Continue to press and hold the button
    while you press and release - every two
    seconds ("cycle") your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has successfully been accepted by the garage opener.
    (The indicator light will flash slowly and then
    rapidly.)
    Proceed with "Programming" step five to
    complete.

    NOTICE
    Switch off the power supply to the garage
    door or gate (or park the car beyond the
    range of the remote control) while
    programming using the "cycling" method
    to prevent damaging the electrical motor.



  • Page 140

    138

    Interior equipment

    Reprogramming a single button
    To program a device to the garage opener
    using a button previously trained, follow
    these steps:
    1 Press and hold the desired button. DO
    NOT release the button.
    2 The indicator light will begin to flash after
    20 seconds. Without releasing the
    button, proceed with "Programming" step 3.

    Opening a garage door
    To operate, simply press and release the
    programmed button. Activation will now
    occur for the trained device (i.e. garage door
    opener, gate operator, security system,
    entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.).
    For convenience, the hand-held transmitter
    of the device may also be used at any time.

    Erasing the three buttons
    To erase programming from the three buttons (individual buttons cannot be erased
    but can be "reprogrammed" as outlined
    below), follow the step noted:
    • Press and hold the two outer buttons until
    the indicator light begins to flash-after
    20 seconds. Release both buttons. Do
    not hold for longer that 30 seconds. The
    garage opener is now in the train (or
    learning) mode and can be programmed
    at any time beginning with "Programming"
    - step 3.

    Buttons for garage opener, autodimming
    and compass
    1–3
    4
    5
    6
    This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
    Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
    this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
    must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
    Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
    manufacturer could void the user’s authority to operate
    the equipment.
    Canada only:
    This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
    Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
    this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
    device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.

    Garage opener
    LED
    Autodimming/compass ON/OFF
    Compass bearing

    Autodimming
    Press button 5 briefly to switch autodimming
    on or off. When autodimming is switched on,
    a 1 is displayed briefly in the compass window. A 0 indicates that autodimming is
    switched off. See page 135 for a description
    of operation.



  • Page 141

    Interior equipment
    Compass
    The compass is built into the rearview mirror. The compass bearing is displayed in the
    top right-hand corner of the mirror and is
    updated every other second. The compass
    displays the car’s direction of travel: N, NE,
    E, etc.
    Switch the compass display on and off by
    pressing button 5 for 3 seconds, see illustration on page 138.
    Changing zones
    The earth’s magnetic field varies depending
    on one’s position on the globe. If you drive
    your car from one magnetic zone to another
    the compass setting will need to be changed
    to ensure a correct bearing.
    1 Study the illustrations to determine the
    correct zone.
    2 Press and hold button 5 until "ZONE" is
    shown in the display on the mirror (6 s).
    The zone number is now also shown.
    3 Press button 5 repeatedly to change the
    zone number. There are 15 zones from
    which to choose. Once the correct zone
    is selected, release the button and wait
    4 seconds. The compass will now
    display the bearing.

    Compass zones in USA

    Calibration
    Calibration is performed automatically
    during travel.
    If, for any reason, a manual calibration is
    needed perform as follows:
    1 Press and hold button 5 until "CAL" and
    the compass bearing are displayed
    (approx. 9 s).
    2 Drive in circles (max. 5 mph/8 km/h) or
    drive as normal until "CAL" is no longer
    displayed.

    Compass zones in Canada

    139



  • Page 142

    140

    Interior equipment

    Trunk
    Folding down the rear seat, Sport Sedan
    Convertible: The rear seat cannot be folded.

    WARNING
    • Never drive the car if the backrest is not correctly locked into
    position as this increases the risk of personal injury in the
    event of heavy braking or a crash.
    • Never leave a child or animal unattended in the car. During
    sunny weather the temperature in the passenger and trunk
    can climb to 160–180°F (70–80°C). Small children are very
    susceptible to heat stroke.
    • Keep hands well clear of all moving parts.
    • Never place heavy objects on the parcel shelf. There is always
    a danger of loose objects being thrown forward and causing
    injury if the car should brake suddenly or be involved in a
    crash. See also page 189.

    • When folding the backrest back upright, make sure that it is
    locked correctly on both sides. This is imperative since the
    center safety belt is mounted in the backrest.
    • When folding the backrest back upright, make sure that it is
    locked correctly on both sides. This is imperative since otherwise objects in the trunk could force their way into the cabin
    during heavy breaking or a crash.
    • Adjust the head restraints for the rear seats to be occupied to
    a suitable height before riding in the car.



  • Page 143

    Interior equipment
    For greater flexibility, the rear seat is split so that the narrow and
    the wide part can be folded down separately.
    Next to the hinges in the trunk are handles for unlocking the rear seat
    backrests.
    The operation is easier if the front seats are not too far back and
    the rear seat head restraints are fully lowered.
    1 Unlock the backrest by pulling the appropriate handle in the
    trunk.
    2 Fold the backrest forward.
    Note: When returning the backrest to its upright position, make
    sure that it locks properly in place and that the safety belt does
    not get caught.
    If the left-hand backrest is not properly locked in position, the following message is displayed on the SID (equivalent message displayed
    for right-hand backrest):
    Rear left seat backrest
    unlocked.
    Trunk Release Handle, see page 143.
    Emergency opening of the narrow backrest, see page 144.

    141



  • Page 144

    142

    Interior equipment

    Load-through hatch, Sport Sedan
    Convertible: There is no load-through hatch.

    WARNING
    • Always secure the load firmly, for example using the middle
    safety belt. This reduces the danger of personal injury resulting from the displacement of the load on hard braking or in the
    event of a crash.
    • Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its
    handling characteristics (see page 268).
    A load-through hatch is incorporated in the rear seat backrest to
    enable long, narrow items to be carried inside the car.
    Before loading or unloading long items, switch off the engine and
    apply the parking brake. This avoids the danger of the car moving
    off if a long item were to knock the gear or selector lever into gear.
    • Fold down the armrest and open the hatch by lifting the handle.
    There is a lock on the rear side of the hatch. Use this to lock or unlock
    the hatch. The position of the lock is designed to prevent unauthorized persons from accessing the trunk from inside the cabin.
    To lock: Open the hatch and lock the lock. Close the hatch. The
    hatch is now locked.
    To unlock: Fold down the wide section of the backrest and unlock
    the lock. Alternatively, you can unlock the hatch from the trunk.



  • Page 145

    Interior equipment

    143

    • Secure small items if the backrest is
    folded down. Small items can also be
    thrown around inside the car and
    cause personal injury.
    • The elastic cargo net (accessory) is
    only designed for light objects that are
    to be kept in place while driving

    Trunk Release Handle

    Tie down eyes in the trunk

    • Elastic cargo net (accessory): WARNING. Avoid eye injury. DO NOT overstretch. ALWAYS keep face and body
    out of recoil path. DO NOT use when
    strap has visible signs of wear or
    damage.

    Trunk Release Handle

    Tie down eyes

    • The rear seat must be in the upright
    position to protect against load
    displacement in the event of a crash.

    There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release
    handle located inside the trunk on the latch.
    This handle will glow following exposure to
    light. Pull the release handle down to open
    the trunk from inside.

    There are tie down eyes in the trunk that
    should be used to secure loads. In general,
    loads should be placed as far forward and
    as low down as possible in the trunk.

    • Do not exceed the load capacity of the
    car, as this will alter its handling characteristics (see page 268).

    WARNING
    NOTICE
    The trunk release handle was not
    designed to be used to tie down the trunk
    lid or as an anchor point when securing
    items in the trunk. Improper use of the
    trunk release could damage it.

    • Lay heavy bags on the floor. Place
    smaller and lighter bags on top.
    • Secure heavy and bulky items using
    the lashing eyes provided in the trunk.
    This will avert the danger of luggage
    flying around if the car should brake
    suddenly or be involved in a crash.

    • Match your speed and driving style to
    how the car is loaded. The handling
    characteristics of the car can be
    affected since a load in the trunk will
    alter the car’s center of gravity.



  • Page 146

    144

    Interior equipment

    Trunk lighting
    On the underside of the parcel shelf is a light
    that is switched on and off when the trunk is
    opened and closed.
    If the trunk lid is left open, the lighting will be
    switched off automatically after 20 minutes
    to prevent the battery from running flat.

    Emergency opening of the
    narrow backrest
    The narrow section of the backrest can be
    opened in an emergency if the car is without
    electricity (not possible to open trunk lid)
    and you need to access the trunk for a warning triangle, for example.
    • Remove the cover and depress the yellow
    lever forward.
    Tools and spare wheel, see page 246.

    Cover over emergency opening lever, on
    parcel shelf



  • Page 147

    Starting and driving

    145

    Starting and driving
    Ignition switch ________
    Steering wheel lock ____
    Starting the engine ____
    Important considerations
    for driving __________
    Refueling ____________
    Engine Break-in Period_
    Manual transmission___
    Automatic transmission
    Cruise control ________
    Braking ______________
    Traction Control System
    (TCS) ______________
    Electronic Stability
    Program (ESP) ______
    Parking brake_________
    Parking ______________
    Saab Parking Assistance

    146
    148
    148
    150
    153
    157
    158
    159
    165
    166
    169
    171
    173
    173
    176

    Economical driving_____
    Driving in cold weather__
    Driving in hot climates __
    Towing a trailer ________
    Driving with a roof rack
    load ________________
    Driving with a load _____
    Driving with the trunk lid
    open________________
    Driving in deep water ___
    Driving at night ________
    Towing the car_________
    Driving with the compact
    spare tire ____________
    Jump starting _________
    For long trips __________

    179
    181
    183
    184
    188
    189
    189
    189
    190
    190
    193
    193
    196



  • Page 148

    146

    Starting and driving

    Ignition switch
    The ignition switch is located on the center
    console between the front seats. In cars
    with automatic transmission, the remote
    control can only be removed when the
    selector lever is in position P.

    NOTICE
    Take care not to spill drinks or to drop
    crumbs over the ignition switch. If dirt or
    liquid gets into it, the switch may not
    operate properly.
    If snow from clothing falls into the ignition
    switch and melts, the ignition switch can
    seize (freeze). Brush snow off clothing
    before getting into the car.

    WARNING
    • Always remove the remote control
    before leaving children unattended in
    the car.
    • Apply the parking brake before removing the remote control.
    • Never remove the remote control
    while the car is moving. This will activate the steering wheel lock and make
    it impossible to steer the car.



  • Page 149

    Starting and driving
    LOCK position
    The parking lights, hazard warning lights and interior lighting can be turned
    on.
    Cars with automatic transmission: Move the gear lever to P.
    The gear lever is locked in position. This is the only position in which the
    remote control can be removed.
    Cars with manual transmission: The remote control can be removed
    regardless of the position of the gear lever.
    OFF position
    Parts of the electrical system are operative.
    Do not leave the remote control in the OFF position with the engine
    not running as this could cause the battery to run flat in a matter of
    hours.
    Cars with automatic transmission: The gear lever is not locked. See
    also page 160.
    ON position
    The entire electrical system is operative.
    Do not leave the remote control in the ON position when the engine
    is not running.
    Turn the remote control to the OFF position to disconnect the electrical
    system.
    When you turn the remote control to ON, some indicator and warning lights
    will come on in the main instrument panel. These should go out after about
    3 seconds.
    ST - starter position
    The starter motor operates (automatic transmission: selector lever must
    be in P or N) when the remote control is turned to this position. When
    released, the remote control will spring back to the ON position.
    The car has an electronic restart lock. If the engine fails to start, the remote
    control must first be turned back to a position between OFF and LOCK
    before the starter motor can be operated again.

    147

    To allow the various systems in the car time
    to register that the remote control has been
    inserted into the ignition switch, do not turn
    the remote control for roughly half a second.



  • Page 150

    148

    Starting and driving

    Steering wheel lock
    The steering wheel lock is electronic. The
    lock engages when the remote control is
    removed from the ignition and unlocks when
    the remote control is inserted. A click can be
    heard when the steering wheel lock locks
    and unlocks.
    If the car is parked with one front wheel
    touching the curb, for example, you may
    need to turn the steering wheel slightly
    when you insert the remote control to allow
    the steering wheel lock to unlock. If you do
    not succeed on first attempt you must
    remove the remote control before trying
    again. Turn the steering wheel and insert
    the remote control into the ignition switch.
    If the steering wheel lock does not disengage it will not be possible to turn the remote
    control in the ignition switch.
    The following message is shown on the SID:
    Steering wheel locked.
    Pull out key, turn steering
    wheel. Try again.

    If a fault arises affecting the steering wheel
    lock, the following message will be
    displayed on the SID:
    Steering lock malfunc.
    Make a safe stop.
    Contact Saab dealer.
    If the steering wheel lock malfunctions while
    the remote control is in the ignition switch,
    this may prevent the removal of the remote
    control or prevent the car from being
    restarted once the engine has been
    switched off.
    If you have to leave the car, lock the car by
    pressing down the lock buttons on the
    doors. Lock the front left door from outside
    with the traditional key (see page 44). The
    car is now locked but the alarm is inactive.

    Starting the engine
    WARNING
    • When starting the engine:
    - Sit down in the driver’s seat.
    - Depress the clutch pedal fully (M/T). If
    the gear lever is not in the neutral position, the clutch pedal must be fully
    depressed or the car will jump
    forwards or backwards, which may
    cause a crash.
    - Never start the car from outside the
    vehicle, e.g. through a window that is
    down. This could lead to serious
    personal injury.
    • Cars with automatic transmission:
    select position P to remove the ignition
    key. The key can only be removed in
    this gear position.
    • Carbon monoxide (CO) is a colorless,
    odorless, poisonous gas. Be alert to
    the danger of CO – always open the
    garage doors before starting the
    engine in the garage.
    • Do not rest or sleep in the car when
    parked with the engine running. There
    is a risk of depressing the accelerator
    which could lead to engine damage.
    • There is also a danger of CO poisoning if the exhaust system is leaking.



  • Page 151

    Starting and driving
    Starting the engine
    Avoid racing the engine or loading it heavily
    before it has warmed up. Do not drive away
    before the warning and indicator lights have
    gone out.
    The engine has an automatic choke and
    should be started as follows:
    Cars with manual transmission
    To start the engine the clutch pedal must
    be fully depressed.
    1 Make sure the parking brake is applied.
    2 Depress the clutch pedal but do not
    touch the accelerator.
    3 Start the engine. Let the remote control
    spring back as soon as the engine has
    started and is running smoothly.
    Allow the engine to idle for about
    10 seconds. Do not apply full throttle for at
    least 3 minutes after starting.

    Cars with automatic transmission
    The selector lever must be in the P or N
    position.
    1 The selector lever must be in the P or N
    position.
    2 Keep your foot on the brake pedal.
    Note! Once the engine has started, the
    brake pedal will sink. This is perfectly
    normal.
    3 Start the engine. Let the remote control
    spring back as soon as the engine has
    started and is running smoothly.
    Allow the engine to idle for about
    10 seconds. Do not apply full throttle for at
    least 3 minutes after starting.

    149

    Useful tips on starting the engine
    If the engine has failed to start after several
    attempts in very cold weather, proceed as
    follows:
    1 Turn the ignition switch to ON (it is
    essential that you turn the ignition to
    ON before depressing the accelerator).
    2 Press the accelerator to the floor and run
    the starter motor for 5-10 seconds. This
    will prevent the engine being flooded
    (fully depressed accelerator cuts off the
    fuel supply).
    3 Now start the engine in the normal way
    - do not touch the accelerator.
    If the engine stalls immediately after starting
    (e.g. if the clutch was released too quickly),
    do not touch the accelerator when restarting
    the engine.



  • Page 152

    150

    Starting and driving

    Important
    considerations for
    driving
    1 Starting and driving
    • Do not use full throttle until the engine
    is warm, so as to avoid unnecessary
    wear. If the needle of the turbo gauge
    repeatedly enters the red zone, the
    engine may suddenly lose power, due
    to the initiation of a monitoring system
    that limits the boost pressure. Contact
    a Saab dealer as soon as possible.
    • Under certain barometric conditions
    (high outside temperature and/or high
    altitude) the needle may enter the first
    part of the red zone without necessarily
    indicating that a fault has arisen.
    • A protective function (interruption of the
    fuel supply) limits the engine speed.

    2 Stopping the engine
    • Do not rev the engine immediately
    before switching it off - stop the engine
    when it is idling.
    3 Regulating the boost pressure
    • One of the advantages of boost pressure regulation is that the engine can
    also be run safely on gasoline with a
    lower octane rating, although not lower
    than AON 87. However, engine performance will fall slightly and heavy loading and laboring should be avoided. For
    optimum performance, use the recommended grade of fuel.
    • The maximum boost pressure is regulated according to the tendency of the
    engine to knock. Short-lived knocking
    is perfectly normal. This can occur
    when the engine is running at about
    3,000 rpm under a heavy load. The
    extent of this knocking will depend on
    the grade of fuel in the tank.
    • Isolated instances of knocking can
    occur with low-octane fuel. This
    controlled form of knocking, followed
    by a reduction in the boost pressure, is
    a sign that the control system is working normally, and is perfectly safe for
    the engine.

    NOTICE
    • If the engine sounds strange there is a
    malfunction. Contact a Saab dealer
    immediately.
    • The use of fuel with too low an octane
    rating can cause serious engine
    damage.

    Limp-home
    The engine management system has a
    diagnostic feature that checks a number of
    internal functions. If a fault is detected in the
    throttle valve, the engine management
    system will set the throttle system to the
    limp-home mode. This means:
    • idling control will be poor (uneven idling
    since regulated by ignition and fuel
    supply)
    • engine performance will be reduced
    • the cruise control will not function
    • the capacity of the A/C compressor will be
    limited.



  • Page 153

    Starting and driving
    If the diagnosis function detects a fault in the
    engine management system, the
    light
    "Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)" in
    the instrument panel will come on (see
    page 79). Have the car checked at a Saab
    dealer as soon as possible.

    NOTICE
    If
    "Engine malfunction (CHECK
    ENGINE)" warning light starts to flash
    (indicating that the engine is misfiring and
    the catalytic converter can be damaged),
    ease off the accelerator slightly. The light
    should go out or start to shine constantly.
    If the light continues to flash despite
    easing off the accelerator, you may
    continue to drive the car but at the minimum throttle permitted by the current traffic situation. Have the car checked as
    soon as possible at a Saab dealer.

    Important considerations with
    catalytic converters
    The catalytic converter is an emission control device incorporated in the car’s exhaust
    system. It consists of a metal canister with a
    honeycomb insert, the cells of which have
    walls coated in a catalytic layer (precious
    metal alloy).

    NOTICE
    Use only unleaded gasoline. Leaded
    gasoline is detrimental to the catalyst and
    oxygen sensor and will seriously impair
    the function of the catalytic converter.
    To ensure that the catalytic converter continues to function properly, and also to avoid
    damage to the converter and its associated
    components, the following points must be
    observed:

    151

    • Have the car serviced regularly in accordance with the service program.
    • Always be alert to any misfiring of the
    engine (not running on all cylinders) and
    any loss of power or performance. At the
    first sign of a malfunction, reduce speed
    and take the car to a Saab dealer.
    • If the engine fails to start (in severe cold
    or if the battery is flat), the car can be
    bump started (manual transmission only)
    or started using jump leads to a donor
    battery. However, as soon as you have
    started the engine, it is important that it
    runs on all cylinders. If it is misfiring, allow
    it to idle for up to 5 minutes to give it time
    to settle and run smoothly. If, after this
    time, the engine still fails to run properly,
    switch off the engine to avoid serious
    damage to the catalytic converter.
    Contact a Saab dealer for advice.



  • Page 154

    152

    Starting and driving

    • Never park the car on dry grass or other
    combustible material. The catalytic
    converter gets very hot and could therefore start a fire.
    • Never drive off if the engine is misfiring.
    • If you bump start the car when the engine
    is already at normal working temperature,
    the engine must start to run on all cylinders. Abort bump starting if the engine
    fails to start immediately.
    Failure to strictly follow these instructions
    can result in damage to the catalytic converter and associated components, and
    could represent a breach of the warranty
    conditions.

    NOTICE
    If the car runs out of gas, air may be drawn
    in with the fuel, which, in turn, can cause
    the catalytic converter to be damaged by
    overheating.

    WARNING
    If the engine is being run with the car on a
    rolling road or dynamometer, to ensure
    adequate cooling, air must be blown into
    the engine compartment and under the
    car at a rate equivalent to the ram-air
    effect that would obtain at the corresponding road speed.

    Engine management system with catalytic
    converter
    1 Engine control module
    2 Oxygen sensor
    3 Catalytic converter



  • Page 155

    Starting and driving

    153

    Refueling
    WARNING
    If you spill fuel and then something ignites
    it, you could be badly burned. Fuel can
    spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
    too quickly. This spray can happen if your
    tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot
    weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
    wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then
    unscrew the cap all the way.
    Gasoline fumes are highly explosive.
    Therefore:
    • never smoke while refueling
    • never use gasoline for any purpose
    other than as engine fuel
    • gasoline is extremely flammable and
    can cause severe burns. No open or
    exposed flames near gasoline
    • do not use a mobile phone at the
    same time as refueling

    NOTICE

    NOTICE

    • Do not overfill. Fuel should not come
    right up the filler pipe as room for
    expansion is needed for when the
    temperature rises.

    The engine control module (ECM) monitoring the engine parameters also stores
    fault codes.

    • The use of fuel with too low an octane
    rating can cause serious engine
    damage.
    • Clean fuel from painted surfaces as
    soon as possible.

    Under certain circumstances, this may
    cause constant illumination of the Engine
    malfunction (CHECK ENGINE) lamp
    , thus indicating a fault that must be
    checked by your Saab dealer, see
    page 79.
    NOTE: always observe the following two
    measures:
    • Make sure that the fuel filler cap is
    screwed on correctly before the
    engine is started. Screw on the fuel
    filler cap until you hear a distinct click.
    • Avoid driving with the fuel low level
    indicator illuminated. The symbol illuminates when less than approximately
    2.5 gallons (10 litres) of fuel remains
    in the tank.



  • Page 156

    154

    Starting and driving

    Refueling
    NOTICE
    WARNING
    If a fire starts while you are refueling, do
    not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of
    fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant. Leave the area
    immediately.
    1 Switch off the engine.
    2 Open the filler cap, located in the righthand rear fender.
    3 Insert the fuel pump nozzle beyond the
    flange on the filler pipe and let the first
    mark (a ring, a pimple or the first springcoil) rest on the flange. Do not withdraw
    the nozzle while filling is in progress.
    4 Cease refueling the first time the pump
    stops, and wait a few seconds after
    you´ve finished pumping before you
    remove the nozzle.
    Manually opening the fuel filler door, Convertible, see page 74.

    Do not overfill. Fuel should not come right
    up the filler pipe as expansion room is
    needed when the temperature rises.
    • Fill to maximum filling capacity.
    • Stop filling after the first time that the
    nozzle trips to shut off the flow of fuel.
    • Filling capacity can differ between
    different fuel stations and outside
    temperature. Fuel tank volume when
    nozzle trips to shut off, may vary by
    0.5 gal. (2 liters).
    • Do not fill fuel all the way up the filler
    pipe. The gasoline must be allowed
    room for expansion especially during
    hot weather.

    Filler cap
    Filler cap
    To remove the filler cap, turn it slowly to the
    left (counterclockwise). The filler cap has a
    spring in it; if you let go of the cap too soon,
    it will spring back to the right.
    When you put the filler cap back on, turn it
    to the right (clockwise) until you hear three
    clicks. Make sure you fully install the cap.
    The most effective way to prevent condensation forming in the tank (and thus avoid
    possible running problems) is to keep the
    tank full.
    Refer to page 181 for information regarding
    gasoline anti-freeze.



  • Page 157

    Starting and driving
    Filling a portable fuel container
    WARNING
    Never fill a portable fuel container while it
    is in your vehicle. Static electricity
    discharge from the container can ignite
    the gasoline vapor. You can be badly
    burned and your vehicle damaged if this
    occurs. To help avoid injury to you and
    others:

    When refueling, hang the filler cap inside
    the fuel door

    The fuel door has a built in filler cap holder
    slot located on the fuel door. Slide the white
    ring on the cap into the slot.
    Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure
    to get the right type. Your dealer can get one
    for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not
    fit properly.

    • Dispense gasoline only into approved
    containers.
    • Do not fill a container while it is inside
    a vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup
    bed or on any surface other than the
    ground.
    • Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
    inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle. Contact should be
    maintained until the filling is complete.
    • Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

    155

    Fuel (Gasoline Engine)
    Fuel
    Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the proper maintenance of your
    vehicle.
    For optimum performance Saab recommends:
    • 2.0t 175 hp – AON 90.
    • 2.0T 210 hp – AON 90.
    Gasoline Octane
    Use regular unleaded gasoline with a
    posted octane of 87 or higher. If the octane
    is less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, use
    a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
    soon as possible. Otherwise, you might
    damage your engine. A little pinging noise
    when you accelerate or drive uphill is considered normal. This does not indicate a
    problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel
    is necessary. If you are using 87 octane or
    higher-octane fuel and hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.



  • Page 158

    156

    Starting and driving

    Gasoline Specifications
    It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications which were developed by automobile manufacturers around the world and
    contained in the World-Wide Fuel Charter
    which is available from the Alliance of Automobile Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org/fuel_charter.htm. Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide
    improved driveability and emission control
    system performance compared to other
    gasoline.

    California Fuel
    If your vehicle is certified to meet California
    Emission Standards (see the underhood
    emission control label), it is designed to
    operate on fuels that meet California specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
    adopting California emissions standards,
    your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on
    fuels meeting federal specifications, but
    emission control system performance may
    be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp
    may turn on and your vehicle may fail a
    smog-check test. See Engine malfunction
    (CHECK ENGINE) on page 79. If this
    occurs, return to your authorized Saab
    dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that
    the condition is caused by the type of fuel
    used, repairs may not be covered by your
    warranty.

    Additives
    To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the
    United States are now required to contain
    additives that will help prevent engine and
    fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
    your emission control system to work properly. You should not have to add anything to
    your fuel. However, some gasolines contain
    only the minimum amount of additive
    required to meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations. Saab recommends that you buy gasolines that are
    advertised to help keep fuel injectors and
    intake valves clean. If your vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or
    valves, try a different brand of gasoline.
    Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as
    ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to contribute to clean air. Saab recommends that
    you use these gasolines, particularly if they
    comply with the specifications described
    earlier.
    Notice: Your vehicle was not designed
    for fuel that contains methanol. Do not
    use fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and
    also damage the plastic and rubber
    parts. That damage would not be covered under your warranty.
    Some gasolines that are not reformulated
    for low emissions may contain an octaneenhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT); ask
    the attendant where you buy gasoline



  • Page 159

    Starting and driving
    whether the fuel contains MMT. Saab does
    not recommend the use of such gasolines.
    Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of
    spark plugs and the performance of the
    emission control system may be affected.
    The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
    If this occurs, return to your authorized Saab
    dealer for service.
    Fuels in Foreign Countries
    If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada, the
    proper fuel may be hard to find. Never use
    leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
    repairs caused by use of improper fuel
    would not be covered by your warranty.
    To check the fuel availability, ask an auto
    club, or contact a major oil company that
    does business in the country where you will
    be driving.

    Engine Break-in Period
    Pistons, cylinder bores and bearings need
    time to obtain uniform, wear-resistant
    surfaces.
    If a new engine is driven too hard, this gradual process of bedding-in will not be possible and the life of the engine will be shortened.
    During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
    do not exceed 5,000 rpm.
    In addition, refrain from driving the car at full
    throttle, other than for brief instances,
    during the first 1,800 miles (3,000 km).

    157

    Wearing in new brake pads
    New brake pads take time to bed in, about
    90 miles (150 km) if the car is driven largely
    under stop-and-go conditions or about
    300 miles (500 km) of highway driving.
    To extend the useful life of the pads, avoid
    hard braking as much as possible.



  • Page 160

    158

    Starting and driving

    Manual transmission
    Clutch interlock
    To start the car, the clutch pedal must be
    depressed.
    When changing gear, fully depress the
    clutch pedal and then release it smoothly. It
    is inadvisable to drive with your hand resting
    on the gear lever, as this can increase the
    wear on the gearbox.
    Before reverse (R) can be engaged, you
    must lift the ring underneath the gear knob.

    NOTICE
    When reverse gear is to be engaged,
    the car must be at a standstill with
    the accelerator fully released.

    Gear positions, 5-speed

    Gear positions, 6-speed



  • Page 161

    Starting and driving

    159

    Automatic transmission
    WARNING
    • Depress the brake pedal when shifting
    the selector lever from P or N.
    • The car must be at a standstill before
    P, R or N is selected. You have to have
    your foot on the brake pedal to move
    the lever out of P. If the car is still
    moving when a drive position is subsequently selected, this could cause a
    crash or damage the automatic transmission.
    • Never park the car with the selector
    lever in a drive position, even if the
    parking brake is on.
    • If you want to leave the car with the
    engine running, move the selector
    lever to P or N and apply the parking
    brake.
    The automatic transmission has an electronic control module. The control module
    receives information including accelerator
    position and road speed. Using this and
    other information, it controls the hydraulic
    pressure of the transmission to ensure that
    gear changing is as smooth as possible.

    Indication of gear position on main
    instrument panel

    Selector lever
    1 Position for manual gear selection

    The remote control can only be removed
    when the selector lever is in the P position.

    The engine can only be started when the
    selector lever is in the P or N position.
    When the car is stationary, the engine must
    be idling when you move the selector lever
    from one position to another. If not, the
    transmission could be damaged.

    NOTICE
    After selecting a drive position, pause
    briefly to allow the gear to engage (the car
    starts to pull a little) before you accelerate.



  • Page 162

    160

    Starting and driving

    Selector lever detent

    Park Brake Shift Lock
    The transmission has a security function
    known as Park Brake Shift Lock. To move
    the gear selector lever out of the P or N position, the gear selector lever detent (catch)
    must be pressed in at the same time as the
    brake pedal is held depressed.
    The detent button on the selector lever has
    to be pressed in before the lever can be
    moved between certain positions.
    Temporary override of Park Brake Shift
    Lock, see page 162.

    Adaptive gear change patterns

    Thermal transmission protection

    The adaptive gear change pattern function
    adapts gear changing to the prevailing driving conditions. The transmission control
    module senses the engine load, vehicle
    speed and temperature of the transmission.
    A suitable gear change pattern is then
    selected automatically to avoid unnecessary gear changes and undesired increases
    in transmission temperature.
    Certain variants use a special change pattern for the first few minutes after a cold start
    so that the catalytic converter reaches its
    working temperature more quickly.

    The transmission has built-in protection
    against overheating. This protection is provided by the control module, which changes
    gear change patterns.
    1 If the temperature of the transmission
    fluid exceeds 257°F (125°C), the gear
    change pattern is changed.
    2 If the temperature of the transmission
    fluid exceeds 275°F (135°C), the gear
    change pattern is again changed.
    3 If the temperature of the transmission
    fluid exceeds 302°F (150°C), engine
    torque will be limited to 147 ft.lbs.
    (200 Nm).
    The following message is shown on the SID:
    Gearbox too hot.
    Make a safe stop.
    Open hood to cool down.
    If this message appears, stop the car as
    soon as it is safe to do so and allow the
    engine to idle until the message has gone
    out. The selector lever should be in
    position P.



  • Page 163

    Starting and driving
    Lock-up
    The transmission’s torque converter has a
    lock-up function. This can lock the torque
    converter, thus reducing the engine speed
    and fuel consumption.

    Kick-down
    When the accelerator is pressed down fully,
    a down change is made to optimize acceleration, e.g. for overtaking.
    Following this, the next higher gear will be
    selected at the optimum engine speed,
    unless you ease off the accelerator before
    reaching this.

    Driving in hilly country with a
    heavy load
    The transmission fluid can overheat when
    the gearbox is strained, for example, when
    driving with a trailer on hilly roads. To avoid
    the transmission fluid overheating, always
    drive with the selector lever in the D position. The adaptive gear change patterns are
    then active.
    High air temperatures or a faulty oil cooler
    can also cause the transmission fluid to
    overheat. Overheating reduces the service
    life of the fluid.

    WARNING
    Remember to use the braking effect of the
    engine (1st, 2nd or 3rd gear) when you
    are descending long or steep hills to
    spare the brakes.
    Overheating can cause the brakes to
    fade!

    161

    Towing
    Towing of cars with automatic transmission,
    see page 190.

    Descending hills
    If the speed of the car increases while
    descending a steep hill, despite the accelerator being released, the control module will
    change down. If you desire more powerful
    engine braking, manually select a lower
    gear (see page 164).



  • Page 164

    162

    Starting and driving

    Limp-home
    NOTICE

    Temporary override of Park Brake Shift
    Lock

    NOTICE

    Do not tow a trailer if limp-home mode is
    engaged.
    If the transmission malfunctions, the control
    module will activate limp-home mode. Drivability will be affected to varying degrees.
    The following message is shown on the SID:
    Gearbox malfunction.
    Limited performance.
    Contact Saab dealer.
    In this mode, only 2nd and 5th gears are
    available. Select 2nd gear when driving at
    low speeds and 5th gear at higher speeds.
    2nd gear must be selected manually. Select
    5th gear manually or move the selector
    lever to D (see page 164).

    Due to electrical problems it may not be
    possible to move the selector lever out of
    the park position, even if the ignition is
    ON. If for some reason the selector lever
    has to be moved out of the park position
    (i.e. to tow the car a short distance) do as
    described below.
    1 Apply the parking brake.
    2 Lift up the rubber mat in the storage
    compartment ahead of the selector
    lever.
    3 Under the floor of the storage compartment is a yellow plastic lever. Use a thin
    tool, such as a screwdriver, to press and
    hold the plastic lever while moving the
    selector lever from P to N.
    4 Remove the tool.
    5 Release the parking brake if the car is to
    be moved immediately, otherwise it
    should remain on.
    Check fuse 6 in the engine bay fuse box.
    If the fuse is OK the battery may be dead.
    Contact a Saab dealer to have the problem
    checked and rectified.

    Temporary override of Park Brake Shift
    Lock



  • Page 165

    Starting and driving
    Selector lever positions
    P
    The selector lever is locked and the transmission
    is mechanically blocked.
    The engine can be started.
    To move the selector lever out of the P position,
    depress the brake pedal and press in the detent
    (catch) on the selector lever.
    Only select the park position (P) when the car is
    stationary.
    R
    Only select the reverse position (R) when the car
    stationary. The detent release button must be
    pressed before the selector lever can be moved
    to R.
    Wait until reverse gear has engaged before
    touching the accelerator.

    163

    N
    You must press the brake pedal to move
    the selector lever from the neutral position (N).
    In neutral, the transmission is disengaged from the
    engine. The engine can be started but make sure
    the parking brake is on to prevent unexpected
    movement.
    To prevent the engine and transmission becoming
    hotter than necessary, select N for long stops with
    the engine running, e.g. when stuck in a traffic jam.
    At traffic lights, leave the selector lever in the drive
    position (D).
    D
    The drive position (D) is the normal one for forward
    driving. The transmission shifts automatically
    between all gears from 1st to 5th, the timing of
    which depends on factors such as the current
    accelerator position and the speed of the car.
    Pause for a moment before applying the accelerator, to allow the gears to engage.



  • Page 166

    164

    Starting and driving
    Sentronic, manual gear selection
    Move the selector lever to the manual position (M)
    (to the left position D) to select gear manually.
    Select a higher gear by pressing the selector lever
    forward or a lower gear by pulling it back. The
    selector lever will return to a position adjacent to
    the letter M after each gear change.
    An example of when you may wish to make
    manual gear changes is when overtaking, to
    enable you to remain in a low gear for an extended
    period of time.
    If the road surface is slippery, you may wish to start
    off in 2nd or 3rd to reduce the risk of wheel spin.
    When descending steep hills you should select a
    low gear to increase the braking effect of the
    engine and thus spare the brakes.

    Manual gear selections are displayed on the main instrument
    panel. The letter M and the current gear are displayed.
    When the selector lever is in the M position, as opposed to the D
    position, the engine is much more responsive to changes in accelerator position. The accelerator has a different feel.
    When changing down, the desired gear can be selected but the
    transmission will not change down until the engine speed is low
    enough to avoid overrevving.

    Steering wheel controls for manual gear
    selection (optional on certain variants)

    Certain variants also have steering wheel controls for manual gear
    selection. On these models, it is possible to change gear manually
    using the selector lever and the steering wheel controls. The steering wheel controls are only active when the selector lever is in the M
    position.
    Select a higher gear by pressing the right-hand button and a lower
    gear by pressing the left-hand button.



  • Page 167

    Starting and driving

    Cruise control

    To set the desired speed
    1 Slide the switch to ON.
    2 Move the thumbwheel up to SET/+ or
    SET/– when the car has reached the
    desired speed (above 15 mph (25 km/
    h)).

    (Cruise control system)

    WARNING
    Do not use the cruise control system in
    wet or icy conditions, in dense traffic or on
    winding roads.
    For safety reasons (brake system function), the brakes must be applied once
    when the engine has started, before the
    cruise control system can be activated.
    The following message is shown on the SID:
    Tap brakes lightly before
    using cruise control.

    165

    To increase the preset speed
    You can increase the speed in any of
    the following ways:

    Cruise control switches
    The system has the following functions:
    1 ON: engaged
    2 OFF: disengaged
    3 SET/+: sets the speed and increases
    the set speed
    4 SET/ –: sets the speed and decreases
    the set speed
    5 RESUME: re-engages the system at the
    set speed
    The CRUISE indicator light in the main
    instrument panel comes on when the switch
    is slid to ON. If you switch off the engine
    while the cruise control is ON, the system
    will be ON the next time the engine is
    started.

    • Accelerate to the desired speed. Jog the
    control to SET/+ or SET/–.
    • Jog the control to SET/+ to increase the
    speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h) (when cruise
    control already engaged).
    • Hold the control in the SET/+ position until
    the desired speed is reached (when
    cruise control already engaged).



  • Page 168

    166

    Starting and driving

    To reduce the preset speed

    To re-engage the system

    You can reduce speed in any of the following ways:

    Slide the switch to RESUME. The car will
    return to the previously set speed. Vehicle
    speed must exceed 15 mph (25 km/h).

    • Brake to the desired speed. Jog the
    control to SET/+ or SET/–.
    • Jog the control to SET/– to reduce the
    speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
    • Hold the control in the SET/– position until
    the desired speed is reached.

    Temporary increase in speed
    Accelerate, without shifting down (manual
    transmission), to exceed the set speed such
    as for overtaking. When you release the
    accelerator, the car will return to the set
    speed.

    To disengage the system
    temporarily
    Slide the switch to the left towards OFF, but
    only as far as to disengage the cruise control. Allow the switch to spring back.

    To disengage the system
    The system will be disengaged:
    • As soon as the brake or clutch pedal is
    depressed (cars with manual transmission).
    • When the switch is slid towards OFF. See
    also heading "To disengage the system
    temporarily".
    • When the switch is slid to OFF.
    • When the TCS/ESP system is operative.
    • When position N is selected (cars with
    automatic transmission).

    Braking
    It is good practice to try your brakes periodically while driving. This is particularly
    important when driving in heavy rain, on
    roads with a lot of surface water, in snow or
    in salty slush. In such conditions a slight
    delay in the braking effect may be noticed.
    To minimize this delay, dry the brakes by
    applying them lightly now and again. This
    should also be done after the car has been
    washed, and in extremely damp weather.
    To avoid the brakes becoming overheated,
    such as when negotiating long descents
    with a drop of several hundred yards (hundred metres), select a low gear to utilize the
    braking effect of the engine. If the car has
    automatic transmission, select 1st or 2nd
    gear.
    You can help to prolong the life of the brakes
    by thinking ahead and braking harder over
    short periods, rather than braking more
    moderately over long stretches.



  • Page 169

    Starting and driving
    WARNING
    • It is prudent to try your brakes from
    time to time, especially when driving in
    heavy rain, through water collected on
    the road, in snow, on a wet road
    surface or in salty slush. In such conditions, the brakes may take longer than
    normal to take effect. To rectify this,
    touch the brake pedal periodically to
    dry the brakes out.
    • The same applies after the car has
    been washed or when the weather is
    very humid.
    • Avoid parking the car with wet brakes.
    Before parking, and if the traffic conditions allow, brake quite heavily so that
    the brake discs and pads warm up and
    dry.
    • The brakes are power assisted and it
    should be kept in mind that the servo
    unit only provides the power assistance when the engine is running.
    • The brake pressure required when the
    engine is off, (e.g. when the car is
    being towed) is roughly four times the
    normal pedal force required. The
    pedal also feels hard and unresponsive.
    • Overheating can cause the brakes to
    fade!

    ABS brakes
    WARNING
    • The additional safety afforded by the
    ABS system is not designed to allow
    drivers to drive faster but to make
    normal driving safer.
    • To stop as quickly as possible, without
    loss of directional stability, whether
    the road surface is dry, wet or slippery,
    press the brake pedal down hard
    without letting up (do not pump the
    pedal), declutching simultaneously, and steer the car to safety.
    The Antilock Braking System (ABS) modulates the brake pressure to each wheel. The
    pressure is automatically reduced just
    before the wheel locks up and then
    increases again to the point at which the
    wheel is just about to lock. The wheel sensors send information to the brake system’s
    electronic control module for every 4 or so
    inches (decimetre) that the car rolls. This
    information is processed continuously to
    ensure that the adjustment of the brake
    pressure will be as exact as possible.
    Adjustment takes place up to 12 times per
    second.

    167

    The brake system provides Electronic
    Brakeforce Distribution (EBD). This distributes the brake pressure between the front
    and rear wheels, in such a way as to achieve
    optimum braking performance irrespective
    of the car’s speed or load.
    The ABS has a built-in diagnostics function
    which will switch on the ABS warning light
    if a fault is detected in the system (see
    page 78).
    The following message will appear on the
    SID (and corresponding symbol on main
    instrument unit) if a fault is detected:
    Antilock brake malfunction.
    Contact Saab dealer.



  • Page 170

    168

    Starting and driving

    The ABS system will not reduce the braking
    distance on loose gravel, snow or ice but,
    because the wheels cannot lock up, steering control is retained.
    When the ABS system operates you will feel
    the brake pedal pulsate and hear a ticking
    noise, both of which are perfectly normal.
    Apply the brake pedal with full force (you
    cannot press too hard), declutch and if necessary steer to safety.
    Do not release the brake pedal before the
    car has come to a halt or the danger is
    past!
    The above is critical.
    If the road is slippery, the ABS system will
    operate even when only light pressure is
    applied to the brake pedal. This means that
    the driver can brake gently to test the condition of the road and adapt their driving
    accordingly.
    It is well worth practising the use of ABS
    brakes on a skid pan or other suitable
    facility.

    Braking with ABS brakes.
    Indication that the system is operating:
    pulsating brake pedal and ticking noise

    Braking with ABS – evasive steering



  • Page 171

    Starting and driving

    Traction Control
    System (TCS)
    Anti-spin system

    WARNING
    When driving normally, the TCS system
    helps to improve the car’s directional
    stability. The TCS must not be regarded
    as a system to enable the driver to maintain higher speeds. The same precautions must be adopted as normal for safe
    cornering and driving on slippery roads.

    How the system works
    The Traction Control System (TCS) is
    designed to prevent wheelspin. This
    enables the car to achieve the best possible
    grip and, hence, maximum tractive effort,
    together with greater stability.
    The TCS uses information from the ABS
    wheel sensors to detect when the front (driving) wheels are rotating faster then the rear
    wheels. It then monitors whether one driving
    wheel is rotating faster than the other. If so,
    the faster wheel is retarded until both
    wheels are rotating at the same speed.

    If the two front wheels are rotating at the
    same speed but are turning faster than the
    rear wheels, the torque from the engine is
    reduced to eliminate the difference.
    The process continues until all the wheels
    are rotating at the same speed.
    The advantages of the TCS become most
    apparent when the cohesion between the
    front wheels and the road surface is so low
    that one or both of the wheels would lose
    their grip were the car not equipped with the
    TCS, e.g.:
    • When the car is pulling away or accelerating with the front wheels on different
    surfaces (e.g. one slippery and one dry),
    the TCS functions like an electronic differential lock, making sure that both wheels
    rotate at the same speed.
    • When the car is pulling away or accelerating on a slippery surface, in which case
    the system eliminates wheelspin. The
    system also functions when the car is
    reversing.
    • When cornering, if the inside front wheel
    rotates faster than the other wheels.

    169

    TCS OFF
    lights up under the speedometer if:
    • a fault has been detected and the system
    has therefore been switched off
    • there is a fault in the ABS system
    • the system has been switched off
    manually.



  • Page 172

    170

    Starting and driving
    Turning the TCS off
    The TCS is switched on automatically when
    the engine is started.
    You can switch the system off manually with

    TCS button

    TCS indicator
    When the remote control is turned to the ON
    position, the lamp is lit for about 4 seconds
    while the system performs self-diagnosis.
    The
    light under the speedometer
    comes on when the TCS is operative, that is
    when one of the wheels has lost its grip.
    The fact that the TCS is operative indicates
    that the limit for grip has been exceeded and
    that the driver must exercise greater care.

    the TCS button, whereupon the
    light
    under the speedometer will come on. The
    TCS cannot be switched off if the car is travelling faster than 35 mph (60 km/h).
    It may be necessary to switch off the system
    if the car has become bogged down, for
    instance. Press TCS to switch it on again.
    If a fault is detected in the ABS, the TCS will
    be switched off automatically.
    The following message is shown on the SID:
    Traction control failure.
    Contact Saab dealer.
    The cruise control system (if active) will
    automatically be disengaged if the TCS is
    operative.



  • Page 173

    Starting and driving

    Electronic Stability
    Program (ESP)

    How the ESP system works

    Anti-skid system
    (Certain variants)

    WARNING
    When driving normally, the ESP system
    helps to improve the car’s directional
    stability. The ESP must not be regarded
    as a system to enable the driver to maintain higher speeds. The same precautions must be adopted as normal for safe
    cornering and driving on slippery roads
    must be adopted.
    The Electronic Stability Program employs
    both the antilock braking system (ABS) and
    the traction control system (TCS). It is a
    system that helps the driver to stabilize the
    car in unusual circumstances that can otherwise be difficult to handle.

    171

    Illustration of how the system applies the
    brakes on one or several wheels to help
    avoid a skid

    The Electronic Stability Program can help to
    prevent the car from skidding by braking
    one or several wheels independently of the
    driver. The engine output is then also
    reduced to prevent the driving wheels from
    spinning. The car has sensors that measure
    wheel speed, yaw rate, lateral acceleration,
    steering wheel position and braking pressure. The values provided by these sensors
    are used to calculate the actual direction of
    the car, the intentions of the driver and
    whether the ESP should be engaged.
    If this direction does not agree with that
    intended by the driver, calculated from the
    steering wheel position, the ESP is
    engaged.
    The ESP improves the driver’s chances
    of retaining control over the car in critical
    situations.



  • Page 174

    172

    Starting and driving
    ESP indicator light
    When the remote control is turned to the ON
    position, the lamp is lit for about 4 seconds
    while the system performs self-diagnosis.
    The
    light under the speedometer
    comes on for a short period of time when the
    ESP system is operative.
    Operation of the ESP indicates reduced
    cohesion between the tires and the road,
    and that extra care should be taken by the
    driver.

    ESP button

    ESP OFF
    lights up under the speedometer if:
    • a fault has been detected and the system
    has therefore been switched off
    • the system has been switched off
    manually

    Turning ESP system off
    The system can be turned off manually with
    the ESP button, whereupon the
    light
    under the speedometer will come on. The
    car must be travelling slower than 35 mph
    (60 km/h). The TCS is also disengaged.
    The ESP is always engaged during braking,
    even if it has been switched off manually
    with the ESP button.

    If a fault is detected in the system, the
    following message will be displayed on
    the SID:
    Stability control failure.
    Contact Saab dealer.
    The cruise control system (if active) will
    automatically be disengaged if the ESP is
    operative.

    NOTICE
    Changes to the chassis, such as a
    change of wheels, shock absorbers or
    springs, could affect the function of the
    ESP system.
    Always consult your Saab dealer before
    changing any chassis components.



  • Page 175

    Starting and driving

    Parking brake

    173

    Parking

    WARNING

    WARNING

    • Always apply the parking brake when
    you park the car. If the car is to be
    left parked for a long time, refer to
    page 175.

    • Never leave children or pets unattended in the car. In warm, sunny
    weather, the temperature inside the
    car can reach 160–180°F (70–80°C).

    • Always apply the parking brake before
    removing the remote control.
    • Do not use the parking brake while
    driving.
    • Grasp the parking brake lever in such
    a way that no fingers get trapped when
    you release the parking brake.

    • Park where the vehicle will not create
    an obstruction or a hazard to other
    road users.

    The parking brake lever is situated between
    the front seats. The brake acts on the rear
    wheels. When the parking brake is applied,
    the
    indicator light on the main instrument panel will come on.
    To release the parking brake, lift the lever
    slightly, pull the release button on the underside of the lever and lower the lever.
    If conditions allow, it is best if the brake
    pedal is not depressed, or only depressed
    as little as necessary so as to stop the car
    from rolling, when the parking brake is
    applied.
    To facilitate releasing the parking brake,
    depress the brake pedal. This is especially
    appropriate if the car is standing on a hill.

    Correct hold
    If the parking brake is applied when the car
    starts off, the following message will appear
    on the SID:
    Release parking brake.

    • Do not park on dry grass or other
    combustible material. The catalytic
    converter gets very hot and could start
    a fire.
    • Apply the parking brake, remove the
    remote control and lock the car.



  • Page 176

    174

    Starting and driving

    NOTICE
    Empty the car yourself and bear in mind:
    • Never leave a mobile phone, camera,
    computer or similar object visible in
    the car.
    • Clothing, packages and bags attract
    thieves.
    • Do not leave small objects such as
    CDs, sunglasses and coins visible.
    • If possible, park in a well-lit, conspicuous parking space.
    • Thieves strike whenever and wherever they are given the opportunity.

    Parking on a hill
    When parking on a steep hill, turn the front
    wheels so that they will be blocked by the
    curb if the car should move.
    If the car is parked with one front wheel
    touching the curb, for example, you may
    need to turn the steering wheel slightly
    when you insert the remote control to allow
    the steering wheel lock to unlock.

    1 Downhill with curb.
    Turn the wheels toward
    the curb and edge the car
    forwards until the wheel
    lightly touches the curb.

    2 Uphill with curb. Turn
    the wheels away from the
    curb and edge the car
    backward until the wheel
    lightly touches the curb.

    3 Uphill or downhill without curb. Turn the wheel
    towards the edge of the
    road so that the car,
    should it move, will not
    roll towards the middle of
    the road.



  • Page 177

    Starting and driving
    Long-term parking
    If the car is not going to be used for some
    time, e.g. three to four months, the following
    steps are recommended:
    • Drain the washer fluid reservoir and
    hoses.
    • Wash and wax the car. Clean the rubber
    seals on the hood, trunk lid and doors,
    and lubricate them with glycerol
    (glycerine).
    • After washing the car, dry the brake discs
    to avoid corrosion by taking the car out on
    the road and applying the brakes a few
    times.
    • Fill the fuel tank to prevent condensation
    forming in it.
    • Top up the coolant and check the antifreeze before the onset of winter.

    • Park the car in a dry, covered and wellventilated building. Leave the parking
    brake OFF!
    • Convertible: If the car is stored, the soft
    top should be closed.
    • If necessary, use wheel chocks and leave
    the parking brake off.
    • Disconnect the negative (–) battery lead.
    If frost is likely to occur during the storage
    period, remove the battery and store it in
    a frost-free place.
    • If it is not possible to stand the car on axle
    stands, increase the tire pressure to
    43 psi (3 bar).
    Leave all the door windows open a crack
    and cover the car with a non-plastic
    tarpaulin – not one made of plastic which will
    not breath.

    175



  • Page 178

    176

    Starting and driving

    Saab Parking
    Assistance
    Saab Parking Assistance
    (option)

    WARNING
    Responsibility always lies with the driver
    when reversing.
    • The parking assistance system can
    facilitate parking and reversing.
    • Bear in mind that small objects, such
    as a child lying on the ground, and
    narrow objects cannot always be
    detected by the system.
    Saab Parking Assistance facilitates parking
    and reversing. There are four sensors in the
    rear bumper that detect objects up to 6 ft
    (1.8 meters) behind the car.
    If the car is heavily laden, the system may
    falsely indicate that there is an object within
    the detection range. This is since the sensors are angled towards the ground when
    the car is tail-heavy.

    Area monitored by the sensors seen from
    the side

    Area monitored by the sensors seen from
    above

    The system uses four sensors in the rear
    bumper. These emit ultrasound signals that
    bounce back to the sensors off any objects
    behind the car. The system, however,
    cannot always detect small or narrow
    objects, such as a post, since the surface
    area presented to the car is too small.

    The system is activated automatically when
    reverse is engaged or selected. Audible
    confirmation is given and the following text
    is shown on the SID:
    Parking assistance active
    If a warning message, such as the seatbelt
    reminder, is shown on the SID when reverse
    is engaged, the audible signals from the
    parking assistance system will not be heard
    since the warning message has priority.
    When the sensors detect an object within
    the monitored area, pulses of sound (- - - -)
    will be heard. The frequency of these pulses
    increases as the car comes closer to the
    object.



  • Page 179

    Starting and driving
    If you stop the car with reverse gear
    engaged, the sound pulse will stop after
    2 seconds. The sound pulses will return if
    you continue to reverse. If the car rolls forward while reverse is engaged, the system
    is silenced.
    When the distance to the object is less
    than 1 ft. (30 cm), a continuous tone will
    be heard.
    When an object is approximately 3 ft.
    (90 cm) from the car, the sound pulses
    change character markedly (frequency
    increases). A distance of about 3 ft. (90 cm)
    is suitable if you wish to load or unload the
    trunk.
    If the distance between an object and a
    corner sensor does not change for
    3 seconds, for example if you are reversing
    alongside a wall, the system will switch to
    monitoring straight back. The system indicates if the distance to the wall decreases
    again.
    If a trailer is hitched up and correctly connected to the trailer contact by the tow bar,
    the system is automatically deactivated.

    NOTICE
    The sensors must be kept clean to function well. Ice, snow and dirt can affect
    their sensitivity.
    Large quantities of snow or dirt covering
    the sensors can prevent the parking
    assistance system from detecting any
    objects.
    Do not spray the sensors with a pressure
    washer, as this can damage them.
    Reversing alongside a wall
    If the distance between an object and a
    corner sensor does not change for
    2 seconds, for example if you are reversing
    alongside a wall, the system will switch to
    monitoring straight back. The system indicates if the distance to the wall decreases
    again.

    177

    Cars with trailer hitch
    If the car has a trailer hitch and its wiring is
    correctly connected to the car’s electrical
    system, the Saab Parking Assistance automatically compensates for the protrusion of
    the tow bar.
    If a camper or trailer is hitched up and the
    trailer hitch wiring is correctly connected to
    the car’s electrics, the system is automatically deactivated.
    You can temporarily deactivate the Saab
    Parking Assistance as follows:
    • Engage reverse and press the CLEAR
    button on the SID control panel.
    The system will be reactivated the next time
    you engage reverse.



  • Page 180

    178

    Starting and driving

    Error messages
    If the system malfunctions, the following
    message will appear on the SID:
    Parking assistance
    malfunction.
    Contact Saab dealer.
    If the system is subject to interference, the
    following message will be shown on the
    SID:
    Parking assistance sensor
    interference.
    If this message appears, clean the sensors.
    The sensors are located in the black trim on
    the rear bumper

    The system can be switched off using
    Profiler.
    1 Press the CUSTOMIZE button to go to
    Profiler.
    2 Select Park Assistance using the
    INFO dial.
    3 Press in the INFO dial.
    4 Select SPA on or SPA off.
    5 Confirm this selection by pressing the
    INFO dial.
    Park Assistance
    SPA on
    SPA off

    Explanation of SPA on and SPA off.
    SPA on

    Saab Parking Assistance is activated
    automatically when reverse is
    engaged. The system warns of objects
    behind the car.
    If a trailer is hitched up and correctly
    connected to the trailer connector, the
    system will be deactivated automatically. You can also deactivate the system temporarily with the CLEAR button
    if reverse has been engaged and the
    system is active.
    SPA off

    Saab Parking Assistance deactivated.



  • Page 181

    Starting and driving

    Economical driving
    Factors affecting fuel
    consumption
    The fuel consumption of a car is greatly
    affected by driving conditions, climate, road
    conditions, speed, driving technique, etc.

    Breaking-in
    Fuel consumption may be somewhat
    higher during the break-in period (the
    first 3,000–4,000 miles (5,000–7,000 km)).

    Weather conditions
    Summer temperatures give better fuel
    economy than winter ones. The difference
    can be as much as about 10%. Consumption increases in cold weather because the
    engine takes longer to reach its normal
    operating temperature. The transmission
    and wheel bearings also take longer to
    warm up. Even distance affects consumption: short journeys of 3–5 miles (5–8 km)
    do not give the engine enough time to
    reach its optimum temperature. Wind conditions also have a marked effect on fuel
    consumption.

    How to read the diagram:
    If fuel consumption with the engine at
    normal temperature is 28 mpg (10 l/
    100 km), the actual fuel consumption
    3 miles (5 km) after the engine has started
    from cold will be:
    – 23.5 mpg (12 l/100 km) at outside temp.
    of 68°F (+20°C) (increase of 20%).
    – 17.7 mpg (16 l/100 km) at outside temp.
    of 32°F (0°C) (increase of 60%).
    – 14 mpg (20 l/100 km) at outside temp.
    of –4°F (–20°C) (increase of 100%).
    It is clear from the diagram that both distance driven and outside temperature have
    a significant impact on fuel consumption,
    after a cold start.
    If the car is normally driven on short journeys, 3–5 miles (5–8 km), for example to
    and from work, the average consumption
    will be 60–80% above the normal level.

    179

    Percentage increase in fuel consumption
    of engine starting from cold compared to
    engine at normal temperature.

    Driving techniques
    • To obtain the best running economy, with
    regard to fuel consumption and general
    wear, the car must be serviced regularly.
    • High speed, unnecessary acceleration,
    frequent braking and much changing
    down all give higher fuel consumption.
    • Frequent gear changing in traffic, starting
    in cold weather, the use of studded tires
    and roof racks, and towing a camper all
    increase fuel consumption.
    • Do not warm up the engine while the car
    is stationary.
    If idling, the engine will take much longer
    to reach its optimum temperature, and



  • Page 182

    180

    Starting and driving

    engine wear is at its greatest during this
    period. Drive off as soon as possible after
    starting the engine and avoid high engine
    speeds.
    • Drive as smoothly and thoughtfully as
    possible. Match your driving to the
    prevailing traffic conditions.
    • Driving in a low gear gives rise to higher
    fuel consumption than driving in a high
    gear because of the higher engine speed
    for any given road speed. Always shift up
    as soon as traffic conditions allow and
    drive in the highest gear as much as
    possible.
    • Check the tire pressure once a month.
    Incorrect tire pressure increases tire
    wear. It is preferable for the tire pressure
    to be slightly high than too low. Underpressure increases fuel consumption.

    • Check the fuel consumption regularly.
    Increased fuel consumption can indicate
    that something is wrong and that the car
    needs to be checked at a Saab dealer.
    Practical road tests have demonstrated that
    substantial savings in fuel consumption can
    be made if the above advice is followed.

    WARNING
    Never switch off the engine while driving
    as the effect of the brakes and power
    steering will be greatly reduced.

    Road conditions
    Wet roads increase fuel consumption, as do
    unpaved roads and driving in hilly country
    (the amount of fuel saved driving downhill is
    less than the additional amount required to
    climb the hill).

    Engine block heater
    (standard equipment in Canada, accessory in U.S.)
    The following are just some of the benefits
    to the car and the environment of using an
    engine block heater:





    Lower fuel consumption.
    Reduced wear on the engine.
    Inside of car warms up faster.
    Exhaust emissions substantially reduced
    over short runs.
    The engine heater is effective at outside
    temperatures up to 60–70°F (+15–+20°C).
    The warmer it is outside, the shorter the time
    the engine heater needs to be connected.
    Longer than 1.5 hours is unnecessary.
    If the car is equipped with a removable,
    electric cabin heater that is not in use, store
    this in the trunk.



  • Page 183

    Starting and driving

    Driving in cold weather
    In cold weather, special attention should be
    paid to the following:
    • Before driving off, make sure that the
    wiper blades have not frozen to the windshield.
    • Remove any snow from the heating
    system air intakes between the hood and
    the windshield.
    • If necessary, inject oil into the locks to
    prevent them from freezing. Use molybdenum-sulphide oil (MoS2). If the locks
    freeze, exercise care when unlocking the
    car (manual unlocking) to avoid breaking
    the key. Warm up the key or use a de-icer.
    • It is particularly important when the roads
    are slippery that the brakes and tires are
    in good condition.
    • For how to check the level of antifreeze in
    the engine coolant, see page 205.
    • Add gasoline anti-freeze when refueling
    several times before the onset of winter.
    This will prevent condensation water in
    the fuel tank from freezing and causing
    interruptions in the fuel supply. The likelihood of condensation is lowest when the
    fuel tank is full.
    If the car is parked outside and the
    temperature is below zero, gasoline antifreeze is of little use as it cannot remove
    water that has already frozen. Park the
    car in a warm place so that any ice that
    may have built up melts, then add gasoline anti-freeze when refueling.

    Condensation is caused by temperature
    fluctuations, either in the outside temperature alone or when the car is alternately
    parked outdoors and in a garage.
    • Convertible: Avoid operating the soft top
    at temperatures below 23°F (–5°C).
    • The car is equipped with tires designed to
    provide optimum grip on both wet and dry
    roads, although this has been achieved at
    the expense of somewhat reduced grip on
    snow and ice. For regular driving on snow
    and ice, we therefore recommend that
    winter tires be fitted. However, winter tires
    achieve this extra grip at the expense of
    grip on bare road surfaces.
    Winter tires, particularly studded tires, generally make driving safer on snow and ice.
    Acquaint yourself with the legal provisions governing the use of different
    types of winter tires and snow chains.
    Studded tires are not allowed in some
    countries. If winter tires are fitted, the same
    type must be fitted to all four wheels. Your
    Saab dealer will be pleased to advise you on
    the best tires for your car.

    181



  • Page 184

    182

    Starting and driving

    Remember that tires age: it may therefore
    be necessary to change winter tires before
    they reach the legal wear limit, as they gradually lose their friction properties with age.
    If you get into a front wheel skid and the car
    has a manual transmission, the best
    response is to freewheel, which means
    declutching so that the wheels neither drive
    nor brake, and to cautiously steer in the
    desired direction.
    If the car has automatic transmission, ease
    off the accelerator slightly and steer cautiously in the desired direction.
    If you get into a rear wheel skid, steer in the
    same direction as the movement of the rear
    of the car.

    Driving with tire chains
    Snow chains must only be fitted to the wheel
    and tire dimensions that Saab recommends
    in "Technical data" on page 267.
    Contact a Saab dealer regarding approved
    tire chains. See also page 240.

    WARNING
    • Do not drive at speeds above 30 mph
    (50 km/h) when tire chains are fitted.
    • Tire chains can reduce directional
    stability.
    • Do not fit tire chains to the car’s rear
    wheels.

    NOTICE
    • Check the links frequently for wear.
    • Check that the chains do not foul the
    wheel arch liner at full lock.
    • Refer to the "Technical data" section
    on page 267, for information on wheel
    and tire dimensions approved for the
    fitting of tire chains.



  • Page 185

    Starting and driving

    Driving in hot climates
    Always check the coolant level before starting a journey. When the engine is cold, the
    coolant must not lie above the KALT/COLD
    mark on the expansion tank (boundary
    between the upper and lower sections of the
    tank).
    At the end of a journey, allow the engine to
    idle for 2–3 minutes before switching it off.
    If the needle on the temperature gauge
    enters the red zone, the following message
    will be shown on the SID:
    Hot engine.
    Make a safe stop.
    Run engine on idle.
    1 Stop the car but do not switch off the
    engine. Do not remove the cap on the
    cooling system expansion tank, even if
    the tank is empty. The engine temperature should decrease. If the temperature
    continues to rise with the engine idling,
    the engine must be switched off.

    2 If the engine is idling and the needle on
    the temperature gauge falls, wait until a
    normal temperature is shown (about in
    the middle of the scale) before switching
    off the engine. If the coolant needs to be
    topped up, carefully unscrew the
    expansion tank cap.
    Fill as required with a mixture of 50 %
    antifreeze and 50 % clean water. Use an
    antifreeze approved by Saab.

    WARNING
    • Exercise care when opening the hood
    if the engine is overheated. Never
    remove the expansion tank cap
    completely when the engine is hot.
    • The cooling system is pressurized hot coolant and vapour can escape.
    These can cause injury to your eyes
    and burns. Open the cap slowly to
    release the pressure before removing
    it.
    3 Have the car’s cooling system checked
    at a Saab dealer.

    183



  • Page 186

    184

    Starting and driving

    Towing a trailer
    WARNING
    • Do not drive with a trailer on inclines
    steeper than 15 %. The load on the
    drive (front) wheels will be so low that
    the wheels can start to spin and
    prevent further progress.
    • In addition, the car’s parking brake
    may not always be sufficient to hold
    the car and trailer securely, as the
    wheels may start to slide.
    • Always apply the trailer’s parking
    brake when unhitching it. There is
    otherwise a risk of personal injury or
    damage to the bumper should the
    trailer start to roll.
    • When you hitch up the trailer be sure
    to attach its safety chains to the holes
    by the hitch.
    Make sure you are familiar with the legal
    requirements regarding speed limits for
    towing, maximum trailer weights, trailer
    braking requirements, and also any special driving licence provisions.

    Trailer hitch attachment
    Trailer hitch attachments are available as
    accessories. These are designed for a maximum trailer weight of 3500 lbs (1588 kg),
    with trailer brakes.
    An electrical connection for the towbar and
    an electrical unit are provided in the electrical centre on the left-hand side of the luggage compartment.
    The Saab genuine electrical socket enables
    a battery in the trailer on tow to be charged
    while driving. Also, if the car has SPA, this
    is deactivated automatically if a trailer is
    hitched up and correctly connected to the
    Saab genuine trailer socket.
    Saab recommendations:
    • Use a genuine Saab trailer hitch that is
    designed and tested for your Saab.
    • Contact your Saab dealer for advice on
    which trailer hitch is designed for your car.



  • Page 187

    Starting and driving
    NOTICE
    • Use only a genuine Saab trailer hitch,
    since other models can damage the
    car’s bodywork and electrical system.
    • Consult a Saab dealer for guidance on
    how to connect a trailer hitch.
    • Exercise care when driving on uneven
    roads or against the curb if the car is
    heavily laden. This particularly applies
    to cars with 17" wheels.

    Recommendations for cars with
    automatic transmission
    The following driving time limits are based
    on the capacity of the cooling system in hot
    weather, i.e. approximately 86°F (+30°C).
    Gradient of Max. trailer
    hill, %
    weight, lbs.
    (kg)
    6-8
    3330 (1500)
    9-11
    3080 (1400)
    12-14
    2645 (1200)
    max. 15
    2200 (1000)

    Time limit,
    minutes
    unlimited
    max. 15
    max. 15
    max. 15

    The following driving time limits are based
    on the capacity of the cooling system in hot
    weather, i.e. approximately 104°F (+40°C).
    Gradient of Max. trailer
    hill, %
    weight, lbs.
    (kg)
    6-8
    2200 (1000)
    9-11
    1760 (800)
    12-14
    1100 (500)
    max. 15
    880 (400)

    Time limit,
    minutes
    unlimited
    max. 15
    max. 15
    max. 15

    When negotiating long hills, bear the following important considerations in mind.
    Rises in coolant temperature are indicated
    by the temperature gauge in the main instrument panel.
    The following steps are taken in order as the
    temperature of the transmission increases:
    • Gear change pattern is altered
    • A/C compressor is switched off
    • Max. engine torque is reduced

    185

    The following message will be displayed on
    the SID if the transmission fluid becomes
    too hot:
    Gearbox too hot.
    Make a safe stop.
    Open hood to cool down.
    If this message appears, stop the car as
    soon as it is safe to do so and allow the
    engine to idle until the message has gone
    out. The selector lever should be in
    position P.
    When continuing your journey, manually
    select a low gear in which the engine speed
    is about 3,500 rpm until the incline eases
    (see page 164).

    WARNING
    Remember to use engine-braking (selector position M1, M2, or M3) to spare the
    brakes when you are driving on a long or
    steep downhill slope.
    Overheating can cause the brakes to
    fade!



  • Page 188

    186

    Starting and driving

    Recommendations for cars with
    manual transmission
    Rises in coolant temperature are indicated
    by the temperature gauge in the main instrument panel.
    When the needle is just outside the red
    zone, the A/C compressor will be switched
    off and, on certain engine variants, the maximum engine torque will be limited.
    When continuing your journey, select a low
    gear in which the engine speed is about
    3,500 rpm until the incline eases.

    WARNING
    Remember to use engine-braking (selector position 1, 2, or 3) to spare the brakes
    when you are driving on a long or steep
    downhill slope.
    Overheating can cause the brakes to
    fade!

    Trailer hitch load
    The weight distribution on the trailer makes
    a lot of difference to the handling properties
    of the car and trailer combination. With a
    two-wheel trailer, concentrate the load over
    the wheels and keep it as low as possible.
    The trailer should be loaded so that the load
    on the towball is 110–165 lbs. (50–75 kg).
    Note that this load must be included in the
    total load for the car. If this now exceeds the
    specified load capacity, the load in the trunk
    may have to be reduced by the corresponding amount.

    Distribution of load in trailer
    a Light
    b Moderate
    c Heavy



  • Page 189

    Starting and driving

    187

    Checks before driving

    Driving considerations

    Reversing

    Make sure that the car and trailer are in
    good working order. This is essential since
    towing a trailer increases the strain on the
    car.

    Always take extra care when towing a
    trailer, as the car’s handling will be different
    and its braking performance reduced. The
    trailer’s braking system and suspension
    also have a considerable effect on these
    characteristics. See also "Driving with a
    load" on page 189.
    Drive carefully:

    Get someone to help you keep an eye out
    behind the trailer as the door mirrors do not
    always provide sufficient rearward vision
    when reversing.

    • Check and if necessary adjust the tire
    pressure of the car and trailer.
    • Make sure all wheel bolts are properly
    tightened.
    • Make sure that the equipment joining the
    car and trailer is properly secured and
    adjusted.
    • Make sure the trailer’s electrical cable is
    properly connected and is not so long that
    it drags along the ground. Also, make
    sure the cable is not too short and risks
    breaking when turning a corner.
    • Check all bulbs.
    • Check the car and trailer brakes.
    • Make sure that all items on or in the
    camper or trailer are properly secured.
    • Make sure that the trailer’s jockey wheel
    is raised and locked.
    • Check the distribution of the load so that
    the car and trailer are well balanced.
    • Check that the rearview mirrors provide
    the best possible rearward vision.
    • Make sure the trailer’s safety cable is
    correctly attached.

    • descending hills
    • on uneven roads
    • over railway crossings
    • when meeting large vehicles
    If the car has automatic transmission, select
    gear M1 when ascending or descending
    steep hills.



  • Page 190

    188

    Starting and driving

    Driving with a roof rack
    load
    WARNING
    • A roof load will affect the car’s center
    of gravity and aerodynamics. Be
    aware of this when cornering and driving in crosswinds.
    • Adjust your speed to the prevailing
    conditions.
    • Due to higher aerodynamics drag, fuel
    economy may suffer when driving with
    a roof rack.
    The maximum permissible roof load is
    220 lbs. (100 kg). Note that the roof load
    must be included in the car’s maximum permissible payload and axle load.
    Strong, sturdy roof carriers designed specially for your car are available from your
    Saab dealer. Always secure roof loads
    securely.
    1 Open the four covers on the roof of the
    car.
    2 Insert a screw with washer into each roof
    carrier foot. Fit a seal onto each screw.
    3 The roof carriers are marked front and
    back.
    4 Bolt the roof carriers to the brackets in
    the roof.

    Mounting holes for roof carrier

    5 Check that the roof carriers are firmly
    mounted.



  • Page 191

    Starting and driving

    Driving with a load
    The handling characteristics are affected by
    how the car is loaded.

    NOTICE
    • Place the heaviest load as far forward
    and as low as possible in the trunk.
    • Secure the load to the lashing eyes
    (see page 143).
    • Heavy loads mean that the car’s
    center of gravity is further back. As a
    result, the car will sway more during
    evasive steering.
    • Never exceed the permissible load of
    the roof box, even if there is room for
    more.
    • Ensure that the tire pressure is correct
    – slight overinflation is preferable to
    underinflation.
    • The braking distance of a loaded car is
    always greater. Keep your distance
    from the vehicle in front.
    • Do not exceed the car’s permissible
    gross vehicle weight or axle load (see
    page 268).
    • Roof loads can negatively affect telecommunication.
    For further information on tires see
    page 234.

    Driving with the trunk lid
    open

    189

    Driving in deep water
    NOTICE

    WARNING
    Avoid driving with the trunk lid partly or
    fully open, since exhaust fumes can be
    drawn into the cabin.
    If you must drive with the trunk lid open,
    close all windows and the sunroof (if
    equipped) and set the cabin fan to its highest speed setting.

    Do not drive in puddles or water deeper
    than 7 in. (20 cm) and do not drive faster
    than 3–4 mph. Water can otherwise be
    sucked into the engine. The engine will be
    seriously damaged if water enters the
    intake system.



  • Page 192

    190

    Starting and driving

    Driving at night
    Bear in mind the following points, especially
    when driving at night:
    • Nighttime driving requires your full
    concentration
    • Do not rush. Count on your journey taking
    slightly longer.
    • The number of drivers under the influence
    of drugs is likely to be greater at night than
    during the day.
    • Do not stare at the headlights of oncoming vehicles.
    • Avoid driving at night if you have poor
    eyesight. Night vision deteriorates with
    age.
    • Keep your car’s headlights, windows and
    mirrors clean. Also, if you wear glasses,
    make sure they are clean.
    • Make sure you are well rested before
    starting a long journey. Take a break
    every other hour.
    • Only eat light meals. Heavy meals have a
    tendency to induce tiredness.
    • Wild animals prefer to move at dusk and
    dawn.
    • Check the headlight levelling setting (see
    page 96).

    Towing the car
    WARNING
    • Remember that the brake servo does
    not operate when the engine is off.
    Much greater pressure than normal
    will therefore be required to operate
    the brake pedal.
    • Nor does the steering servo operate
    when the engine is off. The steering
    will therefore be much heavier than
    usual.
    • The towing vehicle should always be
    heavier than the vehicle on tow.
    • Never allow passengers to ride in the
    car when it is on tow.
    • Always seek professional help if the
    car needs to be recovered.
    • The ignition switch must be in the ON
    position if the car is moved with the
    engine not running.
    • The steering wheel lock must be
    disengaged before towing the car.
    • The steering wheel lock disengages
    when the remote control is inserted
    into the ignition switch, if the battery
    has sufficient charge.

    Front towing eye
    WARNING
    • Make sure that the towing eye is
    screwed in tightly. It has a left-hand
    thread!
    • The towing eye is only designed for
    towing the car on roads. It must not
    be used to pull the car out of a ditch,
    for example.
    • Make sure that all bystanders keep a
    suitable distance, in case the towing
    eye or tow rope should snap. The
    towing eye or tow rope could catapult
    off and cause seriously injury.
    • Never drive with the towing eye fitted
    to the front bumper. Return it to its
    designated storage space.



  • Page 193

    Starting and driving

    Front towing eye fitted.
    The towing eye has a left-hand thread!
    The front towing eye is stowed by the spare
    wheel. On the left-hand side of the bumper
    is a cover concealing the attachment point
    (tapped hole) for the towing eye.
    1 Press the knob on the upper section of
    this cover at the same time as pulling out
    the lower edge.
    2 Screw in the towing eye. The towing
    eye has a left-hand thread!
    3 Insert the wheel wrench into the eye to
    tighten it properly.
    To refit the cover: Start by inserting the top
    edge of the cover. Then click in the lower
    edge, one corner at a time.

    Rear towing eye

    Rear towing eye
    The car has a permanent towing eye at the
    rear under the bumper.
    If the car is equipped with a towbar, this can
    be used instead of the towing eye.

    191

    Never use the towing eyes to pull the car
    unstuck.

    Towing the car
    NOTICE
    Never use the towing eyes to pull the car
    unstuck.
    Engage neutral (automatic transmission:
    move the selector lever to N). Turn on the
    parking lights.
    Drive carefully and do not exceed the
    speed limit for vehicles on tow.



  • Page 194

    192

    Starting and driving
    Transporting the car

    Always try to keep the towrope taut by
    gently applying the brake of the car on tow,
    as necessary. This will avoid the towrope
    being jerked violently.

    NOTICE
    If a car with sports (lowered) chassis is
    transported, for example on a flat bed
    truck, take extra care not to damage the
    spoiler and/or underbody.

    Cars with automatic transmission:

    NOTICE
    • The car must be towed front first.
    • If the car is to be towed with the front
    wheels off the ground, make sure the
    parking brake is off, as this acts on the
    rear wheels.
    Always observe the speed limit for vehicles
    on tow. Whatever the speed limit, the car
    must not be towed at speeds exceeding
    30 mph (50 km/h) nor for a distance of more
    than 30 miles (50 km). If the car needs to be
    transported over a longer distance, a tow
    truck or flatbed truck must be called out.
    The engine cannot be started by towing or
    pushing the car. In an emergency, the
    engine can be started as described under
    "Jump starting" on page 193.

    Attachment points for anchorage straps

    Vehicle recovery
    If the car has to be transported on a flatbed
    truck, or similar, it must be securely
    strapped down. There are attachment
    points for this purpose on the underside of
    the car. The attachment points are oblong
    hole that have been reinforced to cope with
    the stresses that arise during this type of
    transport.



  • Page 195

    Starting and driving

    Driving with the
    compact spare tire
    WARNING
    • Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). The
    tire can overheat affecting the car’s
    roadholding.
    • Tire pressure: refer to page 275.
    • The spare tire or punctured tire must
    be stowed under the trunk floor, and
    secured in place with the retaining nut.
    Observe the following when the compact
    spare tire is fitted:
    • The compact spare is light and easy to
    handle when changing a tire.
    • Do not drive further than necessary with
    the compact spare fitted - the maximum
    life of the tire is only just over 2,000 miles
    (approx. 3,500 km).
    • Refit the standard tire as soon as possible.

    Important considerations when driving with
    a compact spare tire:
    • The car’s ground clearance is reduced.
    • The car must not be driven with more than
    one compact spare tire at a time.
    • Avoid driving against the curb.
    • Do not use snow chains.
    • Do not fit the wheel cover - this would
    conceal the warning text.

    NOTICE
    To avoid damaging a alloy wheel of a
    punctured tire, this can be temporarily
    placed outside up in the spare wheel well
    but only while driving to the closest workshop.
    As a general rule, all heavy loads must be
    well secured in the trunk (see page 143).

    193

    Jump starting
    WARNING
    • When working on the battery, highly
    explosive gas can build up. A spark
    could ignite this gas that collects
    around the battery. Therefore, always
    avoid sparks and open flames in the
    vicinity of the battery.
    • The battery contains corrosive sulphuric acid. Always wear a face mask or
    goggles when working on the battery.
    • If battery acid gets into the eyes or
    splashes onto skin or clothing, wash
    the affected area liberally with water. If
    acid gets into the eyes or a large quantity makes contact with the skin, seek
    medical help.



  • Page 196

    194

    Starting and driving

    NOTICE

    NOTICE

    Ignoring these steps could result in costly
    damage to your vehicle that would not be
    covered by your warranty.

    If the other system is not a 12-volt system
    with a negative ground, both vehicles can
    be damaged.

    Trying to start your car by pushing or pulling it could damage your vehicle, even if
    you have a manual transmission. If you
    have an automatic transmission, your
    vehicle cannot be started by pushing or
    pulling it.
    It is essential when a donor battery is to be
    used to jump start the car that the jump
    leads be connected correctly to prevent
    arcing.
    To jump start your vehicle:
    1 Check the other vehicle. It must have a
    12-volt battery with a negative ground
    system.

    2 Get the vehicles close enough so the
    jumper cables can reach, but be sure the
    vehicles are not touching each other. If
    a poor connection on the negative
    jumper cable should exist, it is possible
    for damage to be caused to electrical
    systems/components of either vehicle
    should inadvertent contact be made.
    You would not be able to start your car
    and bad grounding could damage the
    electrical systems.

    WARNING
    You could be injured if the vehicles roll.
    Set the parking brake firmly on each vehicle. Put an automatic transmission in P
    (Park) or a manual transmission in
    Neutral.
    3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.
    Turn off lights that are not needed, and
    radios. This will avoid sparks and help
    save both batteries and it could save
    your radio.

    Jump starting

    NOTICE
    If you leave your radio on, it could be
    badly damaged. The repairs would not be
    covered by your warranty.
    4 Open the hood and locate the battery.
    Find the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals on the battery.

    WARNING
    An electric fan can start up even when the
    engine is not running and can injure you.
    Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
    any underhood electric fan.



  • Page 197

    Starting and driving
    WARNING
    Using a match or flame of any kind near a
    battery can cause battery gas to explode.
    You can suffer burns or be blinded. Use a
    flashlight if you need more light.
    Be sure the electrolyte in the battery is not
    frozen. Discharged batteries will freeze.
    When connecting jumper cables to a
    frozen battery, gas from the chemical
    reaction inside the battery can build up
    under the ice and cause an explosion.
    Battery fluid contains acid that can burn
    you. Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin,
    flush the area with water and get medical
    help immediately.
    5 Check that the jumper cables do not
    have loose or missing insulation. If they
    do, you could get a shock and also the
    vehicles could be damaged.
    Before you connect the cables, here are
    some basic things you should know.
    Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and
    negative (–) will go to negative (–). Do
    not connect (+) to (–) or you will get a
    short that could injure you or would
    damage the battery and maybe other
    parts as well.
    6 Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
    positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with
    the discharged battery.

    7 Do not let the other end touch metal.
    Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of
    the good battery. Use a remote positive
    (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
    8 Now connect the negative (–) cable to
    the good battery’s negative terminal.
    9 Attach the cable to the discharged
    battery’s negative terminal.
    10 Start the vehicle with the good battery
    and run the engine for a while.
    11 Try to start the vehicle with the
    discharged battery. If it does not start
    after a few tries, it probably needs
    service.
    Note. If the current in the low battery is
    too low it might be necessary to wait
    several minutes with the cables
    connected before you can start the
    engine with the low battery.
    12 Remove the cables in reverse order to
    prevent electrical shorting. Take care
    that they do not touch each other or any
    other metal.

    195

    Using a battery charger/starter
    unit
    To avoid damaging the car’s electrical
    system and electronics, the following rules
    must be followed when charging the battery
    or jump starting the car.
    • If the charger or starter unit can be set to
    different voltages (6V/12V/18V/24V), 12V
    must be selected.
    • Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
    supplied with the charger or starter unit.
    • No other apparatus that are grounded or
    connected to the mains must be
    connected to the car during charging or
    jump starting.
    • The charger or starter unit must under no
    conditions produce a voltage greater
    than:
    • 16V continuous
    • 18V for 60 min.
    If you are unsure about the charge rating of
    the unit, disconnect the battery clamp from
    the positive terminal before connecting the
    unit to the battery.



  • Page 198

    196

    Starting and driving

    For long trips
    Before starting off on a long journey, it is
    advisable to have your car inspected by
    your Saab dealer.
    Obtain a few important items to take along
    on your journey, such as spare bulbs, wiper
    blades, fuses, a drive belt (poly-V-belt) and
    the like.
    You can check some points yourself beforehand:
    • Check that no oil or fuel leaks out of the
    engine or gearbox/transmission.
    • Check the coolant and power steering
    fluid levels. Check also for leaks.
    • Inspect the drive belt (poly-V-belt) and
    replace if it shows any signs of wear.
    • Check the battery charge.
    • Check the tires for tread pattern and air
    pressure, including the compact spare
    tire.
    • Take an extra remote control and keep it
    separate.
    • Check the brakes.
    • Check all bulbs.
    • Check for the presence of the tool kit and
    jack in the car.



  • Page 199

    Car care

    197

    Car care
    Hood ________________
    Engine ______________
    Engine bay ___________
    Engine oil ____________
    Air filter______________
    Transmission fluid ____
    Coolant ______________
    Brake/clutch fluid and
    brake pads__________
    Power steering________
    Battery ______________
    Drive belt ____________
    Wipers and washers ___
    Wiper blades _________
    Changing bulbs _______

    198
    199
    201
    202
    204
    204
    205
    206
    207
    208
    210
    211
    211
    213

    Fuses ________________
    Tires _________________
    Compact spare ________
    Changing a tire ________
    Safety belts ___________
    Upholstery and trim ____
    Textile carpeting _______
    Engine bay____________
    Washing ______________
    Waxing and polishing ___
    Touching up the paint___
    Anti-corrosion treatment
    Recovery and/or
    recycling of automotive
    materials ____________
    Air conditioning (A/C) ___

    227
    234
    246
    248
    251
    251
    252
    252
    252
    253
    253
    254

    256
    257



  • Page 200

    198

    Car care

    Hood
    The hood release handle is located on the
    left under the instrument panel. Open the
    hood in the following way:
    1 Pull the release handle.
    2 The hood moves to the half-locked position and is stopped by a safety catch at
    the front edge.
    3 Press the lever of the catch upwards and
    raise the hood.
    When you close the hood you should drop it
    from a height of about 12 inches (30 cm),
    without slamming it.

    Hood release handle

    Hood release catch plate



  • Page 201

    Car care

    Engine
    The engine is a transverse four-cylinder inline engine with twin overhead camshafts
    and 16 valves.
    The engine is equipped with two balanceshafts that reduce engine vibrations to a
    minimum.
    The balance shafts are chain-driven and
    rotate at twice the speed of the crankshaft.
    They produce forces and torques that are
    opposed to those generated by the pistons
    and connecting rods. The effect occurs
    twice in each revolution of the engine, counteracting the vibration from its moving parts,
    and at the same time reducing unwanted
    engine noise.
    The gearbox, located on the right (viewed
    from the front), is integrated with the engine.

    Engine families
    Saab cars imported into the United States
    and Canada meet all applicable emission
    control standards. The engine family and
    appropriate tune-up specifications are identified on a label affixed to the left front inner
    fender.
    These engine families meet applicable EPA
    Federal Standards, California State Standards and Canadian Federal Standards and
    are equipped with the following systems:





    sequential multiport fuel injection system
    three way catalytic converter
    crankcase emissions control system
    evaporative emission system.

    199

    Emission control
    systems
    The systems for controlling emissions to the
    atmosphere require regular checking and
    adjustment at the intervals specified in the
    service program.
    In addition to meeting the exhaust emission
    regulations and thereby helping to keep the
    environment clean, a correctly tuned engine
    will also give maximum fuel economy.

    WARNING
    Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
    and certain vehicle components contain
    or emit chemicals known to the State of
    California to cause cancer and birth
    defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles
    and certain products of component wear
    contain or emit chemicals known to the
    State of California to cause cancer and
    birth defects or other reproductive harm.



  • Page 202

    200

    Car care

    Saab Trionic engine
    management system
    The Saab Trionic engine management
    system is a unique Saab development that
    combines sequential multiport fuel injection,
    electronic distributorless ignition and turbocharger boost pressure control into one system.
    The Trionic engine control module (ECM)
    monitors many different engine parameters
    such as:
    • Intake manifold pressure.
    • Intake air temperature.
    • Crankshaft position.
    • Engine coolant temperature.
    • Throttle position.
    • The oxygen content of the exhaust gases.
    The ECM receives information regarding
    engine knocking from a sophisticated feedback function in the ignition discharge unit.
    By processing all of this information, the Trionic system can control fuel injector opening duration, ignition timing and turbocharger boost pressure to provide excellent
    engine performance while maintaining low
    emissions and fuel consumption.

    NOTICE
    The Trionic engine management system
    continuously monitors the operation of
    these systems and has on-board diagnostic capabilities (OBD II). If the Engine
    malfunction (CHECK ENGINE) light in
    the main instrument illuminates, the
    Trionic ECM has detected a problem. The
    car will continue to operate, but performance may be diminished. You should
    have your car checked by a Saab dealer
    as soon as possible.

    ORVR (Onboard Refueling Vapor
    Recovery)
    All hydrocarbons formed when refueling will
    be recovered by the car and not released
    into the atmosphere. The hydrocarbons are
    absorbed in an evaporative emission canister. When the engine is subsequently
    started, the evaporative emission canister is
    gradually purged as air is sucked into it
    through a shut-off valve. The hydrocarbon/air mixture passes through the evap
    canister purge valve and into the engine
    where it is burned. “Refueling”, see
    page 153.
    When refueling, make sure you screw the
    filler cap on and keep turning until it has
    clicked 3 times.



  • Page 203

    Car care

    Engine bay
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8

    Oil filler cap
    Coolant reservoir
    Brake and clutch fluid reservoir
    Battery
    Fuse box
    Washer-fluid reservoir
    Power-steering fluid reservoir
    Engine-oil dipstick

    201



  • Page 204

    202

    Car care

    Engine oil

    During the Break-in Period (approx.
    3,000 miles or 5,000 km) and when driving
    at high speeds or with a trailer, the oil
    consumption may be higher than normal.

    Checking the oil level
    Check the engine oil level regularly.
    1 Park the car on a level ground.
    2 Switch off the engine and wait for
    2–5 minutes. The engine should be at
    normal operating temperature.
    3 Take the dipstick out and wipe it off with
    a clean rag before carrying out the
    check.
    The level must not be below the MIN mark
    on the dipstick, but nor should it be above
    the MAX mark. Excess engine oil could
    result in abnormal oil consumption.
    The distance between the MIN and MAX
    marks is equivalent to 1.0 qt (1.0 l).

    NOTICE
    Too high oil level can damage the engine.
    Saab 9-3 Aero: The engine oil level is
    checked each time the engine is started. If
    the oil level is low, the following message
    appears on the SID:
    Low engine oil level.
    Fill oil now.

    NOTICE
    Change of engine oil and oil filter may be
    required more frequently if the car is
    being used under certain conditions, see
    page 263.

    Oil filler cap and dipstick

    Recommended oil grade, see page 270.
    Make sure you screw on the oil filler cap
    properly after topping up the oil to avoid running problems.
    It is normal for an engine to consume a certain amount of oil. It is therefore often necessary to top up the oil between services.
    Check the engine oil level regularly.



  • Page 205

    Car care
    Changing engine oil
    WARNING
    • Prolonged and repeated exposure of
    the skin to engine oil can cause serious skin disorders. Avoid prolonged
    skin contact whenever possible.
    • Used engine oil contains chemicals
    that have caused cancer in laboratory
    animals. Always protect your skin by
    washing thoroughly with soap and
    water.
    • Keep oil out of reach of children.
    • Do not touch the turbocharger or
    exhaust manifold. These get very hot
    when the engine has been running.
    • Do not spill oil on hot parts of the
    engine as this could cause a fire. Used
    engine oil is particularly flammable.
    • Protect the environment. Do not
    dispose of oil into the ground or down
    a drain. Dispose of all used oil and
    oil filters at an appropriate disposal
    facility.

    Engine oil and oil filter should be changed
    according to the service program.
    For oil volumes and grades, refer to “Technical data”.
    The oil should be drained when the engine
    is warm. The car must stand on level
    ground.
    1 Unscrew the drain plug in the bottom of
    the sump and leave the oil to drain into
    a suitable receptacle for at least
    10 minutes. Take care, as the oil may be
    hot.
    2 Refit the drain plug with a new washer.
    3 Change the oil filter once the engine oil
    has drained (see page 204).
    4 Fill with new oil.
    Run the engine to normal temperature and
    check the oil level.

    Drain plug

    203



  • Page 206

    204

    Car care

    Air filter

    Changing filter
    1 Unscrew the oil filter cap.
    • Lift the cap slightly and carefully pry
    apart the cap and the filter housing.
    • Remove the filter cap.
    2 Remove the filter. Have paper towelling
    or a rag at hand to catch the oil that
    escapes from the filter.
    3 Fit a new filter.
    4 Fit a new O-ring in the cap. Apply a small
    amount of new engine oil to the O-ring.
    5 Screw on the cap. The correct tightening
    torque is 25 Nm (18 lbf. ft).

    WARNING
    To ensure reliable operation, only use
    an air filter recommended by Saab
    Automobile AB.

    Transmission fluid
    Manual transmission
    Oil filter

    Check and top up the oil in accordance with
    the service program.

    Automatic transmission
    Check and top up the oil in accordance with
    the service program.



  • Page 207

    Car care

    Coolant

    The expansion tank is transparent to facilitate checking the coolant level.
    When the engine is cold, the coolant must
    not lie above the KALT/COLD mark on the
    expansion tank (boundary between the
    upper and lower sections of the tank, see
    illustration).
    Top up with a mixture of equal parts of
    Saab-approved antifreeze and clean water.
    If the expansion tank is empty when coolant
    is added, run the engine until warm so that
    the thermostat opens. Top up the tank
    again, as necessary.

    WARNING
    • Proceed with caution if the radiator is
    boiling when you open the hood.
    Never remove the expansion-tank
    filler cap when the radiator is boiling.
    • The cooling system is pressurized –
    hot coolant and vapor can escape
    when the filler cap is released. These
    can cause injury to your eyes and
    burns. Loosen the cap carefully, and
    let the engine cool before removing
    the cap.
    • Exercise care when adding coolant.
    Coolant on hot surfaces constitutes a
    fire risk.
    If the coolant level drops too low, the following message appears on the SID:
    Coolant level low.
    Refill.

    205

    Coolant expansion tank
    The properties of the coolant are retained
    for the entire service life of the car. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the coolant.
    The coolant contains 45 % antifreeze and
    anti-corrosion fluid. This ratio gives the best
    cooling effect. Lower concentrations should
    be avoided, in view of the corrosion risk.
    Other brands of antifreeze can damage the
    engine and cooling system.



  • Page 208

    206

    Car care

    NOTICE
    If the cooling system needs topping up,
    mix the antifreeze with the appropriate
    quantity of drinking water or distilled
    water before adding it to the system.
    If undiluted antifreeze is added, the
    engine could still freeze and be damaged.
    This is because the antifreeze will not mix
    properly with the coolant before the thermostat has opened to allow full circulation.
    Note:
    If incorrect coolant is used or added, the lifetime properties will be affected. Even if the
    coolant is flushed from the system and
    replaced with life-time coolant, life-time
    properties are no longer retained and the
    coolant must then be drained and replaced
    at regular intervals.

    Brake/clutch fluid and
    brake pads
    WARNING
    Brake fluid deteriorates as it becomes
    old. Because it is hygroscopic, it absorbs
    water from the air and, in time, could allow
    vapor to form in the brake system, thus
    reducing its performance. It is therefore
    important that brake fluid be changed
    regularly, as specified in the service
    program.

    Checking
    Brake fluid should be changed according to
    the service program. Refer to the Warranty
    and Service Book.
    The brake and clutch fluid reservoir is transparent to facilitate checking of the fluid level.
    The fluid level should lie between the MAX
    and MIN marks.
    If the level drops too low, the following message appears on the SID:
    Brake fluid level low.
    Make a safe stop.
    Contact Saab dealer.
    Top up as necessary with DOT 4 brake
    fluid. Do not use DOT 5 fluid.
    Use only new brake fluid from a sealed
    container.

    Brake fluid reservoir
    The brake fluid level will fall somewhat as
    the brake pads wear. The MAX level in the
    reservoir corresponds to the amount of
    brake fluid required with new brake pads. If
    the fall in fluid level is moderate, due to
    normal brake pad wear, topping up is not
    necessary.
    If the brake fluid should require changing, this must be carried out at a Saab
    dealer.



  • Page 209

    Car care
    The foot brake and parking brake are selfadjusting.
    It is not possible to detect, through abnormal
    pedal or parking brake lever travel, whether
    the brake pads are worn and need replacing. It is therefore essential that brake pads
    be checked regularly, as specified in the
    service program.

    NOTICE
    Avoid spilling brake fluid onto paintwork,
    since it can cause the paint to bubble and
    lift. If any brake fluid is spilled, the area
    should be flushed with large quantities of
    water as quickly as possible.
    Brake pads should only be changed at a
    Saab dealer. To ensure optimum brake
    performance, use only Saab genuine
    brake pads.

    Power steering
    WARNING
    Power steering fluid on hot engine
    components constitutes a fire risk.
    Check the level of the power steering fluid in
    the reservoir regularly, in accordance with
    the service program.
    The wheels should point directly forwards
    during this check.
    Clean round the cap before unscrewing it.
    Wipe the dipstick. To check the level, screw
    down the cap completely and then remove
    it again.
    The oil level should lie between the MAX
    and MIN marks when the oil temperature is
    about 68°F (+20°C). If the oil is colder, the
    level will be lower, and at a higher temperatures the level will be higher.
    Top up with “CHF 11S power steering fluid”.

    Power steering fluid reservoir

    207



  • Page 210

    208

    Car care

    Battery

    If frequent short journeys are made, the
    battery may need extra charging. This can
    be done with a battery charger or by taking
    the car for a long run.
    If the battery is not being charged while the
    engine is running, the following message
    will appear on the SID:

    WARNING
    • When working on the battery, highly
    explosive gas can build up. A spark
    could ignite this gas that collects
    around the battery.
    Therefore, always avoid sparks and
    open flames in the vicinity of the
    battery.
    • The battery contains corrosive sulphuric acid. Always wear a face mask or
    goggles when working on the battery.
    • If battery acid gets into the eyes or
    splashes onto skin or clothing, wash
    the affected area liberally with water.
    If acid gets into the eyes or a large
    quantity makes contact with the skin,
    seek medical help.
    • Battery posts, terminals and related
    accessories contain lead and lead
    compounds. Wash your hands after
    handling

    Battery not charging.
    Make a safe stop.
    Contact Saab dealer.

    Checking the battery electrolyte level.
    Level correct if level indicator dark.
    Battery should be changed if indicator is
    light
    Check the charge state and electrolyte level
    of the battery regularly.

    NOTICE
    A discharged battery can freeze and fracture. Batteries should therefore always be
    stored away from sub-zero temperatures.

    Check the drive belt (see page 210). If the
    belt is damaged, the engine may overheat,
    the battery may not be charged and the A/C
    compressor may not work.



  • Page 211

    Car care
    Always connect the positive (red) cable to
    the battery’s positive (+) terminal, and the
    negative (black) cable to the negative (-)
    terminal of the battery. Always disconnect
    both battery leads when boost charging the
    battery.

    NOTICE
    • If boost charging never use anything
    but a 12-volt charger, see page 193.
    • Do not connect the battery terminals, + and –, incorrectly.
    • Serious damage can occur to the car’s
    electrical system if a battery or alternator lead is disconnected while the
    engine is running.
    • Exercise special care when removing
    and fitting the positive (+) cable so as
    not to damage the battery disconnect
    switch.
    A car with standard equipment specifications and a fully charged battery can be left
    for up to 40 days and still have a sufficient
    charge for starting. If extra equipment is fitted, such as a mobile phone, the charge
    may only be sufficient for about 15 days.

    Turn the two retainers a quarter turn to
    unlock the battery cover.

    Battery bracket

    209



  • Page 212

    210

    Car care

    Drive belt
    WARNING
    • Keep hands and clothing clear of drive
    belts when engine is running.
    • Always stop the engine before
    inspecting the drive belt.
    • The radiator fan is electric and can
    start even when the engine is
    switched off.

    Drive belt

    NOTICE
    Serious damage can be done to the car’s
    electrical system if an alternator lead is
    disconnected while the engine is running.
    The alternator is situated on the right-hand
    side of the engine. It is driven by a
    poly-V-belt from the crankshaft pulley.

    A slipping or broken poly-V-belt can
    result in:
    • no charge to the battery
    • no A/C compressor function.
    The belt tension is critical and is adjusted
    automatically by the belt tensioner.



  • Page 213

    Car care

    211

    Wipers and washers
    Wiper blades
    Check and clean all wiper blades regularly.
    If poor wiper performance is experienced,
    clean the windshield with washer fluid. This
    is particularly important if the car has been
    through an automatic car wash, as these
    sometimes leave a wax coating on the windshield.
    If wiper performance is still unsatisfactory,
    fit new blades.

    Change of wiper blades

    To fit new blades:
    1 Press in the catch (1).
    2 Pull the complete wiper blade downwards so that it comes away from the
    wiper arm. Slide the entire blade out
    from the arm.

    Washer fluid reservoir

    Washers
    WARNING
    Take care not to spill washer fluid concentrate onto hot surfaces. Washer fluid
    concentrate can contain flammable ingredients such as alcohol.
    The reservoir capacity is approx. 6 qts.
    (5.8 litres).



  • Page 214

    212

    Car care

    When the washer fluid level drops below
    1 quart (1 litre), the headlight washers (if
    equipped) are deactivated. This is in order
    to prioritize the windshield. The following
    message is displayed on the SID:
    Washer fluid level low.
    Refill.
    Headlight washers are only available on
    certain markets.
    Fill with a mixture of washer fluid and water
    as recommended by the table on
    the packaging to reduce the risk of freezing
    and to ensure effective cleaning (see also
    page 100).
    To prevent the smell of washer fluid from
    entering the car, recirculation can be activated automatically while the windshield is
    washed. The recirculation symbol will however not light up. This function is optional;
    contact a Saab dealer.

    Washer jets
    The washer jets, which are adjustable, can
    be cleaned with a pin if necessary.



  • Page 215

    Car care

    Changing bulbs
    WARNING
    Before changing a bulb in the engine bay, switch off the engine
    to avoid the danger of fingers and hands being injured by moving
    parts.
    The radiator fan can cut in even when the engine is switched off.

    213

    If a stop light bulb fails
    If a stop light bulb fails, the adjacent taillight will act as a stop light to
    ensure traffic safety. Change the broken bulb when possible.
    All rear light bulbs are of the same type and rated 21 W, with the
    exception of the license plate lighting which is rated 5 W.
    Wrong bulb fitted
    If a dipped or main beam bulb of too high a rating is fitted, a bulb
    failure message will be shown on the SID (a too high wattage bulb
    can damage the reflector).
    If the following message is displayed but the bulb shines, it is most
    likely that an incorrect bulb has been fitted.

    NOTICE
    Switch off the ignition before changing a bulb, to avoid possible
    short-circuiting.

    Autochecking of lights
    The bulbs that are most important from the point of view of traffic
    safety are monitored by the car’s electrical system. If one of these
    bulbs should fail, a message will be displayed on the SID.
    Example of SID message:
    Left low beam failure.
    The following bulbs are not checked: parking lights, front fog lights,
    reversing lights, license plate lighting, side marker lights and side
    direction indicators.

    Right high beam failure.
    Note:
    When changing bulbs, fit the same type of bulb (e.g. Long-Life)
    as that removed.

    Headlight aiming, page 258.



  • Page 216

    214

    Car care

    Xenon headlight, dipped beam
    (certain variants only)

    WARNING
    Xenon headlights are high tension. All work on xenon headlights,
    including changing bulbs, must be carried out by dealer personnel.
    Xenon headlights produce roughly two times as much light as halogen bulbs and have a significantly longer service life.
    The lamp units consist of a gas discharge lamp containing xenon.
    When the lights are switched on a very high voltage activates the
    xenon gas. The lamps soon reach full intensity.
    Cars with xenon headlights have automatic levelling. The levelling
    system is comprised of two sensors, one on the front suspension
    and one on the rear suspension, and a control unit by the engine bay
    fuse box. Headlight alignment is adjusted automatically to the car’s
    load to prevent dazzling drivers in oncoming traffic.
    If a fault is detected in the system, the following message will be displayed on the SID:
    Headlight levelling
    malfunction.
    Contact Saab dealer.

    Contact a Saab dealer to have a xenon
    headlight changed



  • Page 217

    Car care

    Retainers on the battery cover

    Low beam, halogen
    Left-hand side
    1 Lift aside the hose running along the side of the battery cover.
    2 Release the two retainers (a quarter of a turn counterclockwise)
    in the leading edge of the cover and remove the cover.
    3 Pull up the washer fluid filler pipe.
    4 Remove the air pipe from the front edge of the battery box.
    5 Pull up the fuse panel in front of the battery (certain variants),
    see page 233.
    Both sides
    1 Remove the cover from the rear of the headlight.
    2 Twist the bulb holder counterclockwise and withdraw the holder
    from the reflector.
    3 Change the bulb without touching the glass with your fingers.
    Insert the bulb holder into the reflector and twist it clockwise until
    it locks.

    215

    Changing the low beam bulb
    4 Refit the cover over the rear of the headlight.
    Left-hand side
    5 Refit the air pipe to the front of the battery box.
    6 Refit the washer fluid filler pipe.
    7 Refit the battery cover.

    NOTICE
    Do not fit bulbs with a higher rating than 55 W as this could
    damage the headlight reflector. Furthermore, the car’s wiring is
    not designed to cope with higher wattages.



  • Page 218

    216

    Car care

    Retainers on the battery cover

    High beam, halogen
    Left-hand side
    1 Lift aside the hose running along the side of the battery cover.
    2 Release the two retainers (a quarter of a turn counterclockwise)
    in the leading edge of the cover and remove the cover.
    3 Pull up the washer fluid filler pipe.
    4 Remove the air pipe from the front edge of the battery box.
    5 Pull up the fuse panel in front of the battery (certain variants),
    see page 233.
    Both sides
    1 Remove the cover from the rear of the headlight.
    2 Twist the bulb holder counterclockwise and withdraw the holder
    from the reflector.
    3 Change the bulb without touching the glass with your fingers.
    Insert the bulb holder into the reflector and twist it clockwise until
    it locks.

    Changing the high beam bulb
    4 Refit the cover over the rear of the headlight.
    Left-hand side
    5 Refit the air pipe to the front of the battery box.
    6 Refit the washer fluid filler pipe.
    7 Refit the battery cover.

    NOTICE
    Do not fit bulbs with a higher rating than 55 W as this could
    damage the headlight reflector. Furthermore, the car’s wiring is
    not designed to cope with higher wattages.



  • Page 219

    Car care

    217

    Both sides:
    1 Remove the cover from the rear of the
    headlight.
    2 Withdraw the bulb holder from the lamp
    unit.
    3 Fit the new bulb.
    4 Refit the cover over the rear of the headlight.

    Parking lights
    The parking light bulb is located in the same
    reflector as the main beam bulb.
    Left-hand side:
    1 Lift aside the hose running along the
    side of the battery cover.
    2 Release the two retainers on the battery
    cover and remove the cover.
    3 Pull up the washer fluid filler pipe.
    4 Remove the air pipe from the front edge
    of the battery box.

    Left-hand side:
    5 Refit the air pipe to the front edge of the
    battery box.
    6 Refit the washer fluid filler pipe.
    7 Refit the battery cover and hose.

    Front turn signal bulbs
    Left-hand side:
    1 Lift aside the hose running along the
    side of the battery cover.
    2 Release the two retainers on the battery
    cover and remove the cover.
    3 Pull up the washer fluid filler pipe.
    4 Remove the air pipe from the front edge
    of the battery box.



  • Page 220

    218

    Car care

    Both sides:
    1 The bulb holder has a bayonet fitting.
    Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
    and withdraw it.
    2 The bulb also has a bayonet fitting.
    Press in the bulb and twist it counterclockwise.
    3 Fit the new bulb.
    4 To facilitate fitting, look in through the
    headlight lens when fitting the bulb.
    Check that the new bulb is firmly seated.
    Left-hand side:
    5 Refit the air pipe to the front edge of the
    battery box.
    6 Refit the washer fluid filler pipe.
    7 Refit the battery cover and hose.

    Side-mounted turn signal bulbs
    1 Slide the lamp fitting forward so that its
    rear end can be pulled out.
    2 Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
    and withdraw it from the lamp fitting.
    Change the bulb.
    3 To fit, engage the two catches on the
    rear edge of the lamp fitting with the
    edge of the opening. Then press in the
    front edge of the lamp fitting so that the
    groove in the spring engages the plastic
    edge.



  • Page 221

    Car care

    219

    1 Undo one screw in the wheel housing.
    Lower the air shield.
    2 Remove the protective cover. Release
    the two spring clips securing the bulb.
    3 Unplug the connector.
    4 Change the bulb. Try not to touch the
    glass part of the bulb with your fingers.
    The height of the beam can be adjusted
    using a screwdriver inserted through the
    hole in the lower grille adjacent to the lens.

    Front fog lights
    WARNING
    • Never crawl under a car that is
    supported only by a jack. Always use
    axle stands.
    • Refer to the information on jacks on
    pages 248 and 249.

    Side marker lights
    1 Slide the lens rearward so that its front
    part can be pulled out.
    2 Fit the new bulb.
    3 When refitting, make sure that the
    groove in the spring engages the plastic
    edge of the bumper trim.



  • Page 222

    220

    Car care

    Taillights, Sport Sedan
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5

    Turn signals
    Taillights/stop lights
    Reversing lights
    Rear fog light (left-hand side)
    High-mounted stop light

    Taillights, Convertible

    Stop lights, taillights and turn
    signal bulbs, Sport Sedan
    1 Lower the cover in the trim behind the
    lights.
    Right-hand side: Unlock the plastic rivet
    by depressing the centre no more than
    3 mm. Take hold of the collar of the rivet
    and pull it out. Refer also to page 221.
    2 Lift the plastic lug on the lamp housing
    that secures the bulb holder.
    3 Carefully remove the entire bulb holder
    unit from the lamp housing. Change the
    bulb.
    4 Refit the bulb holder. Press the bulb
    holder home so that the plastic lug
    snaps into place.

    Stop lights, taillights and turn
    signal bulbs, Convertible
    1 Remove the cover.
    2 Carefully remove the bulb holder with
    the broken bulb.The bulb holder has a
    bayonet fitting.
    3 Change the bulb.
    4 Refit the bulb holder and cover.

    If a stop light bulb fails, the adjacent taillight
    will act as a stop light to ensure traffic safety.
    Change the broken bulb when possible.



  • Page 223

    Car care

    221

    Changing bulbs

    Reversing lights and rear fog
    light, Sport Sedan
    Removing the trunk lid trim
    1 Remove the two screws securing the
    grab handle to the inside of the trunk lid.
    2 Unlock the plastic rivets by pressing in
    the center of each rivet. Pull out the
    rivets by taking hold of the rivet’s collar.
    You can use the button on the handle of the
    screwdriver supplied with the car to unlock
    the rivets.

    1 Press down the plastic lug on the bulb
    holder.
    2 Carefully remove the entire bulb holder
    unit from the lamp housing. Change the
    bulb.
    3 Refit the bulb holder. Press the lug so
    that it snaps into place.
    To refit the trunk lid trim
    1 Withdraw the center of the rivets.
    2 Fit the trim in place on the trunk lid.
    3 Fit the rivets. Lock the rivets in place by
    pressing the center buttons in until flush
    with the collar.

    Reversing lights and rear fog
    lights, Convertible
    Removing the trunk lid trim
    1 Remove the two screws securing the
    grab handle to the inside of the trunklid.
    2 Unlock the plastic rivets by pressing in
    the centre of each rivet no more than
    3 mm. Pull out the rivets by taking hold
    of the rivet’s collar.
    You can use the button on the handle of the
    screwdriver supplied with the car to unlock
    the rivets.



  • Page 224

    222

    Car care

    Changing bulbs
    1 Carefully remove the bulb holder with
    the broken bulb. The bulb holder has a
    bayonet fitting.
    2 Fit the new bulb.
    3 Refit the bulb holder.
    To refit the trunk lid trim
    1 Withdraw the centre of the rivets.
    2 Fit the trim in place on the trunk lid.
    3 Fit the rivets. Lock the rivets in place by
    pressing the center buttons in until flush
    with the collar.

    Dome light, front, Sport Sedan
    1 Pull down the rear edge of the lens.
    2 Fit the new bulb.
    3 Insert the guide lugs on the front edge of
    the lens and press the lens home.

    Dome light, rear, Sport Sedan
    1 Remove the entire overhead panel:
    ease out the trailing end first, and then
    both sides of the front edge.
    2 Fit the new bulb.



  • Page 225

    Car care

    Dome light, Convertible
    1 Pull down the rear edge of the light
    fitting.
    2 If the center bulb needs replacing, open
    the hatch over the bulbs. Pull the bulb
    out of the bulb holder.
    If one of the outer bulbs needs replacing,
    turn the light fitting round. Change the
    bulb from the reverse of the lighting
    fitting. The bulb has a bayonet fitting.
    3 Position the front edge of the light fitting
    and press the fitting up towards the
    windscreen rail.

    Hatch opened for replacement of centre
    bulb

    Reverse side of the light fitting. The
    arrows mark the outer bulbs

    223



  • Page 226

    224

    Car care

    License plate lighting
    1 Undo the two screws and remove the
    lens.
    2 Fit the new bulb.
    3 Make sure the seal on the lens is
    correctly seated.
    4 Refit the lens and tighten the two
    screws.

    Glove box lighting

    Trunk lighting, Sport Sedan

    (certain variants only)

    The lamp fitting is located under the parcel
    shelf.

    1 Remove the lamp housing using a short
    screwdriver.
    2 Fit the new bulb.
    3 Insert the connector side first when refitting the lamp.

    1 Remove the lamp fitting by pulling down
    one end.
    2 Fit the new bulb.
    3 Insert the connector side first when refitting the lamp.



  • Page 227

    Car care

    225

    Other bulbs
    If any other bulbs need changing, we recommend that you visit a Saab dealer.

    Trunk lighting, Convertible
    1 Remove the lamp in the rear end first.
    2 Change the bulb.
    3 Insert the connector side first when refitting the lamp.

    Courtesy/floor lighting
    (certain variants only)
    1 Release one edge of the lamp fitting
    using a screwdriver.
    2 Fit the new bulb.
    3 Insert the connector side first when refitting the lamp.



  • Page 228

    226

    Car care
    Bulb table
    No. Designation Wattage
    1

    H7

    55

    Headlight

    2

    H3

    55

    Front fog lights

    3

    P21W

    21

    Taillights; rear fog light; brake lights;
    reversing lights

    4

    PY21W

    21

    Direction indicator, front/rear

    5

    R10W

    10

    Rear dome lighting; courtesy lighting;
    glove box lighting; trunk lighting, Convertible

    6

    R5W

    5

    License plate lighting; trunk lighting,
    Sport Sedan

    7

    T4W

    4

    Reading light, rear

    8

    WY5W/W5W

    5

    Side-mounted turn signal (yellow);
    parking lights; front dome lighting

    NOTICE
    Only fit lamps of the specified rating. Lamps of the wrong wattage
    could damage the wiring harness and electronics.



  • Page 229

    Car care

    Fuses
    WARNING
    To avoid the risk of short-circuiting and/or
    fire breaking out in the electrical system,
    the following should be heeded:
    • Always consult an Saab dealer before
    modifying or adding any electrical
    equipment. Failure to do so can result
    in the electrical system being
    damaged.
    • Never replace a fuse with one having
    a higher rating than specified (see
    page 229). The color of the fuse indicates its amperage.
    • If the same fuse blows repeatedly,
    have the electrical system checked by
    an Saab dealer.
    • If a MAXI fuse blows, it means that
    there is a major fault in the electrical
    system. Have the car checked without
    delay by an Saab dealer.

    227

    The fuses are housed in three fuse panels:
    one behind a hatch on the left-hand end of
    the dash, one in the engine bay (additional
    small unit in front of battery) and one on the
    left-hand side of the trunk. There is space
    for spare fuses in the hatch on the left-hand
    end of the dash.

    Sound fuse / Blown fuse
    To check if a fuse has blown, first remove it
    from the panel. If the filament is broken, the
    fuse has blown.



  • Page 230

    228

    Car care
    Some fuses and relays may be fitted but not
    connected to the car’s electrical system.

    MAXI fuses
    The car also has a number of large fuses
    known as MAXI fuses. These are designed
    to protect the car’s electrical system from
    being damaged. Each MAXI fuse protects a
    number of electrical circuits and functions
    and therefore has a higher rating (amperage) than the standard fuses. No spare
    MAXI fuses are supplied with the car.

    NOTICE
    Fuse panel in end of dash
    A special tool for removing fuses is provided
    on the hatch on the left-hand end of the
    dash. Simply push the tool onto the fuse,
    squeeze and remove the fuse.

    If a MAXI fuse blows, there is a major fault
    in the electrical system. Have the car
    checked at a Saab dealer.



  • Page 231

    Car care

    Fuse panel in end of fascia
    No. Amp. Function
    1
    15
    Steering wheel lock
    2
    5
    Steering column unit; ignition switch
    3
    10
    Hands-free; CD-player/CD-changer in cabin; SID
    4
    10
    Main instrument unit; manual climate control;
    automatic climate control (ACC)
    5
    7.5 Control module in front doors; Park Brake Shift Lock
    (automatic transmission)
    6
    7.5 Brake light switch
    7
    20
    Dash fuse panel; fuel filler door
    8
    30
    Control module in passenger front door
    9
    10
    Dash fuse panel
    10
    30
    Trailer socket; electrical socket in storage compartment between seats
    11
    10
    Data link connection (diagnostics)

    12
    13
    14

    15
    10
    20

    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21

    30
    7.5
    7.5
    7.5

    22
    23
    24
    25
    26
    27

    30
    40
    7.5
    5
    -

    Interior lighting incl. glove box
    Accessories
    Radio, sound system I; control panel,
    Infotainment System
    Control module in driver’s door
    Manual climate control; fan
    Headlight levelling switch
    Hands-free; brake light switch; manual climate
    control; clutch pedal switch
    Cigarette lighter
    Cabin fan
    Airbag control module
    Yaw sensor (cars with ESP)
    -

    229



  • Page 232

    230

    Car care
    Trunk fuse panel, left-hand side

    Trunk fuse panel, Sport Sedan

    No. Amp. Function
    1–5 MAXI 6 30 Control module in left rear door
    7 30 Control module in right rear door
    8 20 Trailer
    9
    10 30 Left-hand brake light; rear right turn signal; right taillight; right reversing light; high-mounted brake light;
    trailer lights
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15 15 Seat heating, left seat
    16 15 Seat heating, right seat
    17
    7.5 Autodimming rearview mirror; rain sensor
    18 15 Sunroof
    19
    7.5 Telematics (OnStar)
    20
    7.5 DVD player (navigation system)
    21
    7.5 Saab Parking Assistance (SPA); control module in
    rear doors
    22 30 Amplifier, sound system III
    23
    24 10 Movement sensor; CD changer in trunk (accessory)
    25 30 Electrically adjustable driver’s seat with memory



  • Page 233

    Car care
    26

    30

    27

    10

    28
    29

    -

    Right-hand stop light; rear left turn signal; left taillight;
    rear fog light; left reversing light; license plate lighting; trunk lighting; trailer lights
    Convertible: Lumbar support, electrically adjustable
    front seat
    -

    Trunk fuse panel, Convertible

    231



  • Page 234

    232

    Car care

    Fuse panel in engine bay
    No. Amp. Function
    1
    2 10 Engine control module; automatic transmission control module
    3 20 Horn
    4 10 Engine control module
    5
    - 6 10 Selector lever, automatic transmission
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    -

    14
    15
    16

    30
    30

    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26

    30
    30
    20
    10
    30
    20
    20
    30

    27 MAXI
    –37

    Washer fluid pump, headlights
    Front right parking light; front right turn signal; left and
    right side turn signal; right high beam; left low beam;
    front left fog light
    Windshield wiper motor, low speed
    Windshield wiper motor, high speed
    Parking heater; auxiliary heater
    Headlight levelling
    Washer fluid pump, windshield
    Flash-to-pass
    Amplifier, sound system II
    Front left turn signal; front left parking light; front right
    fog light; right low beam; left high beam



  • Page 235

    Car care
    Relays
    R 1 Washer fluid pump, windshield
    R 2 R 3 R 4 R 5 Flash-to-pass
    R 6 Horn
    R 7 R 8 Starter motor
    R 9 Windshield wipers ON/OFF
    R10 R11 Ignition +15
    R12 Windshield wipers, high/low speed
    R13 R14 Washer fluid pump, headlights
    R15 R16 -

    233

    Fuse panel in front of battery
    No.

    Amp. Function
    20
    Fuel pump; preheated oxygen sensors (lambda
    probe)
    3
    10
    A/C compressor
    4
    30
    Main relay
    1
    2

    Relays
    1 2 A/C-compressor
    3 Preheated oxygen sensors (lambda probe)
    4 Main relay, engine (ECM/EVAP/injectors)



  • Page 236

    234

    Car care

    Tires

    Inflation - Tire Pressure

    Your new vehicle comes with high-quality
    tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If
    you ever have questions about your tire
    warranty and where to obtain service, see
    your Saab Warranty and Service Record
    Booklet for details.

    WARNING
    Poor maintained and improperly used
    tires are dangerous.
    • Overloading your tires can cause
    overheating as a result of too much
    friction. You could have an blow-out
    and a serious accident. See “Loading
    Your Vehicle” on page 243.
    • Underinflated tires pose the same
    danger as overloaded tires. The
    resulting accident could cause serious
    injury. Check all tires frequently to
    maintain the recommended pressure.
    Tire pressure should be checked
    when your tires are cold.
    • Overinflated tires are more likely to be
    cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
    impact – such as when you hit a
    pothole. Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
    • Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
    your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
    have been damaged, replace them.

    The Tire-Loading Information label shows
    the correct inflation pressures for your tires
    when they’re cold. “Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
    or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
    Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that
    underinflation or overinflation is all
    right. It’s not. If your tires don’t have
    enough air (underinflation), you can get
    the following:
    • Too much flexing
    • Too much heat
    • Tire overloading
    • Bad wear
    • Bad handling
    • Bad fuel economy
    If your tires have too much air (overinflation), you can get the following:





    Unusual wear
    Bad handling
    Rough ride
    Needless damage from road hazards

    Adjust the tire pressure to match the current
    load and speed of the car (see page 277).
    The stated tire pressures apply to cold tires,
    i.e. tires that are the same temperature as
    the outside air temperature. Tire pressure
    increases as the tires become warm (e.g.
    during highway driving) by approximately
    0.3 bar (4 psi). When the temperature of the
    tires changes by 50°F (10°C), the tire pressure will change 0.1 bar (2 psi).
    Never reduce the pressure of a hot tire. If the
    tires are hot when you check them, only
    increase the pressure, if necessary.



  • Page 237

    Car care
    When to check
    Check your tires once a month or more.
    Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It
    should be at 60 psi (420 kPa).

    After the tires have been rotated, adjust the
    front and rear inflation pressures as shown
    on the Tire-Loading Information label. Make
    certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See page 249.

    How to Check
    Use a good quality pocket-type gage to
    check tire pressure. You can’t tell if your
    tires are properly inflated simply by looking
    at them. Radial tires may look properly
    inflated even when they’re underinflated.
    Be sure to put the valve caps back on the
    valve stems. They help prevent leaks by
    keeping out dirt and moisture.

    Tire Inspection and Rotation
    Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles
    (12 500 km).
    Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate
    your tires as soon as possible and check
    wheel alignment. Also check for damaged
    tires or wheels. See “When It Is Time for
    New Tires” on page 236 and “Wheel
    Replacement” on page 239 for more information.
    The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve
    more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation is the most important.
    When rotating your tires, always use the
    correct rotation pattern. Left front tire to left
    rear. Left rear tire to right front. Right front to
    right rear. Right rear to left front.
    Don’t include the compact spare tire in your
    tire rotation.

    WARNING
    Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
    which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
    become loose after a time. The wheel
    could come off and cause an accident.
    When you change a wheel, remove any
    rust or dirt from places where the wheel
    attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency,
    you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do
    this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
    brush later, if you need to, to get all the
    rust or dirt off. See “Changing a tire” on
    page 248.

    235

    Flat spotting
    All tires get hot, especially on long journeys
    or when the car is driven hard. After the car
    has been parked with hot tires and the tires
    have cooled down, a flat spot can form in the
    tire, where it is in contact with the ground.
    The same can occur if the car has not been
    moved for a long time.
    Flat spots can cause vibration that can be
    felt through the steering wheel, similar to
    that experienced when the wheels need balancing.
    Flat spots of this type disappear once the
    tires get hot again, usually after 10–15 miles
    (20–25 km) of driving at cruising speed. If
    the outdoor temperature is low it takes a
    longer distance.



  • Page 238

    236

    Car care

    When It Is Time for New Tires

    Buying New Tires

    One way to tell when it’s time for new tires is
    to check the treadwear indicators, which will
    appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch
    (1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining.
    You need a new tire if any of the following
    statements are true:

    To find out what kind and size of tires you
    need, look at the Tire-Loading Information
    label.
    If you wish to fit other tires or wheels than
    those supplied with the car, consult your
    Saab dealer first as to the possibilities
    available.
    Wheels/tires combinations that are not
    approved by Saab can negatively affect the
    car’s directional stability, steering and braking in both wet and dry conditions.

    • You can see the indicators at three or
    more places around the tire.
    • You can see cord or fabric showing
    through the tire’s rubber.
    • The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or
    snagged deep enough to show cord or
    fabric.
    • The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
    • The tire has a puncture, cut or other
    damage that can’t be repaired well
    because of the size or location of the
    damage.

    Treadwear indicator

    Treadwear indicators
    The tires incorporate wear indicators in the
    form of smooth, treadless strips across the
    width, which become visible when only
    2/32" (1.6 mm) of tread remains. As soon as
    the indicators become visible, new tires
    should be fitted without delay.
    Make sure you are familiar with the legal
    limit for minimum tread depth in your
    country and also any regulations governing the use of winter (snow) tires.



  • Page 239

    Car care
    The wheels and tires have been carefully
    matched to the characteristics of the car and
    play a key role in its outstanding roadholding and handling.
    Do not take it for granted that a wheel/tire
    combination will work in the best possible
    way, just because it can be fitted to the car.
    To ensure that the speedometer is as accurate as possible it should be reprogrammed
    if wheels of a different dimension are fitted.
    Contact a Saab dealer.
    Because of front wheel drive, the front tires
    tend to wear faster than the rear ones. New
    tires should always be fitted in pairs, so that
    tires on the same axle have the same
    amount of tread.
    Store wheels lying flat or hanging – never
    standing upright.

    NOTICE
    Always consult your Saab dealer before
    changing the car’s wheels or tires on your
    Saab.
    Wide wheels and tires with side walls that
    are too low can:
    • be damaged in potholes, etc.
    • cause springs, shock absorbers and
    wheel bearings and body mountings
    to be overloaded.
    • affect the function of the Electronic
    Stability Program (ESP).
    The speed and load limits of the tires
    must not be exceeded; see page 242.
    Wheels larger than 17" must not be fitted
    on the Saab 9-3 for reasons above. The
    permissible offset is 1.61 inch (41 mm).

    237

    WARNING
    Mixing tires could cause you to lose
    control while driving. If you mix tires of
    different sizes or types (radial and biasbelted tires), the vehicle may not handle
    properly, and you could have a crash.
    Using tires of different sizes may also
    cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to
    use the same size and type tires on all
    wheels. It’s all right to drive with your
    compact spare temporarily, it was developed for use on your vehicle. See
    “Compact spare” on page 246.

    WARNING
    If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
    the wheel rim flanges could develop
    cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
    and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
    a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
    wheels on your vehicle.



  • Page 240

    238

    Car care

    Uniform Tire Quality Grading
    Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
    Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature
    A
    The following information relates to the
    system developed by the United States
    National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
    applies only to vehicles sold in the United
    States.) The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not
    apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
    space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
    tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12
    inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
    While the tires available on General Motors
    passenger cars and light trucks may vary
    with respect to these grades, they must also
    conform to federal safety requirements and
    additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.

    Treadwear
    The treadwear grade is a comparative
    rating based on the wear rate of the tire
    when tested under controlled conditions on
    a specified government test course. For
    example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
    and a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
    actual conditions of their use, however, and
    may depart significantly from the norm due
    to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics
    and climate.
    Traction – AA, A, B, C
    The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
    are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces
    of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
    may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire
    is based on straight-ahead braking traction
    tests, and does not include acceleration,
    cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
    characteristics.

    Temperature – A, B, C
    The temperature grades are A (the highest),
    B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance
    to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled
    conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
    test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
    cause the material of the tire to degenerate
    and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
    grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must
    meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
    Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
    represent higher levels of performance on
    the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
    required by law.
    Warning: The temperature grade for this tire
    is established for a tire that is properly
    inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
    speed, underinflation, or excessive loading,
    either separately or in combination, can
    cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.



  • Page 241

    Car care
    Wheel Alignment and Tire
    Balance
    The wheels on your vehicle were aligned
    and balanced carefully at the factory to give
    you the longest tire life and best overall performance.
    Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not needed. However, if you
    notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment may
    need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
    vibrating when driving on a smooth road,
    your wheels may need to be rebalanced.

    Wheel Replacement
    Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or
    badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep
    coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and
    wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel
    leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
    wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
    See your dealer if any of these conditions
    exist.
    Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you
    need.
    Each new wheel should have the same
    load-carrying capacity, diameter, width,
    offset and be mounted the same way as the
    one it replaces.
    If you need to replace any of your wheels,
    wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only
    with new Saab original equipment parts.
    This way, you will be sure to have the right
    wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your
    vehicle.

    239

    Used Replacement Wheels

    WARNING
    WARNING
    Using the wrong replacement wheels,
    wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle
    can be dangerous. It could affect the
    braking and handling of your vehicle,
    make your tires lose air and make you
    lose control. You could have a collision in
    which you or others could be injured.
    Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts
    and wheel nuts for replacement.

    Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause
    problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire
    chain clearance to the body and chassis.
    See “Changing a tire” on page 248.

    WARNING
    When fitting just one new pair of tires,
    these should be fitted to the rear wheels,
    as these are more critical to the directional stability of the car (e.g. on braking
    or in a skid). The existing rear wheels
    should therefore be moved to the front.

    Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
    dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been
    used or how far it’s been driven. It could
    fail suddenly and cause a crash. If you
    have to replace a wheel, use a new GM
    original equipment wheel.



  • Page 242

    240

    Car care

    Tire Chains
    WARNING
    If your vehicle has 225/45 R17 size tires,
    don’t use tire chains, there’s not enough
    clearance.
    Tire chains used on a vehicle without the
    proper amount of clearance can cause
    damage to the brakes, suspension or
    other vehicle parts. The area damaged by
    the tire chains could cause you to lose
    control of your vehicle and you or others
    may be injured in a crash.
    Use another type of traction device only if
    its manufacturer recommends it for use
    on your vehicle and tire size combination
    and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions. To help avoid
    damage to your vehicle, drive slowly,
    readjust or remove the device if it’s
    contacting your vehicle, and don’t spin
    your wheels.
    If you do find traction devices that will fit,
    install them on the front tires.

    Notice: If your vehicle does not have
    225/45R17 size tires, use tire chains only
    where legal and only when you must.
    Contact your Saab dealer regarding suitable snow chains. Install them on the
    front tires and tighten them as tightly as
    possible with the ends securely
    fastened. Drive slowly and follow the
    chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you
    can hear the chains contacting your
    vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the
    contact continues, slow down until it
    stops. Driving too fast or spinning the
    wheels with chains on will damage your
    vehicle.

    If a Tire Goes Flat
    It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while
    you’re driving, especially if you maintain
    your tires properly. If air goes out of a tire,
    it’s much more likely to leak out slowly. But
    if you should ever have a “blowout”, here are
    a few tips about what to expect and what to
    do:
    If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a
    drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side.
    Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and
    grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
    a stop well out of the traffic lane.
    A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts
    much like a skid and may require the same
    correction you’d use in a skid. In any rear
    blowout, remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
    steering the way you want the vehicle to go.
    It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can
    still steer. Gently brake to a stop – well off
    the road if possible.
    If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to
    use your jacking equipment to change a flat
    tire safely.



  • Page 243

    Car care
    Tire Sidewall Labeling
    Useful information about a tire is molded
    into it´s sidewall.
    Tire size: The tire size ia a combination of
    letters and numbers used to define a particular tire´s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and service description.
    Department of Transportation (DOT):
    The Department of Transportation (DOT)
    code indicates that the tire is in compliance
    with the U.S. Department of Transportation
    Motor Vehicle Safety standards.
    Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and numbers following DOT code are
    the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The
    TIN shows the manufacturer and plant
    code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
    of the tire.
    Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
    number of plies in the sidewall and under
    the tread.

    Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
    Tire manufacturers are required to grade
    tires based on the performance factors:
    treadwear, traction and temperature resistance. For more information see “Uniform
    Tire Quality Grading” on page 238.
    Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load.
    For information on recommended tire pressure see “Recommended lowest tire pressure, cold tires” on page 277 and “Loading
    Your Vehicle” on page 243.

    241

    Tire Size
    The following illustration shows an example
    of a typical passenger car tire size.
    215 / 55 R

    16 93

    H

    |

    |

    |

    |

    |

    |

    a

    b

    c

    d

    e

    f

    a
    b
    c
    d
    e
    f

    Tire Width
    Aspect Ratio
    Belt Rating
    Rim diameter
    Load range
    Speed rating

    Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters
    from sidewall to sidewall.



  • Page 244

    242

    Car care

    Aspect ratio: A two-digit number that indicates the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if the tire size aspect
    ratio is “55”, as shown in item “C” of the illustration, it would mean that the tire´s sidewall
    is 55% as high as it is wide.
    Belt Rating: A letter code is used to indicate
    the type of ply construction in the tire. The
    letter “R” means radial ply construction; the
    letter “D” means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter “B” means beltedbias ply construction.
    Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
    inches.
    Load range: The load range represents the
    load carry capacity a tire is certified to carry.
    Speed Rating: The maximum speed that a
    tire is certified to carry a load. Speed ratings
    range from “A” to “Z”.

    Tire markings
    An example of the meaning of the different
    markings in a tire size is given below for a
    tire size of 225/45 R17 94H:
    225 Tire section width, mm
    45 Aspect ratio, i.e. the section height
    as a percentage of the section
    width
    R Radial ply
    17 Wheel rim diameter 17 in at bead
    seats
    94 Tire load index
    H Speed rating

    Tire load indices
    91 Tire approved for max. 1355 lbs.
    (615 kg)
    93 Max. 1433 lbs. (650 kg)
    94 Max. 1477 lbs. (670 kg)
    Speed ratings
    Q Tire approved for speeds up to
    100 mph (160 km/h)
    S Max. 112 mph (180 km/h)
    T Max. 118 mph (190 km/h)
    H Max. 130 mph (210 km/h)
    V Max. 149 mph (240 km/h)
    W Max. 168 mph (270 km/h)
    Y Max. 186 mph (300 km/h)

    TIN-code
    a Manufacturer´s Identification Mark
    b Tire Size
    c Tire Type Code
    d Date of Manufacture



  • Page 245

    Car care
    Loading Your Vehicle

    This label can only be found on vehicles
    sold in the U.S.
    Vehicles sold in Canada have the tire
    information label in the glove box, see
    page 278.
    This is an example of what your vehicle´s
    Tire-Loading Information/Certification label
    might look like. It is located on the B-pillar
    and shows how much weight your vehicle
    may properly carry. The label tells you the
    proper size, and recommended inflation
    pressures for the tires on your vehicle. It
    also gives you important information about
    the number of people that can be in your
    vehicle and the total weight that you can
    carry. This weight is called the Vehicle
    Capacity Weight, and includes the weight of
    all occupants, cargo and all nonfactoryinstalled options.

    Tire Terminology and Definitions
    Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
    tire pressing outward on each square inch of
    the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds
    per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
    Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight of optional accessories, for
    example, automatic transmission, power
    steering, power brakes, power windows,
    power seats, radio and air conditioning.
    Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire´s
    height to its width.
    Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
    located between the plies and the tread.
    Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials.
    Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
    ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
    alternate angles substantially less than 90
    degrees to the centerline of the tread.
    Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air
    pressure in a tire, measured in pounds per
    square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa), before
    a tire has built up heat from driving. See
    “Inflation - Tire Pressure” on page 234.
    Curb weight: This means the weight of a
    motor vehicle with standard and optional
    equipment including the maximum capacity
    of fuel, oil and coolant, without passengers
    and cargo.

    243

    DOT Markings: A code molded into the
    sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in
    compliance with the U.S. Department of
    Transportation motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire
    Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the
    tire manufacturer, production plant, brand
    and date of production.
    GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see
    “Loading Your Vehicle” on page 243.
    GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for
    the front axle, see “Loading Your Vehicle”
    on page 269.
    GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for
    the rear axle, see “Loading Your Vehicle” on
    page 243.
    Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of
    an asymmetrical tire that must always face
    outward when mounted on a vehicle.
    Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air
    pressure. There are 6.9 kPa to one psi.
    Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used
    on light duty trucks and some multipurpose
    passenger vehicles.
    Load Index: An assigned number ranging
    from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load
    carrying capacity of a tire.



  • Page 246

    244

    Car care

    Maximum Load rating: The load rating for
    a tire at the maximum permissible inflation
    pressure for that tire.
    Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The
    sum of curb weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight; and production options
    weight.
    Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: The maximum cold inflation pressure
    to which a tire may be inflated.
    Normal occupant weight: The number of
    occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipled by 150 pounds (68 kg). See “Loading
    Your Vehicle” on page 243.
    Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
    Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a
    asymmetrical tire that has a particular side
    that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that contains a whitewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand and or model name molding on
    the other sidewall of the tire.
    Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
    passenger cars and some light duty trucks
    and multipurpose vehicles.

    Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle manufacturer´s recommended tire inflation pressure shown on the tire placard, see
    “Inflation - Tire Pressure” on page 234 and
    “Loading Your Vehicle” on page 243.
    Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which
    the ply cords that extend to the beads are
    laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
    Rim: A metal support for a tire or a tire and
    tube assembly upon which the tire beads
    are seated.
    Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the
    tread and the bead.
    Speed rating: An alphanumeric code
    assigned to a tire indicating the maximum
    speed at which a tire can operate.
    Traction: The friction between the tire and
    the road surface. The amount of grip provided.
    Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands,
    sometimes called “wear bars”, that show
    across the tread of a tire when only
    2/32 inch of tread remains. See “When It Is
    Time for New Tires” on page 236.

    Tread Width: The width of the tire´s tread.
    UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grade Standards, a tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire´s
    traction, temperature and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers
    using government testing procedures. The
    rating are molded into the sidewall of the
    tire. See “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” on
    page 238.
    Vehicle Capacity Weight: Is the number of
    designated seating positions multipled by
    150 pounds (68 kg) plus the rated cargo
    load. See “Loading Your Vehicle” on
    page 243.
    Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load
    on an individual tire due to curb weight,
    accessory weight, occupant weight and
    cargo weight.
    Vehicle Placard: A label permanently
    attached to a vehicle showing original
    equipment tire size and the recommended
    cold inflation pressure. See “Loading Your
    Vehicle” on page 243.



  • Page 247

    Car care
    Steps for Determining Correct
    Load Limit
    1 Locate the statement “The
    combined weight of occupants and
    cargo should never exceed
    XXX pounds” on your vehicle´s
    placard.
    2 Determine the combined weight of
    the driver and passengers that will
    be riding in your vehicle.
    3 Substract the combined weight of
    the driver and passengers from
    XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
    4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
    load capacity. For example, if the
    “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and
    there will be five 150 lb. passengers
    in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5x150) =
    650 lbs.).

    5 Determine the combined weight of
    luggage and cargo being loaded on
    the vehicle. That weight may not
    safely exceed the available cargo
    and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
    6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
    load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
    manual to determine how this
    reduces the available cargo and
    luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

    245

    Winter tires
    Winter (snow) tires are recommended for
    winter climates where the majority of your
    driving will be done on snow and ice. Winter
    tires should be fitted to all four wheels to
    maintain a proper balance. Your Saab
    dealer can advise you of to the correct size
    tire for your car (if different from the original
    size) and also supply Saab approved winter
    tires pre-mounted on steel or alloy rims.
    Winter tires normally use a different speed
    rating compared to summer/all season tires.
    Make sure not to exceed the stated speed
    rating on the tires you use.



  • Page 248

    246

    Car care

    Compact spare
    WARNING
    The spare tire or punctured tire must be
    stowed under the trunk floor, and secured
    in place with the retaining nut.

    Date code

    Tire date code
    Tires should be regarded as perishable
    goods. As the tires age, the rubber becomes
    progressively harder, and the roadholding
    ability of the tires diminishes. This is particularly true on winter tires.
    Tires have a code that specifies their date of
    manufacture. The first two digits denote the
    week number and the last two digits the
    year.
    Accordingly, a date code of 3701 signifies
    that the tire was manufactured in week 37,
    2001.

    The compact spare is light and easy to
    handle when changing the tire. Its use is
    only permitted when a standard tire has sustained a puncture. The maximum life of the
    tire is only just over 2,000 miles (3,500 km).
    Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) with the
    compact spare fitted.
    The tire pressure should be 60 psi
    (420 kPa). Put the punctured tire in the
    spare wheel well under the trunk floor.
    “Driving with the compact spare tire”, see
    page 193.
    Have the standard tire repaired and refitted
    as soon as possible.

    The spare tire, the tools and the jack with its
    crank are carried under a panel in the trunk.
    Fold the carpeting forward to ease access to
    the tools and spare tire.
    The screwdriver handle has a “button” for
    removing plastic rivets. This type of rivet
    must be removed when changing the light
    bulb in the trunk lid (see page 221).



  • Page 249

    Car care

    NOTICE
    To avoid damaging an alloy wheel with a
    flat tire, this can be placed outside up in
    the spare-wheel well but only while driving to the closest workshop.
    A general rule is that all heavy loads must
    be well secured in the luggage compartment (see page 143).

    Your Saab is equipped with a trip computer
    and you can use its “Speed warning” function, to monitor driving speed since you
    must not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

    Tools under a panel in the trunk

    247



  • Page 250

    248

    Car care

    Changing a tire
    WARNING
    Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
    maintenance or repairs is dangerous
    without the appropriate safety equipment
    and training. The jack provided with your
    vehicle is designed only for changing a
    flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you
    or others could be badly injured or killed if
    the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the jack
    provided with your vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
    Changing a tire can be dangerous. The
    vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over
    or fall on you or other people. You and
    they could be badly injured or even killed.
    Find a level place to change your tire. To
    help prevent the vehicle from moving:
    1 Set the parking brake firmly.
    2 If you have an automatic transmission, put the shift lever in PARK (P).
    For a manual transmission, leave the
    car in gear (1st or REVERSE (R)).
    3 Turn off the engine and do not restart
    while the vehicle is raised.
    4 Do not allow passengers to remain in
    the vehicle.

    To be even more certain the vehicle won't
    move, you should put blocks at the front
    and rear of the tire farthest away from the
    one being changed. That would be the
    tire, on the other side, at the opposite end
    of the vehicle.

    • The jack should be stored correctly
    under the carpeting in the trunk. If it
    lies loose in the car, it could thrown
    forward and cause personal injury in
    the event of a crash or if the car rolls
    over.

    • The car jack is designed solely for use
    in changing a tire or fitting snow
    chains. It must not be used to
    support the car during repair work
    or servicing.

    • Grit, salt and rust can clog the inner
    threads of the wheel bolts if the car has
    been driven for several years exclusively with alloy wheels.
    If steel wheels are being installed, the
    bolt hole threads in the brake hubs
    should be cleaned before the thinner
    steel wheels are fitted. It may otherwise not be possible to achieve the
    correct clamping force, despite tightening the wheel bolts to the correct
    torque.

    • Never crawl under a car that is
    supported only by a jack. Always use
    axle stands.
    • Raising your vehicle too high or with
    the jack improperly positioned can
    damage the vehicle and even make
    the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
    injury and vehicle damage, be sure to
    fit the jack lift head into the proper
    location before raising the vehicle, and
    raise the vehicle only far enough off
    the ground so there is enough room for
    the spare tire to fit (no more than
    25 mm or 1 inch clearance between
    the ground and the bottom of the tire).
    • Switch on the hazard warning lights if
    the car is on a road.



  • Page 251

    Car care

    249

    When the car has to be lifted, the jack must
    be positioned at one of the four jacking
    points (front or rear) under the sill members.
    If a floor jack is used, the lifting plate must
    be positioned under the normal jacking
    points, see illustration. If the car is equipped
    with a towbar, the jack can also be placed
    under this.

    NOTICE
    Apply the jack only to the jacking points
    indicated on the body.
    1 Wind the jack up to a suitable height
    before placing it under the jacking point.
    Each jacking point is indicated by an
    arrow on the sill (see illustration).
    Make sure that the jack fully engages
    the jacking point in the underside of the
    sill member and that the entire foot of the
    jack is steady and flat on the ground.
    The jack must not stand on snow, ice or
    similar.
    Wind up the jack until it just begins to lift
    the car.

    Marking of jacking points

    Jacking points

    2 It is not necessary to remove the wheel
    cover.
    If, none the less, you wish to remove the
    wheel cover, take hold of the outer edge
    and pull it straight out.
    Loosen the wheel bolts half a turn.
    3 Wind the jack to raise the wheel clear of
    the ground. Remove the wheel bolts and
    lift off the wheel.

    4 Clean any rust or dirt from the contact
    surfaces between the wheel and brake
    disc. Do not wipe away the grease in the
    wheel hub.
    5 Add a thin layer of grease on the bolts
    before fitting, see page 251. Fit the
    wheel and screw in the bolts in the
    sequence shown on page 251 (opposite
    pairs).
    Tighten the bolts enough for the bolts
    and wheel to be seated correctly.
    6 Lower the car and tighten the wheel
    bolts to torque in sequence as shown on
    the following page.
    Tightening torque:
    Light-alloy wheels: 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).
    Steel wheels: 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).



  • Page 252

    250

    Car care

    Jacking points for floor jack

    NOTICE
    • Do not overtighten the bolts using a
    impact wrench: not only can this
    damage the wheels but it can also
    make it impossible to undo the bolts
    using the wheel wrench in the car’s
    toolkit.
    • When refitting a wheel cover, make
    sure that the valve protrudes through
    the marked recess in the wheel cover.

    Clean any rust or dirt from the contact surfaces between the wheel and brake disc.

    7 Retouching the wheel bolts after twenty
    or so miles.
    Tightening torque:
    Light-alloy wheels: 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).
    Steel wheels: 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).
    We advise against using wheels with large
    ventilation slots in winter, as the brake components are then more exposed to slush,
    road salt and grit.
    If you fit wheels of a different dimension, the
    speedometer can be reprogrammed to
    ensure it is as accurate as possible. Contact
    a Saab dealer.
    Driving with tire chains, see page 182

    Do not wipe away the grease in the wheel
    hub.



  • Page 253

    Car care

    Safety belts
    WARNING
    If the car is involved in a crash, the safety
    belts, belt pretensioners and other associated components must be inspected at
    a Saab dealer.
    Never make any alterations or repairs to
    the safety belts yourself but visit a Saab
    dealer.

    Grease the surfaces indicated with a thin
    layer of grease

    Tightening sequence, wheel bolts

    Check the function of the safety belts regularly as follows:
    • Hold the diagonal strap and pull it sharply.
    The safety belt should lock and it should
    not be possible to withdraw it further.
    Check the anchorage points in the floor.
    They must not have suffered rust damage.
    If a belt is worn or has any fraying edges, it
    should be replaced.
    Safety belts must not come into contact with
    substances such as polishes, oil or chemicals. If the belts get dirty, wash them with
    warm water and a detergent or have them
    replaced.

    251

    Upholstery and trim
    To remove fluff and hairs from the seats,
    door armrests and headlining, use a
    vacuum cleaner, a moist lint-free cloth, or a
    clothes brush. Remove spots and dirt using
    a cloth moistened with lukewarm soapy
    water.
    When using a stain remover, always work
    from the outside towards the centre to avoid
    leaving a ring. If a soiled ring or spot should
    remain, it can usually be removed using
    lukewarm soapy water or water alone.
    Spots left by liquids, such as soft drinks or
    thin oil, must be removed at once with an
    absorbent material, such as kitchen towelling. Then clean with a stain remover.
    White spirit is recommended for removing
    grease and oil stains. A medium stiff brush
    may also be used.

    Cleaning and caring for leather
    upholstery
    The principal reason for treating leather
    upholstery is to maintain its elegant appearance and to provide it with a protective film.
    Disco lour at ion caused by dust and wear
    mainly affects the lighter shades, although
    this is not detrimental to the leather, indeed,
    the patina resulting from use is often considered desirable in leather. But if the leather is
    allowed to become too grubby, it can start to
    look shabby.
    The leather upholstery should be cleaned
    and reconditioned twice a year in conjunction with spring and autumn inspections. In



  • Page 254

    252

    Car care

    very warm, dry climates the leather may
    need more regular reconditioning. Use conventional leather care products. Follow the
    instructions on the packaging.
    Do not use unknown harsh polishing
    agents, cleaning agents, sprays, coarse
    soap or hot water.

    Textile carpeting
    Textile carpeting should be vacuum
    cleaned regularly. Carpeting can also be
    cleaned using a brush or sponge and carpet
    shampoo.
    For safety reasons, vacuum cleaners that
    are not earthed (grounded) must not be
    used out of doors.

    Engine bay
    The engine bay should be cleaned with an
    engine decreasing and rinsed with hot
    water. The headlights must be covered
    over. Do not use a pressure washer. Avoid
    spraying electrical components and connectors.
    Do not use petrol as a cleaning agent or solvent when carrying out repairs or maintenance. Saab recommends the use of environmentally-friendly decrescendos.

    Washing
    The bodywork must be washed frequently.
    When the car is new, the body should be
    washed by hand using plain cold water and
    a clean, soft brush through which the water
    flows. Automatic caresses should be
    avoided when the car is new.
    After 5–6 months the paintwork will have
    hardened. To facilitate cleaning, a suitable
    detergent can be added to the water, which
    should be lukewarm.
    Remove any bird droppings without delay,
    as these can discolor the paintwork and
    prove difficult to polish out. Lay a wad of wet
    paper on the patch of dirt and leave it for a
    minute or so. It will then be easy to wash off
    the dirt.
    Use a soft cloth moistened with white spirit
    to remove splashes of tar or asphalt. Do not
    use strong cleaners, as these can dry out
    the paintwork.

    NOTICE
    Do not use alcohol-based cleaners on the
    plastic lenses of the front or rear lights, as
    these can cause a crackling effect on the
    lenses.
    The door mirrors should be folded in
    before the car enters an automatic car
    wash.
    The underside of the car also needs washing regularly, and this should be done extra
    thoroughly at the end of winter. Clean the
    underside of the car by hand if the car is usually washed in an automatic car wash without special facilities for underbody cleaning.
    Never wash or leave the car to dry in the
    sun, but wipe it dry with a chamois leather
    immediately after washing to avoid smears
    and streaks.
    Clean the inside of window glass using a
    proprietary window cleaner. This is particularly important when the car is new, as
    upholstery and trim have a tendency to
    sweat a little at first.
    Keep the glass well polished, as this helps
    to prevent misting.
    Clean the outside of the windows with Saab
    washer fluid. This is especially important if
    the car has been washed in an automatic
    car wash, as sometimes a wax treatment is
    used that can contaminate the windshield
    and impair the performance of the wipers.



  • Page 255

    Car care
    In the U.S., Saab offers a full complement of
    car care products. See your dealer or visit
    us at www.saabcatalog.com.
    Convertible:
    • Wash the soft top with a mild soap solution and lukewarm water. For spot cleaning the top, a finger nail brush can also be
    used. Stroke the brush in the direction of
    the fabric, not across the threads.
    • If a pressure washer is used be heedful of
    the following recommendations:
    • on the lower part of the car (not higher
    than the door handles): max pressure
    of 100 bar and not closer than 8 in.
    (20 cm).
    • on the upper part of the car: tax pressure of 100 bar and not closer than
    32 in. (80 cm).
    • Do not use any drying chemicals or waterproofing agents.
    • Avoid automatic car washes.

    NOTICE
    • Try your brakes on leaving a car wash.
    Wet brake discs reduce the performance of the brakes.
    • Fixed antennae, such as for a mobile
    phone, must be removed if the car
    goes through an automatic car wash.
    • Cars with Saab Parking Assistance:
    Do not spray the sensors or closer
    than 8 in. (20 cm) to the sensors with
    a pressure washer, as this can
    damage them.

    253

    Waxing and polishing
    Do not wax a new car during the first three
    or four months. In fact, there is no need to
    polish the car before the paintwork has
    started to dull through oxidation. Other than
    in exceptional cases, do not use abrasive
    polishes containing a cutting agent on a new
    car. Always wash the car thoroughly before
    waxing or polishing.

    Touching up the paint
    Damaged paintwork should be treated as
    soon as it is discovered: the longer it is left,
    the greater the risk of corrosion. The anticorrosion warranty does not cover corrosion
    resulting from untreated defects.
    Paintwork damage sustained in a crash is
    usually extensive and can only be properly
    restored by professionals.
    However, you can repair small scratches
    and stone chip damage yourself. The necessary tools and materials, such as primer,
    touch-up paint and brushes, are available
    from your Saab dealer.
    In the case of minor flaws in the paintwork,
    where the metal has not been exposed and
    an undamaged layer of paint remains,
    touch-up paint can usually be applied
    directly, after any dirt has been scraped
    away using a pointed knife.
    If corrosion has already set in, such as the
    result of stone-chip damage, use a pointed
    knife to scrape off all surface rust. If possible, the damaged area should be taken
    back to the bare metal. The metal should



  • Page 256

    254

    Car care

    Anti-corrosion
    treatment

    then be primed with two thin coats of primer
    applied by brush.
    After the primer has dried, apply several thin
    layers of topcoat until the surface of the
    repaired area is flush with the surrounding
    paintwork.
    Stir both primer and touch-up paint thoroughly before use and allow each coat to
    dry before applying the next.

    Two-coat enamel
    As the name implies, two-coat enamel is
    applied in two operations. The first coat, the
    base color, contains the pigment, metal
    flakes and binder. The second coat consists
    of a clear enamel, which provides the final
    gloss for the paintwork and protects the
    base from moisture and environmental contaminants.
    Touch-up stone-chip damage as follows:
    1 Thoroughly clean the damaged area.
    2 Then apply the primer, base color and
    finally, the clear enamel. To achieve the
    best finish, apply two or three coats of
    primer.

    Surface treatment composition
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7

    Body panel
    Zinc (certain components only) 7.5 µm
    Phosphate coating 3 –5 µm
    Cathodic ED 23 µm
    Intermediate coat 35 µm
    Metallic base/solid base 11 µm
    Clear enamel 45 µm

    The entire car undergoes a series of anticorrosion processes during production.
    These include electrophoretic priming,
    PVC-based coating to protect against stone
    chip damage and corrosion, and treatment
    of body cavities and members with thin,
    penetrating rustproofing oil.
    In addition, most body panels, such as the
    hood, doors and floor pan are galvanized.
    The anti-corrosion treatment on some parts
    of the car is constantly exposed to wear and
    prone to damage. This applies particularly
    to the underside of the car and inside the
    wheel arches, where grit, road salt and the
    like that are thrown up can give rise to corrosion where the underseal has worn away.
    The extent of this obviously depends on the
    conditions in which the car is used.
    Accordingly, make it a habit to hose the
    underside of the car often and to inspect the
    condition of the underseal. The anti-corrosion warranty does not relieve the car owner
    of the need to carry out normal maintenance
    to the rustproofing and to make good any
    damage.



  • Page 257

    Car care
    Use a hose to clean the underside of the car
    thoroughly. After it has dried, use a brush or
    spray to apply a viscous anti-corrosion
    agent to any worn or damaged areas, to
    prevent the onset of corrosion.
    Even after the anti-corrosion warranty has
    expired, it makes good sense to continue to
    maintain the rustproofing.
    Seams in the body, especially those in the
    doors and trunk lid, are particularly vulnerable to corrosion from the outside, caused by
    grit and salt thrown up from the road, and to
    corrosion from the inside, largely as a result
    of condensation. Keep the seams clean and
    at the first sign of any rust, apply a thin, penetrating, anti-corrosion oil. Your Saab
    dealer will be pleased to give you further
    advice.

    255

    What causes rust?

    Preventive maintenance

    Steel body panels of automobiles are subject to rusting whenever air and moisture
    manage to penetrate the protective finish.
    Body panels may rust through if the process
    is unchecked. Rusting can occur wherever
    water is trapped or where the car’s panels
    are continuously damp.
    Damage to paint and undercoating by
    stones, gravel and minor crashes immediately exposes metal to air and moisture.
    Road salts used for de-icing will collect on
    the bottom of the car and promote rusting.
    Areas of the country with high humidity have
    a greater potential for rust problems, especially where salt is used on roads or there is
    moist sea air. Industrial pollution (fallout)
    may also damage paint and promote rusting.

    The following procedures are necessary to
    help protect against rusting. Refer also to
    the terms and conditions of the Performation Limited Warranty described in the warranty booklet.
    1 Wash the car frequently, and wax at
    least twice a year. Under adverse
    conditions, where there is a rapid
    buildup of dirt, sand or road salt, wash
    your car at least once a week. After
    extreme exposure to salted snow or
    slush, evidenced by a white film on the
    car, wash the car immediately. Frequent
    washing will prevent paint damage from
    acid rain and other airborne contaminants such as tree sap and bird droppings. If any of these contaminants are
    noticed on the car the finish should be
    washed immediately.
    • Begin washing by rinsing the entire car
    with water to loosen and flush off heavy
    concentrations of dirt (include the
    underbody).
    • Sponge the car with a solution of either
    a good quality car soap or mild general
    purpose (dish washing) detergent and
    water.
    • Rinse car thoroughly with clean water.
    • After washing, check and clear all
    drains in doors and body panels.
    • Wipe the car dry, preferably using a
    chamois.



  • Page 258

    256

    Car care

    2 Clean the underside of the car during
    the winter. Use high pressure water to
    clean the car’s underside (floor panels,
    wheel wells) at least at mid-winter and in
    the spring.
    3 Inspect the car frequently for leaks or
    damage, and arrange for needed
    repairs promptly. After washing or after
    heavy rain, check for leaks. When washing the car inspect body surfaces for
    paint damage. While checking for leaks,
    lift the floor mats and check underneath
    them. Water can collect in these areas
    and remain for prolonged periods. Dry
    any wet areas including the floor mats.
    Have leaks repaired as soon as possible.
    Use touch-up paint to repair small
    scratches or minor finish damage. Areas
    where metal is exposed will rust quickly
    and MUST be repaired immediately by
    touch-up or professional repainting.
    Rust must be removed, the bare metal
    primed and painted. Major body
    damage should be repaired immediately
    and new panels or exposed areas
    should be undercoated with anti- corrosion material.
    Repairs of this type are the owner’s
    responsibility and are not covered under
    warranty.

    Inspect the undercoating and touch up if
    necessary. Pay particular attention to the
    fenders and wheel housings, which are
    exposed to abrasion by flying gravel, etc. If
    the composition has worn or flaked off, the
    steel must be thoroughly cleaned and dried
    before a fresh coat is applied. The cleaning
    is best done with a scraper and a steel wire
    brush, followed by washing with solvent.
    Apply the new coating thinly, otherwise it
    may run off or fall off when dry.

    Recovery and/or
    recycling of automotive
    materials
    A typical car consists of metals (65–75 %),
    plastics (10–15 %), rubber (5 %) and small
    quantities of glass, wood, paper and textiles. The recycling of metals has been commonplace for a long time now.
    To facilitate the sorting of other materials,
    plastic parts, for instance, have been
    marked to identify the precise nature of the
    plastic.



  • Page 259

    Car care

    Air conditioning (A/C)
    WARNING
    • All repairs and adjustments to the A/C
    system must be carried out at a Saab
    dealer authorized for this kind of work.
    • The A/C system is pressurized. Do not
    break any connections or undo A/C
    system components.
    • Escaping gas can cause eye injury or
    other personal injury.

    Troubleshooting
    If a fault occurs in the A/C system, there are
    a number of checks you can perform yourself. If the fault persists, however, have the
    system checked at a Saab dealer.
    Note:
    When the A/C system is running, the intake
    air is dehumidified. The resultant condensation that forms on the evaporator is drained
    off under the car. When the car is parked,
    this may result in a small puddle forming on
    the ground. The warmer the air and the
    higher the relative humidity, the more condensation will be produced.

    Inadequate cooling
    NOTICE
    • The A/C system is designed for use
    with R134a refrigerant.
    • Refrigerant handling requires special
    equipment and special procedures for
    charging and draining the system.
    • Never mix R 134a with other refrigerants.

    a Check that the controls for temperature
    and air distribution are correctly set; see
    “Manual climate-control system” on
    page 103.
    b Check that the condenser (in front of the
    radiator) has not become clogged with
    dirt and insects.
    c Make sure that the compressor drive
    belt does not slip (see page 210).
    d Check the fuses for the ventilation fans
    and compressor (see page 229).

    257

    Maintenance
    NOTICE
    Do not use a pressure washer when
    cleaning the condenser or radiator due to
    the risk of damage.
    • The compressor drive belt should be
    inspected under the regular service
    program.
    • Clean away dirt and insects from the
    condenser and radiator to prevent clogging. When washing the car, use the hose
    to spray the radiator and condenser
    (located in front of the radiator) from both
    sides (both from the front of the car and
    from inside the engine bay). Do not use a
    pressure washer.
    Caution: Do not hose down the radiator and condenser while the engine is
    hot.
    Other than in extremely cold weather, do not
    screen the radiator, e.g. with netting, as this
    will greatly diminish its cooling capacity.
    • Applicable to the manual climate control
    system - During cold months the air conditioning should be switched on once or
    twice a month and run for 5–10 minutes
    during highway driving once the engine is
    warm.
    This action saves the gaskets in the
    compressor from being spoiled. The
    compressor uses a lubricant that circulates with the coolant.



  • Page 260

    258

    Car care

    Note:
    The A/C system cannot be switched on
    when the outside temperature is below 32°F
    (0°C). Turn on the A/C system when the car
    is standing in a warm place. Simplest is to
    always have the A/C button pressed in. The
    A/C system will then cut in automatically
    when the outside temperature is high
    enough.

    Headlight aiming
    WARNING
    Before checking/adjusting the headlight
    aiming, switch off the engine to avoid
    danger of fingers and hands being injured
    by moving parts.
    The radiator fan can start up even when
    the engine is switched off.
    The vehicle has a visual optical headlight
    aiming system equipped with vertical
    aiming device. The aim has been preset at
    the factory and should normally not need
    further adjustments.
    If your headlights are damaged in a crash,
    the headlight aim may be affected. If you
    believe your headlights need to be reaimed, we recommend that you take it to
    your Saab dealer for service. However, it is
    possible for you to re-aim your headlights as
    described in the following procedure.

    NOTICE
    To make sure that your headlights are
    aimed properly read all instructions
    before beginning. Failure to follow these
    instructions could cause damage to
    headlight parts or a not correctly aimed
    headlight.

    To check the aim, the vehicle should be
    properly prepared as follows:
    • The vehicle shall be placed so that the
    headlights are 25 ft (7.6 m) from a light
    colored wall or other flat surface. The
    aiming area should be darkened, this will
    improve your ability to see the beam of the
    low beam headlight being aimed.
    An optical headlamp aimer can also be
    used and will than replace the wall.
    • The vehicle must have all four wheels on
    a perfectly level surface which is level all
    the way to the wall or other flat surface.
    • The vehicle should be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall or other flat surface.
    • The vehicle should be unloaded and fuel
    tank full, and one person or 160 lbs.
    (75 kg) on the drivers seat.
    • The vehicle should be fully assembled
    and all other work stopped while headlight
    aiming is being done.
    • The vehicle should not have any snow, ice
    or mud attached to it.
    • Tires should be inflated to the prescribed
    pressure.
    • Close all doors.
    • Rock the vehicle to stabilize the suspension.
    Headlight aiming is done with the vehicle
    low beam lamps. The high beam lamps will
    be correctly aimed if the low beam lamps
    are aimed properly.
    If you find that the headlight needs adjustment follow these steps:



  • Page 261

    Car care

    1
    2
    3
    4

    Wall or garage door.
    25 ft (7.6 m) between wall and headlight lens.
    Measurement from the ground to the low beam aiming marker on the headlight lens.
    Same measurement as (3) but substract 2 inches.

    1 Open the hood and locate the vertical
    aiming devices there are two vertical
    aiming devices which shall be turned
    simultaneously and the same amount of
    turns.
    2 Locate the marker on the lens.
    3 Measure the distance from the ground to
    the aim marker No.1 on each lens.
    Subtract 2 inches.
    4 At the wall or other flat surface, measure
    from the ground to the recorded
    distance (see point 4) and draw a horizontal line the width of the vehicle.
    5 Cars with xenon lights:
    Xenon lights with automatic headlight
    levelling system must first do a refer-

    ence run before aiming: Start the engine
    and let the headlights do a reference
    run. Turn off the engine but leave the low
    beam on.
    Cars with halogen lights:
    Turn on the low beam headlights.
    Both variants:
    Place a piece of cardboard or equivalent
    (although not directly on the lens) in front
    of the headlight not being aimed. This
    should allow the beam cut-off of the
    headlight being aimed to be seen on the
    flat surface.

    Vertical aiming device

    1 Aiming marker on headlight lens

    259



  • Page 262

    260

    Car care

    NOTICE
    Do not cover a headlight directly on the
    lens to improve beam cut-off when
    aiming. Covering a headlight may cause
    excessive heat build-up that may cause
    damage to the headlight.
    6 Turn the two vertical aiming screws
    simultaneously in the same direction
    indicated on the headlight until the horizontal cut-off of the headlight is aligned
    with the horizontal line on the wall.
    7 If an optical headlight aimer device is
    used follow point 1 and 2 and center the
    lens of the optical headlight aimer
    device at the intersection of the two
    markers on the headlight lens.
    Then follow the instructions in the optical
    headlight aimer instruction manual and
    point 1, 2, 5, and 6 in this instruction.

    Horizontal line on wall or other flat surface

    Correctly adjusted low beam



  • Page 263

    Customer Assistance and Information

    261

    Customer Assistance and Information

    Maintenance schedule __
    Owner assistance ______
    Reporting Safety Defects
    (USA) _______________
    Reporting Safety Defects
    to the Canadian
    government__________
    Vehicle Data Collection
    and Event Data
    Recorders ___________

    262
    264
    265

    265

    266



  • Page 264

    262

    Customer Assistance and Information

    Maintenance schedule
    The Maintenance Schedule prescribes a
    service program to the purchaser/operator
    of a Saab that is reasonable and necessary
    to ensure the proper emission control systems function, safety and reliability of the
    Saab automobile in normal use. Additional
    maintenance is recommended for specific
    components when the car is operated under
    certain severe conditions. Proper maintenance is always a good practice!
    Authorized Saab dealers are equipped and
    trained to meet your Saab’s service needs.
    They regularly receive up-to-date Saab service manuals and parts and technical service bulletins from Saab and are able,
    through their franchise agreement, to attend
    Saab service schools, obtain Saab special
    tools and technical assistance and purchase original equipment service and
    replacement parts.
    Today’s complex automobiles should only
    be entrusted to the most knowledgeable
    service professionals. A Saab dealer is your
    best choice.

    SERVICE INTERVALS
    A time for service message will illuminate on
    the Saab Instrument Display (SID) when the
    car is due for regular maintenance. There
    are three different messages that will
    appear:
    TIME FOR INTERMEDIATE SERVICE
    indicates that an oil/filter change is required
    along with several inspections. This message is set by the engine management
    system which calculates service intervals
    based on several factors including driving
    habits, ambient temperature, number of
    cold starts, mileage driven and elapsed time
    since the last service. If mileage accumulation does not occur, the message will be set,
    and maintenance required at a maximum of
    2 years.
    TIME FOR MAIN AND INTERMEDIATE
    SERVICE
    indicates that an oil/filter change is required
    along with several inspections and additional maintenance such as air filter or spark
    plug replacement.

    TIME FOR MAIN SERVICE will be set when
    additional maintenance is necessary, such
    as air filter or spark plug replacement. When
    the message Time for service. is displayed,
    contact your Saab Dealer for a service
    appointment.
    Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
    in a timely manner may result in serious
    damage to key components or systems.



  • Page 265

    Customer Assistance and Information

    263

    Engine oil and filter changes

    Service record retention

    Service costs

    Changing the engine oil and filter is required
    at every service point. Use only a Saab
    approved long-life oil filter and engine oils
    meeting the SAE viscosity ratings and API
    service classifications stated in the “Technical data” section of this Owner’s Manual.
    The use of extra additives in the oil is not
    necessary and is not recommended, and
    may be harmful to turbochargers.
    More frequent oil changes are recommended if your vehicle is operated under
    any of the following conditions:

    It is the owner’s responsibility to retain service records. If possible, you should keep
    copies of all shop work orders for all service
    and repairs, whenever performed. As indicated in the new car and emission control
    system warranties, it is important to document that all necessary maintenance has
    been done.

    Dealer pricing practices and labor for service work vary. Saab’s recommended service times for each service point do not
    include the labor required to replace wear
    items, such as wiper blades, brake pads or
    tires. Nor is labor to perform other service or
    repairs found to be necessary as a result of
    the inspections included in these times.
    Additional labor and parts will be charged
    for such work when necessary, except as
    covered under an applicable Saab warranty
    or any optional extended service contract.
    Transmission fluid changes or suspension
    alignment, when necessary, are also additional.
    Dealer charges for general shop material,
    regulated hazardous waste removal, recycling expenses or other operation costs may
    also be applied to service and repair
    invoices and are apt to vary by dealer and
    location.

    • Most trips are less than 5–10 miles (8–
    16 km). This is particularly important
    when outside temperatures are below
    freezing.
    • Most trips include extensive idling
    (frequent stop-and-go traffic).
    • Most trips are through dusty areas (such
    as construction zones).
    • If the vehicle is used for delivery service,
    police, taxi or other commercial applications.
    If your driving habits match this description,
    have the engine oil and filter changed inbetween normal services. These conditions
    cause the engine oil to break down faster.
    The Warranties and Service Record Booklet has provisions to record extra oil
    changes.

    HOW THE SERVICE RECORD IS ORGANIZED
    The service record is comprised of a series
    of coupons on which to record services as
    they are performed. There are additional
    coupons for documenting extra engine oil
    and filter changes, extra automatic transmission fluid services necessary for severe
    service conditions, and brake fluid changes.
    HOW TO USE THE SERVICE RECORD
    COUPONS
    When the car is brought to a Saab dealer for
    scheduled maintenance, present the Warranties & Service Record Booklet to the service manager. When the technician has
    completed the service, the technician will
    sign the maintenance record. The person
    responsible for quality assurance at the
    dealership will also sign and stamp the
    record with the dealer identification stamp.



  • Page 266

    264

    Customer Assistance and Information

    Owner assistance

    Change of Address Notification
    (U.S. and Canada)

    Warranties and service problem
    assistance

    Two change of address cards are provided
    at the end of the Warranties and Service
    Record Booklet. Knowing your current
    address allows Saab to contact you in the
    event of a recall or service campaign.
    Please help us keep our records up to date
    for your own peace of mind.

    For complete information about all applicable warranties, including the New Car Warranty, Perforation Warranty, Vehicle Emission Warranty and Emission Perforation
    Warranty, consult the Warranties and Service Record Booklet which accompanies
    this Owner’s Manual. It also contains owner
    assistance information including Saab
    Roadside Assistance. If the booklet is lost or
    misplaced, a new one may be ordered
    through a Saab dealer or by contacting
    Saab.
    In the U.S. there is a national Customer
    Assistance Center at Saab Cars USA, Inc.
    The toll-free number to call from all 50 states
    is 1-800-955-9007.
    In Canada, please call the Saab Customer
    Assistance Centre at 1-800-263-1999.
    A list of authorized Saab sales and service
    dealers is available for those planning to
    travel in the United States and Canada.
    Canadian or U.S. travelers may call the
    Customer Assistance Center in the country
    in which they are traveling.

    Service information
    Factory Service Manuals for the Saab 9-3
    and 9-5 car lines can be ordered through
    your dealer. These are comprehensive
    manuals on CD rom, geared to use by professional technicians. Consult your Saab
    dealer for prices for your model.



  • Page 267

    Customer Assistance and Information

    Reporting Safety
    Defects (USA)
    If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
    which could cause a crash or could cause
    injury or death, you should immediately
    inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
    Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Saab Cars USA, Inc.
    If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
    may open an investigation, and if it finds that
    a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles,
    it may order a recall and remedy campaign.
    However, NHTSA cannot become involved
    in individual problems between you, your
    dealer, or Saab Cars USA, Inc.
    To contact NHTSA, you may either call the
    Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-4249393 (or 202/366-0123 in Washington D.C.
    area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department
    of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590.
    You can also obtain other information about
    motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.

    Reporting Safety
    Defects to the Canadian
    government
    If you live in Canada, and believe that your
    vehicle has a safety defect, you should
    immediately notify Transport Canada, in
    addition to notifying General Motors of
    Canada Limited.
    You may write to Transport Canada at Box
    8880, Ottawa, Ontario, K1G 3J2.
    In addition to notifying Transport Canada in
    a situation like this, we certainly hope you
    will notify us. In Canada, please call our
    Saab Customer Assistance Centre at 1800-263-1999.
    Or write:
    General Motors of Canada Limited
    Customer Assistance Centre,
    1908 Colonel Sam Drive,
    Oshawa, Ontario, L1H 8P7.

    265



  • Page 268

    266

    Customer Assistance and Information

    Vehicle Data Collection and
    Event Data Recorders
    Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
    Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor emission control components
    to optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions for air bag deployment and, if so
    equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and
    to help the driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations. Some information
    may be stored during regular operations to
    facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
    other information is stored only in a crash
    event by computer systems commonly
    called event data recorders (EDR).
    In a crash event, computer systems, such
    as the Air Bag Sensing and Diagnostic
    Module (SDM) in your vehicle may record
    information about the condition of the vehicle and how it was operated, such as data
    related to engine speed, brake application,
    throttle position, vehicle speed, steering
    wheel angle, lateral acceleration, safety belt
    usage, air bag readiness, air bag performance, and the severity of a collision. This
    information has been used to improve vehicle crash performance and may be used to
    improve crash performance of future vehicles and driving safety. Unlike the data
    recorders on many airplanes, these onboard systems do not record sounds, such
    as conversation of vehicle occupants.

    To read this information, special equipment
    is needed and access to the vehicle or the
    SDM is required.
    Saab will not access information about a
    crash event or share it with others other than
    • with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if
    the vehicle is leased, with the consent of
    the lessee,
    • in response to an official request of police
    or similar government office,
    • as part of Saab’s defense of litigation
    through the discovery process, or
    • as required by law.
    In addition, once Saab collects or receives
    data, Saab may
    • use the data for Saab research needs,
    • make it available for research where
    appropriate confidentiality is to be maintained and need is shown, or
    • share summary data which is not tied to a
    specific vehicle with non-Saab organizations for research purposes.
    Others, such as law enforcement, may have
    access to the special equipment that can
    read the information if they have access to
    the vehicle or SDM.
    If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®,
    please check the OnStar® subscription service agreement or manual for information
    on its operations and data collection.



  • Page 269

    Technical data

    267

    Technical data
    General data __________
    Engine _______________
    Engine oil_____________
    Fuel__________________
    Engines ______________
    Electrical system_______
    Drive belt _____________
    Manual transmission ___
    Automatic transmission _
    Suspension ___________
    Steering ______________
    Brake system__________
    Wheels and tires _______
    Plates and labels _______

    268
    270
    270
    271
    271
    272
    272
    272
    273
    273
    273
    274
    275
    278



  • Page 270

    268

    Technical data

    General data
    Overall length, including bumpers: ___
    Overall width, including door mirrors __
    Maximum height _________________
    Wheelbase _____________________
    Track:
    Front ____________________________
    Rear ____________________________
    Ground clearance at GVW _________
    Number of seats (incl. driver):
    Sport Sedan ______________________
    Convertible _______________________
    Turning circle:
    Measured at vehicle extremities _______
    Curb to curb ______________________
    Trunk length:
    Rear seat raised ___________________
    Rear seat lowered__________________
    Convertible _______________________
    Trunk volume (SAE):
    Sport Sedan ______________________
    Convertible, soft top raised ___________
    Convertible, soft top folded ___________

    182.5'' (4635 mm)
    80.2'' (2038 mm)
    57.8'' (1468 mm)
    105.3'' (2675 mm)
    59.8'' (1521 mm)
    59.3'' (1506 mm)
    approx. 120 mm
    5
    4
    37.4 ft. (11.4 m)
    35.4 ft. (10.8 m)
    40.8'' (1036 mm)
    69.8'' (1774 mm)
    29.1" (740 mm)
    15.0 cu.ft. (425 l)
    12.4 cu.ft. (352 l)
    8.3 cu.ft. (235 l)

    Permissible load (in addition to the driver) = GVW minus curb weight. The maximum
    permissible axle load, front or rear, must not be exceeded.
    The precise curb weight of the vehicle and load capacity are specified in the vehicle
    registration documents.

    V.I.N. label
    Curb weight
    (i.e. with full fuel tank, full washer fluid reservoir, standard tools and spare wheel):
    Sport Sedan ______________________ 3200–3420 lbs.
    (1450–1550 kg)
    Convertible _______________________ 3570–3700 lbs.
    (1620–1680 kg)
    Gross vehicle weight (GVW):
    Sport Sedan ______________________ 4120–4340 lbs.
    (1870–1970 kg)
    Convertible _______________________ 4460–4520 lbs.
    (2025–2050 kg)



  • Page 271

    Technical data
    Maximum axle load:
    Sport Sedan, front _________________
    Sport Sedan, rear __________________
    Convertible, front __________________
    Convertible, rear ___________________
    Weight distribution:
    Curb weight + driver (150 lbs. (68 kg)),
    front/rear (Sport Sedan and Convertible)
    GVW, front/rear (Sport Sedan and Convertible) __________________________
    Maximum roof load, Sport Sedan ____
    Maximum load in trunk:
    Sport Sedan ______________________
    Convertible _______________________
    The combined weight of occupants and
    cargo should never exceed:
    Sport Sedan ______________________
    Convertible _______________________
    Maximum combined weight of driver and
    passengers ___________________
    Sport Sedan (5x150 lbs.) ____________
    Convertible (4x150 lbs.) _____________

    2480 lbs. (1125 kg)
    2230 lbs. (1010 kg)
    2540 lbs. (1150 kg)
    2310 lbs. (1050 kg)

    approx. 60/40 %
    approx. 50/50 %
    220 lbs. (100 kg)
    175 lbs. (80 kg)
    220 lbs. (100 kg)

    WARNING
    • The GVW and maximum axle loads must not be exceeded.
    Note that if some accessories (e.g. towbar, CD changer) are
    fitted, the available load capacity is reduced by the weight of
    these.
    • When carrying a load in the trunk, make sure that it is lashed
    down securely, particularly when part or all of the rear seat is
    folded down.

    Trailer:
    Trailer with brakes ________________
    Trailer without brakes _____________
    Recommended towball load ________

    925 lbs. (420 kg)
    820 lbs. (372 kg)

    750 lbs. (340 kg)
    600 lbs. (272 kg)

    269

    Max. 3500 lbs.
    (1588 kg)
    Max. 1000 lbs.
    (450 kg)
    110–165 lbs.
    (50–75 kg)
    See also page 186.

    Maximum theoretical towing speed, trailer
    with brakes ____________________
    60 mph (100 km/h)
    When towing a trailer, increase the pressure
    of the rear tires by 20 kPa (3 psi).
    The above speed and weight restrictions are those specified by
    Saab Automobile AB.
    Note that national restrictions may apply to trailer speeds and
    weights (see page 184).



  • Page 272

    270

    Technical data

    Engine
    Type:

    Cylinder bore____________________
    Stroke _________________________
    Swept volume ___________________
    Idling speed_____________________

    Antifreeze ______________________
    Coolant capacity _________________

    Engine oil
    Four cylinders,
    double overhead
    camshafts,
    16 valves, two
    balancer shafts
    3.386'' (86 mm)
    3.386'' (86 mm)
    122 cu.in. (1.998 l)
    720 rpm.
    When the engine
    load increases, e.g.
    the steering wheel is
    turned, the idling
    speed is raised to
    900 rpm.
    Saab-approved
    antifreeze
    7.5 qts. (7.1 l)

    To meet demands in Saab's extended service intervals all engines are filled with specially designed synthetic factory fill oils.
    Long service intervals, fuel economy and environmental issues
    are the base for our choice of oil. By using oils approved by
    Saab you minimise the tendencies for oil sludge build, by that
    protecting the engine from harmful, wear increasing, deposits.
    Approved oils:
    All gasoline engines - Fully Synthetic Engine Oil fulfilling GMLL-A-025 requirements.
    To ensure being able to take advantage of the Saab specified
    service intervals, be sure to select a fully synthetic engine oil
    fulfilling GM-LL-A-025 requirements.
    Servicing/Oil changes:
    To be able to use recommended service intervals the need to
    use only approved engine oils is vital. Use only engine oils approved for your engine. Service should be done according to
    the recommended service intervals to optimize your engine's
    function through out its entire life. Saab Automobile AB will not
    take responsibility for any damage that might occur due to neglecting to meet above mentioned requirements.
    At your Saab dealers you can find Saab Genuine or Mobil engine oils. Among those there are oils specially designed to meet
    your engines specific needs. We recommend that you, with the
    help of our skilled service personnel, choose your oil from that
    selection.
    Other oil companies also have engine oils approved according
    to GM specifications. Oils meeting these standards may be
    identified as synthetic. However, not all synthetic oils will meet
    your engines requirements. You should only use oil that meets
    your engines specific requirements (GM-LL-A-025).



  • Page 273

    Technical data
    Recommended oil viscosities.
    Viscosity is a measurement of the oils thickness. The thickness
    influences, among other things, the fuel economy. For best
    function Saab recommends:
    For gasoline engines:
    SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-30 or SAE 0W-40 engine oil.
    Extra engine oil additives.
    Don't add anything to your oil. The recommended oils are all
    you will need for good engine performance and protection.
    When to change engine oil.
    Your vehicle has a display (SID) where time for service will be
    shown. Based not only on mileage but also on driving conditions the mileage at which a service will be indicated can vary
    considerably.
    Under normal circumstances the service indication will come on
    at or around 15 000 miles or 2 years.
    For this service system to work it is of outmost importance that
    the right engine oil is used.
    When the message for service is displayed you need to have
    the required service done as soon as possible.
    After the service your service personnel will reset the service indicator. It is important to reset the service indicator in order to
    optimize the time to the next service.
    Oil capacity, including filter (oil change)

    6.3 qts. (6.0 l)

    271

    Fuel
    Fuel tank capacity________________

    16.05 U.S. gal. (61 l)

    For optimum performance Saab recommends:
    2.0t 175 hp – AON 90.
    2.0T 210 hp – AON 90.
    Gasoline with a lower octane rating can be used, although not
    lower than AON 87. However, engine performance will fall
    slightly and heavy loading and laboring should be avoided. For
    optimum performance, use the recommended grade of fuel.
    For further information on fuel, see page 155.

    Engines
    2.0t Ecopower
    Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ____________
    Maximum torque, EEC at 2500 rpm ____
    Compression ratio _________________

    175 hp (129 kW)
    195 ft.lb. (265 Nm)
    9.5:1

    2.0T Ecopower
    Rating, EEC at 5300 rpm ____________
    Maximum torque, EEC at 2500 rpm ____
    Compression ratio _________________

    210 hp (155 kW)
    221 ft.lb. (300 Nm)
    9.5:1



  • Page 274

    272

    Technical data

    Electrical system
    Voltage ________________________
    Battery capacity _________________
    Starter motor ____________________
    Alternator rating:
    Manual gearbox ___________________
    Automatic gearbox _________________
    Firing order _____________________
    Spark plugs:
    Type ____________________________
    Electrode gap _____________________
    Tightening torque __________________

    Manual transmission
    12 V
    60 Ah
    1.8 kW
    120 A/14 V
    140 A/14 V
    1-3-4-2
    NGK PFR6T-10G
    0.9–1.0 mm
    20 ft.lb. (28 Nm)

    Drive belt
    Outside length ___________________

    Drive belt

    40.472'' (1028 mm)

    Type __________________________

    Oil type (for topping up)____________
    Oil capacity:
    5-speed _________________________
    6-speed, 2.0 Turbo _________________
    Speed, mph (km/h) at 1000 rpm in highest
    gear (5th gear) _________________
    Speed, mph (km/h) at 1000 rpm in highest
    gear (6th gear) _________________

    Fully synchronized
    with final drive gear
    and differential
    Saab MTF 0063
    1.9 qts. (1.8 l), to
    level plug
    3.15 qts. (3.0 l)
    27–30 (43–48)
    29–34 (46–55)



  • Page 275

    Technical data
    Automatic transmission
    Type __________________________

    Selector lever positions ____________
    Oil capacity, total _________________
    Oil type ________________________
    Clutch type _____________________

    273

    Suspension
    Electronically controlled, 5-speed,
    fully-automatic with
    hydraulic torque
    converter, planetary
    gears and integral
    final drive.
    Lock-up function in
    selector positions 3,
    4 and 5.
    P, R, N, D, M
    7.6 qts. (7.2 litres)
    Saab 3309
    Hydraulic plate
    clutches, brake
    bands and one-way
    couplings

    Speed (mph/km/h) at 1000 rpm in top gear:
    2.0t and 2.0T _____________________ 28–29/46–47

    Spring type, front and rear _________
    Maximum deflection of springs:
    Front ____________________________
    Rear ____________________________
    Dampers, front and rear ___________

    Coil springs
    7.0'' (178 mm)
    8.3'' (212 mm)
    Gas-filled dampers

    Steering
    Steering _______________________

    Number of turns, lock to lock________
    Oil type ________________________

    Power-assisted
    steering gear of
    rack-pinion type and
    telescopic jointed
    steering column
    2.97
    Power steering fluid
    CHF 11S or
    CHF 202



  • Page 276

    274

    Technical data

    Brake system
    Foot brake (ABS)_________________

    Park brake______________________
    Brake fluid ______________________

    Hydraulic disc
    brakes with vacuum
    servo unit. Diagonally split circuits;
    ventilated discs on
    front wheels (some
    variants also have
    ventilated rear
    discs). EBD function
    (see page 167).
    Acts on rear wheels
    To DOT 4.
    Do not use DOT 5.

    Disc diameter:
    Front ____________________________
    Front (certain variants only) *) ________
    Rear ____________________________
    Rear (certain variants only) *) ________
    Total friction area of brake pads:
    Front ____________________________
    Rear ____________________________
    *)15" wheels and 16" aluminium wheels
    must not be fitted to these variants since
    the diameter of the brake discs does not
    allow this.
    **) ventilated

    11.14 in.
    (283 mm) **)
    11.81 in.
    (300 mm) **)
    10.94 in. (278 mm)
    11.42 in.
    (290 mm) **)
    9.30 in.² (60 cm²)
    4.96 in.² (32 cm²)

    Hydraulic unit for soft top, Convertible
    Oil capacity_______________________
    Oil type __________________________

    0.6 qt. (0.6 l)
    CHF 11S



  • Page 277

    Technical data
    Wheels and tires
    All season tires
    6.5 x 15" _________________________
    6.5 x 16" _________________________
    7 x 17"___________________________
    Summer tires
    7 x 17"___________________________

    275

    NOTICE
    205/65 R15 94 H
    215/55 R16 93 H
    225/45 R17 94 V
    RF/XL

    225/45 R17 94 W
    RF/XL
    Always contact a Saab dealer if you plan to fit other wheels or
    tires than those fitted as standard.
    Winter (snow) tires:
    6.5 x 15" wheel ____________________ 205/65 R15 91 Q
    M+S
    6.5 x 16" wheel ____________________ 215/55 R16 93 Q
    7 x 17" wheel _____________________ 225/45 R17 94 Q
    M+S RF/XL
    Compact spare:
    Wheel ___________________________ 4 x 16"
    Tire _____________________________ 125/85 R16 99 M
    Pressure _________________________ 420 kPa (60 psi)
    Maximum life______________________ 2200 miles
    (3500 km)
    Maximum speed ___________________ 50 mph (80 km/h)

    Snow chains:
    Snow chains must not be fitted to the rear wheels, and may only
    be used with the following wheel-tire combinations:
    Wheels
    Tires
    6.5 x 15"_______ 205/65 R15 M+S or
    205/65 R15
    6.5 x 16"_______ 215/55 R16 M+S or
    215/55 R16
    Contact your Saab dealer regarding suitable snow chains.
    Max. permissible speed with snow chains fitted is 30 mph
    (50 km/h).
    Snow chains must not be fitted to wheels larger than 16".

    NOTICE
    Wheels larger than 17" must not be fitted for reasons stated on
    page 237.
    Exercise care when driving on uneven roads or against the curb
    if the car is heavily laden. This particularly applies to cars with
    17" wheels.
    Permitted wheel offset is 41 mm.



  • Page 278

    276

    Technical data

    Recommended tire/engine combinations
    2.0t

    2.0 Turbo

    205/65 R15 94 H

    x



    215/55 R16 93 H

    x



    225/45 R17 94 V RF/XL

    x

    x

    x

    x

    205/65 R15 94 Q

    x



    215/55 R16 93 Q

    x

    x

    225/45 R17 94 Q RF/XL

    x

    x

    6.5 x 15"

    x



    6.5 x 16"

    x

    x

    7 x 17"

    x

    x

    All season tires

    Summer tires
    225/45 R17 94 W RF/XL
    Winter (snow) tires

    Wheel sizes

    RF/XL = Reinforced (or Extra Load) tire.



  • Page 279

    Technical data

    277

    Recommended lowest tire pressure, cold tires
    Tire size
    All season tires
    205/65 R15 94 H

    215/55 R16 93 H

    225/45 R17 94 V
    RF/XL
    Summer tires
    225/45 R17 94 W
    RF/XL
    Winter tires
    205/65 R15 91 Q
    215/55 R16 93 Q
    225/45 R17 94 Q
    RF/XL
    Compact spare
    125/85 R16 99 M

    Load/speed
    mph (km/h) *
    1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160)
    4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160)
    1–5 pers./100– (160–)
    1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160)
    4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160)
    1–5 pers./100– (160–)
    1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160)
    4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160)
    1–5 pers./100– (160–)

    Front
    Rear
    kPa/psi kPa/psi
    220/32
    220/32
    260/38
    240/35
    240/35
    280/41
    240/35
    240/35
    280/41

    220/32
    220/32
    260/38
    220/32
    220/32
    260/38
    240/35
    240/35
    280/41

    1–3 pers./0–120 (0–190) 240/35 240/35
    4–5 pers./0–120 (0–190) 240/35 240/35
    1–5 pers./120– (190–) 280/41 280/41
    1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160)
    4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160)
    1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160)
    4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160)
    1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160)
    4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160)
    Max 50 (80)

    240/35
    280/41
    240/35
    280/41
    250/36
    290/42

    240/35
    280/41
    240/35
    280/41
    250/36
    290/42

    420/60 420/60

    * Do not exceed posted speed limits.
    By cold tires is meant tires that are the same temperature as the surrounding air temperature.
    The values for tire pressure in table above are for tires at 68°F
    (20°C).
    The tire pressure will increase as the tires become warm (e.g. during
    highway driving), and decrease as they cool.
    When the temperature of the tires increases or decreases by 10
    degrees the tire pressure will correspondingly increase or decrease
    by 2 psi/10 kPa.



  • Page 280

    278

    Technical data

    Plates and labels
    When contacting your Saab dealer it may
    sometimes be necessary to quote the car’s
    vehicle identification, engine and gearbox
    numbers.
    1 V.I.N. number and barcode, inside windshield
    2 Gearbox number
    3 Engine number
    4 USA: Label for color codes (trim and
    body). Tire information label can be found
    on the B-pillar. See also page 243.
    Canada: Label for tire pressure and color
    codes (trim and body)
    5 Certification label
    6 Chassis number (stamped on body).



  • Page 281

    Technical data
    Position:

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
    12
    | | | | | | | | | | |
    |
    Vehicle identifi- Y S 3 F D 4 9 Y X 5 1 016584
    cation number:

    | | | | | |
    1 2 3 4 5 6 = identification codes for certain chassis components
    1 Region ________
    2 Country _______
    3 Manufacturer ___
    4 Product line ____
    5

    Model series ___

    Y = Northern Europe
    S = Sweden
    3 = Saab Automobile AB
    F = 9-3
    B = 9-3 Linear
    D = 9-3 Arc
    F = 9-3 Aero

    6

    Body version ___

    7

    Gearbox _______

    8

    Engine variant __

    9
    10

    Check digit_____
    Model year ____

    11

    Factory _______

    12

    Serial number __

    4 = 4-door
    7= Convertible
    5 = 5-speed manual
    6 = 6-speed manual
    9 = 5-speed automatic
    S = 2.0t
    Y = 2.0 Turbo
    0-9 or X
    5 = 2005
    1 = Trollhättan
    6 = Graz
    000001-999999

    279



  • Page 282

    280

    Technical data

    Several of the systems in your
    Saab can be customized to better
    suit your individual needs.
    Contact your Saab dealer
    Central locking system
    Some functions are governed by legal
    requirements and cannot therefore be
    reprogrammed.
    Consult a Saab dealer for further information.
    Listed below are a number of examples of
    programmable functions.
    • Audible confirmation of arming/disarming
    the car alarm.
    • Automatic unlocking when car stopped
    and remote control removed from the ignition switch.
    • Trunk lid locked when car driven off or
    30 s after being shut.

    Courtesy Headlamp Feature
    • The length of time the lights are on.
    • Whether the reversing light or tail lights
    should come on as well as the dipped
    beam.
    Automatic Climate System (ACC)
    • To prevent the smell of washer fluid from
    entering the car, recirculation can be activated automatically while the windshield
    is washed. The recirculation symbol will
    however not light up. This function is
    optional; contact a Saab dealer.
    • Convertible: A/C compressor not
    switched off when the soft top is open.



  • Page 283

    Technical data
    Warning and indications that can
    be shown on the SID
    Which warnings and indications that can be
    shown depends on engine variant and car
    specification.

    Hot engine.
    Make a safe stop.
    Run engine on idle.

    Key not accepted.
    Contact Saab dealer.

    Airbag malfunction.
    Contact Saab dealer.

    Remote control battery
    low. Replace battery.

    Use your seatbelt.

    2: standard key
    0: valet key
    Key No: 1

    Symbol Text
    Antilock brake malfunction.
    Contact Saab dealer.
    Brake malfunction.
    Make a safe stop.
    Contact Saab dealer.
    Brake fluid level low.
    Make a safe stop.
    Contact Saab dealer.
    Release parking brake.
    Oil pressure low.
    Make a safe stop.
    Turn off engine.
    Low engine oil level.
    Fill oil now.
    Engine malfunction.
    Contact Saab dealer.
    Coolant level low.
    Refill.

    Gearbox malfunction.
    Limited performance.
    Contact Saab dealer.
    Gearbox too hot.
    Make a safe stop.
    Open hood to cool down.
    Battery not charging.
    Make a safe stop.
    Contact Saab dealer.
    Headlight levelling
    malfunction.
    Contact Saab dealer.

    Lock system failure.
    Contact Saab dealer.
    Steering lock malfunc.
    Make a safe stop.
    Contact Saab dealer.
    Steering wheel locked.
    Pull out key, turn steering
    wheel. Try again.
    Immobilizer failure.
    Try starting again.
    Contact Saab dealer.

    Tap brakes lightly before
    using cruise control.

    Theft protection failure.
    Contact Saab dealer.

    Traction control failure.
    Contact Saab dealer.

    Alarm has been triggered
    since being armed.

    Stability control failure.
    Contact Saab dealer.

    Rear left seat backrest
    unlocked.

    Washer fluid level low.
    Refill.

    Rear right seat backrest
    unlocked.

    281



  • Page 284

    282

    Technical data
    Parking assistance
    Contact Saab dealer.

    Left front turn signal
    failure.

    Parking assistance sensor
    interference.

    Left rear turn signal
    failure.

    Close doors.

    Right front turn signal
    failure.

    Left brake light failure

    Right rear turn signal
    failure.

    Left high beam failure.

    Left rear position light
    failure.

    Left low beam failure.

    Right rear position light
    failure.

    Rear fog light failure.

    Time for service.

    Right brake light failure.

    Right high beam failure.

    Right low beam failure.
    High mounted brake light
    failure.



  • Page 285

    Index

    Index

    Braking _______________________
    Bulb changing __________________
    Bulb table _____________________
    Buying new tires ________________

    A
    A/C __________________________ 106
    ABS brakes ____________________ 167
    ACC _________________________ 108
    Adjustment, steering wheel ________ 122
    Air conditioning _________________ 106
    Air filter _______________________ 204
    Airbag _________________________ 29
    Anchorage eyes ________________ 143
    Anti-corrosion treatment __________ 254
    Antilock braking system __________ 167
    Anti-spin ______________________ 169
    Ashtrays ______________________ 132
    Autochecking of lights, warning and
    indicator lights __________________ 82
    Autodimming _______________ 135, 136
    Automatic climate control (ACC) ____ 108
    Automatic transmission ___________ 159

    B
    Battery ________________________
    Bedding-in of new brake pads _____
    Before towing a trailer ____________
    Brake fluid, grade _______________
    Brakes ________________________

    208
    157
    187
    274
    166

    166
    213
    226
    236

    C
    Cabin lighting __________________ 129
    Cabin lighting, Convertible _________ 72
    Car alarm ______________________ 50
    Car transport ___________________ 192
    Care of air conditioning ___________ 257
    Change of address notification _____ 264
    Changing a tire _________________ 248
    Changing bulbs _________________ 213
    Changing engine oil _____________ 203
    Changing the battery, remote control _ 48
    Changing wiper blades ___________ 211
    Checking the number of remote
    controls _______________________ 47
    Checks before towing a trailer ______ 187
    Child safety _____________________ 22
    Child safety locks, rear doors _______ 46
    Child seats _____________________ 22
    Cigarette lighter _________________ 132
    Cleaning the engine bay __________ 252
    Cleaning upholstery _____________ 251
    Climate control system, manual ____ 103
    Closing the soft top manually,
    Convertible ____________________ 62
    Closing the soft top, Convertible _____ 58

    283

    Clutch interlock _________________ 158
    Compact spare _________________ 246
    Compass ______________________ 139
    Condensation water, A/C _________ 106
    Convertible _____________________ 55
    Convertible, washing _____________ 253
    Coolant _______________________ 205
    Crash memory, see EDR _________ 266
    Cruise control __________________ 165
    Cup holder _____________________ 130

    D
    Date codes, tires ________________ 246
    Deep water, driving through _______ 189
    Definitions and terminology, tire ____ 243
    Determining correct load, tires _____ 245
    Direction indicator stalk switch ______ 98
    Direction indicators _______________ 98
    Dome light, Convertible ___________ 223
    Dome light, Sport Sedan __________ 222
    Donor battery, boost starting _______ 193
    Door handles ____________________ 42
    Door mirrors ___________________ 134
    Drive belt ______________________ 210
    Drive belt, length ________________ 272
    Driver’s seat with memory __________ 20
    Driving at night _________________ 190
    Driving in cold climates ___________ 181
    Driving in deep water _____________ 189
    Driving in hot climates ____________ 183



  • Page 286

    284

    Index

    Driving techniques ______________
    Driving with a heavy load on hilly
    roads ________________________
    Driving with a load _______________
    Driving with a roof load ___________
    Driving with the compact spare wheel
    Driving with the trunk lid open ______

    179
    161
    189
    188
    193
    189

    Engine oil, volume _______________ 271
    Engine temperature gauge _________ 84
    Engine, description ______________ 199
    Engine, technical data ____________ 270
    Engines _______________________ 271
    Event Data Recorders (EDR) ______ 266
    Extra electrical socket ____________ 132

    E

    F

    EDR (Event Data Recorders) ______ 266
    ESP, anti-skid system ____________ 171
    Easy entry, Convertible ____________ 67
    Economical motoring ____________ 179
    Electric engine heater ____________ 180
    Electric heating, front seats ____ 107, 116
    Electric windows ________________ 123
    Electric windows, Convertible _______ 71
    Electrical system, technical data ____ 272
    Electrically adjustable seats ________ 19
    Electronic Stability Program (ESP) __ 171
    Electronic steering wheel lock ______ 148
    Emergency opening of the narrow
    backrest _____________________ 144
    Emergency operation of the sunroof _ 128
    Engine bay, cleaning _____________ 252
    Engine heater __________________ 180
    Engine immobilizer _______________ 49
    Engine number _________________ 278
    Engine oil, checking _____________ 202
    Engine oil, grade ________________ 270

    Facilitating entry to rear seat,
    Convertible ____________________ 67
    Factors affecting fuel consumption __ 179
    Filler cap ______________________ 154
    Filling a portable fuel container _____ 155
    Filling up ______________________ 153
    Flat spots, tires _________________ 235
    Floor jack ______________________ 249
    Folding down the rear seat ________ 140
    Front fog lights __________________ 98
    Front towing eye ________________ 190
    Fuel container __________________ 155
    Fuel gauge _____________________ 85
    Fuel grade _____________________ 271
    Fuel information ________________ 155
    Functions, car alarm ______________ 53
    Fuse panel in luggage compartment _ 230
    Fuse table _____________________ 229
    Fuses ________________________ 227

    G
    GDO, garage door opener _________ 136
    Gear selector indicator, automatic transmission _______________________ 86
    Gearbox number ________________ 278
    General safety instructions, Convertible 56
    Glovebox ______________________ 132
    Glovebox lighting ________________ 224

    H
    Handbrake _____________________ 173
    Hazard warning lights _____________ 99
    Head restraint, Convertible _________ 68
    Head restraints __________________ 21
    Headlight flasher _________________ 97
    Headlight levelling ________________ 96
    Headlights ______________________ 96
    Heated door mirrors _____________ 107
    Hood _________________________ 198
    Horn __________________________ 122
    Horn button ____________________ 122

    I
    If a tire goes flat _________________ 240
    Ignition switch __________________ 146
    Immobilizer _____________________ 49
    Important considerations for driving _ 150



  • Page 287

    Index
    Important information, petrol-engined
    cars with catalytic converters _____ 151
    Indicator lights ___________________ 78
    Inflation, tires ___________________ 234
    Information about fuel ____________ 155
    Instrument illumination, adjusting ____ 97
    Interior lighting _________________ 129
    Interior lighting, Convertible ________ 72
    Interior rearview mirror ___________ 135
    Intermittent malfunctioning, central
    locking _______________________ 44

    J
    Jump starting __________________ 193

    K
    Key ___________________________ 42
    Kick-down _____________________ 161

    L
    LATCH (child safety) ______________ 23
    Labeling, tire sidewall ____________ 241
    Labels and plates, location ________ 278
    Lashing eyes ___________________ 143
    Laying the car up _______________ 175
    Leather upholstery, cleaning _______ 251

    Lighting in luggage compartment,
    Convertible ____________________ 73
    Limp-home ____________________ 150
    Limp-home, automatic transmission _ 162
    Load carriers, roof _______________ 188
    Load indices, tires _______________ 242
    Loading your vehicle _____________ 243
    Load-through hatch ______________ 142
    Locking a car with flat battery _______ 45
    Locks __________________________ 42
    Long-term parking _______________ 175
    Luggage compartment ___________ 140
    Luggage compartment lighting _ 130, 144
    Luggage compartment lighting,
    Convertible ____________________ 73
    Luggage compartment lighting,
    changing _____________________ 224

    285

    Milometer _______________________ 83
    Mug holder ____________________ 130

    N
    New tires, buying ________________ 236
    Night driving ___________________ 190
    Number plate lighting, changing ____ 224

    O
    ORVR ________________________ 200
    Oil capacity, engine ______________ 271
    Opening handles _________________ 42
    Opening the soft top, Convertible ____ 58
    Outside mirrors _________________ 134
    Owner assistance _______________ 264

    M
    MAXI fuses ____________________ 228
    Main instrument panel _____________ 78
    Main/dipped beam ________________ 97
    Maintenance schedule ___________ 262
    Manual climate control ___________ 103
    Manual gear selection ____________ 164
    Manual gearbox ________________ 158
    Manual tripping of car alarm ________ 52
    Materials used in the car, reclamation 256
    Memory, driver’s seat _____________ 20
    Messages on SID, Convertible ______ 65

    P
    Panic function, car alarm ___________ 52
    Park Brake Shift Lock ____________ 160
    Park Brake Shift Lock, temporary
    override ______________________ 162
    Parking _______________________ 173
    Parking aid ____________________ 176
    Parking brake __________________ 173
    Parking on a hill _________________ 174
    Pinch protection, electric windows __ 124



  • Page 288

    286

    Index

    Pinch protection, sunroof _________ 128
    Plates and labels, location ________ 278
    Polishing and waxing ____________ 253
    Poly-V-belt ____________________ 210
    Portable fuel container ___________ 155
    Position lights ___________________ 96
    Power steering fluid, checking _____ 207
    Power steering fluid, grade ________ 273
    Pressure gauge __________________ 84
    Pressure, tires __________________ 234
    Profiles, customized settings _______ 87

    Q
    Quality grading, tires _____________ 238
    Quick guide, remote control ________ 43

    R
    Rain sensor ____________________ 101
    Raising the soft top manually,
    Convertible ____________________ 62
    Reading lights, Convertible _________ 72
    Rear fog light ____________________ 98
    Rear seats, folding down _________ 140
    Rear towing eye ________________ 191
    Rear window heating ____________ 107
    Rearview mirrors ________________ 134
    Recirculation ___________________ 106

    Recommendations for automatic
    transmission, towing a trailer _____ 185
    Recommendations for manual
    gearbox, towing a trailer _________ 186
    Recommended snow chains _______ 275
    Refueling ______________________ 153
    Remote control __________________ 42
    Remote locking malfunction ________ 44
    Replacement, wheel _____________ 239
    Reporting safety defects __________ 265
    Rev counter _____________________ 82
    Reversing lights __________________ 99
    Rollover Pop-up Bars, Convertible ___ 70
    Roof lighting ___________________ 129
    Roof lighting, changing ___________ 222
    Running-in _____________________ 157

    S
    SAHR, head restraint _____________ 21
    SDM _________________________ 266
    SID ___________________________ 87
    SPA __________________________ 176
    Saab Information Display __________ 87
    Saab Parking Assistance _________ 176
    Saab Trionic engine management
    system _______________________ 200
    Safety belts _____________________ 12
    Seatbelts _______________________ 12
    Seatbelts in rear seat, Convertible ___ 69
    Seatbelts, care _________________ 251

    Seatbelts, checking ______________ 251
    Seats __________________________ 17
    Securing a load _________________ 143
    Sentronic, manual gear selection ___ 164
    Service costs ___________________ 263
    Service information ______________ 264
    Service intervals ________________ 262
    Service record retention __________ 263
    Signalling, horn _________________ 122
    Ski hatch ______________________ 142
    Spare wheel ___________________ 246
    Speed ratings, tires ______________ 242
    Speedometer ____________________ 83
    Starting the engine ______________ 148
    Steering wheel adjustment ________ 122
    Steering wheel lock ______________ 148
    Steps for determining correct load
    limit _________________________ 245
    Storage compartments ___________ 132
    Sun visor ______________________ 130
    Sunroof _______________________ 126
    Switches _______________________ 96

    T
    TCS __________________________ 169
    Technical data __________________ 268
    Textile carpeting, cleaning _________ 252
    Tie down eyes __________________ 143
    Tightening torque, wheels _________ 250



  • Page 289

    Index
    Tire chains ____________________ 240
    Tire date code __________________ 246
    Tire inspection and rotation ________ 235
    Tire markings __________________ 242
    Tire sidewall labeling _____________ 241
    Tire sizes ______________________ 275
    Tire terminology and definitions ____ 243
    Tire, changing __________________ 248
    Tire, spare _____________________ 246
    Tires _________________________ 234
    Tools and spare wheel ___________ 246
    Touching up paintwork ___________ 253
    Towbar _______________________ 184
    Towbar load ___________________ 186
    Towing _______________________ 190
    Towing a trailer _________________ 184
    Towing the car _________________ 191
    Traction Control System (TCS) _____ 169
    Transmission oil, checking ________ 204
    Transmission oil, grade ___________ 272
    Transmission, automatic __________ 159
    Transmission, manual ____________ 158
    Transporting the car _____________ 192
    Treadwear indicators ____________ 236
    Trip computer ___________________ 88
    Trip meter ______________________ 83
    Troubleshooting, A/C and ACC _____ 257
    Trunk lid, driving when open _______ 189
    Trunk lid, opening ________________ 45
    Turbo gauge ____________________ 84

    U
    Uniform tire quality grading ________
    Upholstery care _________________
    Upholstery, cleaning _____________
    Useful tips on night driving ________
    Useful tips on starting ____________

    238
    251
    251
    190
    149

    V
    Vanity mirror ___________________
    Vehicle Data Collection ___________
    Vehicle identification number ______
    Vehicle recovery ________________

    130
    266
    278
    192

    W
    Warning labels ___________________ 7
    Warning lights ___________________ 78
    Warning triangle _________________ 99
    Warnings and messages on SID,
    Convertible ____________________ 65
    Washer fluid ___________________ 211
    Washer jets ____________________ 212
    Washers ______________________ 100
    Washing ______________________ 252
    Washing a Convertible ___________ 253
    Waxing and polishing ____________ 253
    Wear indicators, tires ____________ 236

    287

    What Will You See After an Airbag
    Inflates? _______________________ 37
    Wheel replacement ______________ 239
    Wheels and tires, sizes ___________ 275
    When it is time for new tires _______ 236
    Windshield washers _____________ 100
    Windshield wipers _______________ 100
    Wing mirrors ___________________ 134
    Winter driving __________________ 181
    Winter tires ____________________ 245
    Wiper blades ___________________ 211
    Wipers ________________________ 100

    X
    Xenon headlights ________________ 214
    Xenon headlights, head light levelling _ 96



  • Page 290

    288

    Notes

    Notes



  • Page 291

    Fuel

    3 Brake/clutch fluid
    Top up as necessary with
    DOT 4 brake fluid.
    Do not use DOT 5 fluid.

    Recommended octane rating:
    Unleaded
    gasoline
    87–93 AON
    For optimum performance
    Saab recommends:
    • 2.0t 175 hp – AON 90.
    • 2.0T 210 hp – AON 90.

    4 Battery

    Fuel tank
    capacity:

    6 Washer fluid

    5 Fuse panel

    16.05 g
    (61 l)

    7 Power steering

    IMPORTANT: Do not overfill.
    The level must not come up into
    the fuel filler pipe because the
    fuel must have room to expand.

    Steering-servo oil, CHF 11S
    (P/N 8996860). Use GM Power
    Steering Fluid to top up in emergency.

    1 Engine oil

    2 Coolant

    8 Dipstick, engine oil

    For information see chapter
    "Technical data".

    When the engine is cold, the
    coolant must not lie above the
    KALT/COLD mark on the
    expansion tank (boundary
    between the upper and lower
    sections of the tank.
    Top up with a mixture of equal
    parts of Saab-approved antifreeze and clean water.

    See section "Car care" regarding engine oil level.



  • Page 292

    NOTICE
    Change of engine oil and oil filter may be required more
    frequently if the car is being used under certain conditions, see
    section "Customer Assistance and Information".

    Saab Automobile AB, Trollhättan, Sweden

    US/CA MY2005 Ordering nr. 42 92 17.
    Printed in Sweden on chlorine-free paper 2004-04.
    © Copyright Saab Automobile AB, 2004.
    All information and illustrations in this manual are based on the specifications that were available at the time of printing. Model variants, technical data and equipment vary from market to market, and may be
    altered without prior notice.
    Note that illustrations in this manual can depict cars fitted with extra
    equipment. Your Saab dealer will be pleased to inform you of the exact
    specifacations that apply to your market.






Missbrauch melden von Frage und/oder Antwort

Libble nimmt den Missbrauch seiner Dienste sehr ernst. Wir setzen uns dafür ein, derartige Missbrauchsfälle gemäß den Gesetzen Ihres Heimatlandes zu behandeln. Wenn Sie eine Meldung übermitteln, überprüfen wir Ihre Informationen und ergreifen entsprechende Maßnahmen. Wir melden uns nur dann wieder bei Ihnen, wenn wir weitere Einzelheiten wissen müssen oder weitere Informationen für Sie haben.

Art des Missbrauchs:

Zum Beispiel antisemitische Inhalte, rassistische Inhalte oder Material, das zu einer Gewalttat führen könnte.

Beispielsweise eine Kreditkartennummer, persönliche Identifikationsnummer oder unveröffentlichte Privatadresse. Beachten Sie, dass E-Mail-Adressen und der vollständige Name nicht als private Informationen angesehen werden.

Forenregeln

Um zu sinnvolle Fragen zu kommen halten Sie sich bitte an folgende Spielregeln:

Neu registrieren

Registrieren auf E - Mails für Saab 9-3 wenn:


Sie erhalten eine E-Mail, um sich für eine oder beide Optionen anzumelden.


Holen Sie sich Ihr Benutzerhandbuch per E-Mail

Geben Sie Ihre E-Mail-Adresse ein, um das Handbuch zu erhalten von Saab 9-3 in der Sprache / Sprachen: Englisch als Anhang in Ihrer E-Mail.

Das Handbuch ist 23,62 mb groß.

 

Sie erhalten das Handbuch in Ihrer E-Mail innerhalb von Minuten. Wenn Sie keine E-Mail erhalten haben, haben Sie wahrscheinlich die falsche E-Mail-Adresse eingegeben oder Ihre Mailbox ist zu voll. Darüber hinaus kann es sein, dass Ihr ISP eine maximale Größe für E-Mails empfangen kann.

Andere Handbücher von Saab 9-3

Saab 9-3 Kurzanleitung - Holländisch - 28 seiten

Saab 9-3 Bedienungsanleitung - Holländisch - 304 seiten


Das Handbuch wird per E-Mail gesendet. Überprüfen Sie ihre E-Mail.

Wenn Sie innerhalb von 15 Minuten keine E-Mail mit dem Handbuch erhalten haben, kann es sein, dass Sie eine falsche E-Mail-Adresse eingegeben haben oder dass Ihr ISP eine maximale Größe eingestellt hat, um E-Mails zu erhalten, die kleiner als die Größe des Handbuchs sind.

Ihre Frage wurde zu diesem Forum hinzugefügt

Möchten Sie eine E-Mail erhalten, wenn neue Antworten und Fragen veröffentlicht werden? Geben Sie bitte Ihre Email-Adresse ein.



Info